ABL700 Series Service Manual 989 422 Issue 200206 1 PDF

Service Manual
for ABL™700 series

1. Introduction
2. Troubleshooting
3. Checkout and Adjustment
ABL700 Series 4. Replacement Procedures

Service Manual
5. Installation, Configuration, and Test
Procedures
6. Periodic Service Procedures
7. Service Programs
8. Module Description
9. Spare Parts
10. Drawings and Test Reports
Service Notes
Issue
ABL700 Series Service Manual 1. Introduction
1. Introduction
Overview
Introduction This chapter gives an introduction to the servicing of the analyzer together with
important information for understanding the procedures and requirements.
Contents This chapter contains the following topics:

Service Policy .................................................................................................. 1-2
Test Equipment and Tools ............................................................................... 1-5
Installation ID .................................................................................................. 1-7
Key Concept..................................................................................................... 1-8
1-1
1. Introduction ABL700 Series Service Manual
Service Policy
Introduction This section outlines the policies and procedures which must be followed when
servicing Radiometer Medical A/S instruments.
The service policy for the ABLTM700 Series has been outlined to obtain a
maximum degree of reliability and a minimum of repair time.
This is obtained by demanding the advanced and time-consuming troubleshooting,
repair and testing to be carried out at the factory.
Further, a combination of comprehensive troubleshooting procedures in the
Service Manual, a variety of self-check and service programs, and a high degree of
modulization facilitates quick localization of faults in the analyzers.
Continuous reliability is ensured by using the test equipment, procedures and spare
parts listed in this Service Manual.
Exceptions from the service policy are not allowed unless special permission or
instructions in writing has been given beforehand, by Radiometer Medical A/S.
Warranty Radiometer Medical A/S cannot guarantee the instrument's performance

Disclaim specifications and safety or accept any warranty claims unless:
· The recommended maintenance procedures outlined in the Operator’s and
Service Manuals are performed.
· The accessories and spare parts specified by Radiometer Medical A/S are used.
Warranty claims for parts which suffer from physical damage, unauthorized
attempted repair, or exposure to conditions other than those specified by
Radiometer Medical A/S (e.g. temperature, humidity, line voltage outside specified
limits) will not be accepted.
Non-Original Spare Parts and Accessories in General

Parts In order to ensure the reliability and durability and operation in accordance with
technical specifications only original Radiometer Medical A/S parts, or parts
approved by Radiometer Medical A/S must be used.
This concerns both spare parts and accessories.
Software
Software is considered to be spare parts. Thus it is not permitted to install software
which has not been delivered from Radiometer.
Electrostatic In order to ensure the reliability and durability of the analyzer, ESD protection
Discharge precautions must always be taken when handling or exposing ESD sensitive parts.
Protection Parts such as printed circuit boards may be damaged if handled incorrectly during
storage and service. The damage is not visible, and the damaged parts may not fail
immediately but several months later.
Continued on next page
1-2
Service Policy, Continued
Installation Test In connection with installation, repair, and upgrade of an analyzer it is usually
and Service Disk required that a Module Installation Test or a Service Test is carried out to verify
that the analyzer calibrates and measures correctly using the appropriate quality
control solution. For details, please refer to Chapter 5.
Upon the completion of any type of service, e.g. installation, repair, and upgrade, a
Service Disk may be generated for documentation (local file).
For details, please refer to the paragraph “Service Disk” in Chapter 5.
Repair Level The repair level outlines the extent to which it is allowed to dismantle an analyzer
in the process of troubleshooting and repair. This level is limited for several
reasons such as: the need for specialized test equipment, special environmental
requirements etc., and is optimized in relation to cost of parts, time of repair etc.
The repair level is indicated in the sections “Dismantling and Replacements” and
"Spare Parts List".
Electronics
Repair of the electronics is not allowed in the field. The reason for this is that most
of the electronics are based on the surface mounted technology (SMT) which
involves a high component density and thereby a high complexity. Repair of this
kind of printed circuit boards (PCB) requires advanced troubleshooting, repair and
test facilities, which are only available at the factory. Larger PCBs are defined as
modules which may be returned to the factory for replacement under the trade-in
arrangement for modules - these PCBs are marked with “*” next to the description
in the spare parts list. As repair is not allowed in the field, detailed circuit diagrams
are not included in the Service Manual.
Wet Section
Most of the electromechanical and pure mechanical parts of the wet section may be
repaired to component level; tubing, valves and pump motors and the like are
regarded as components. The various programs facilitate check-out and adjustment
of the various parts and also verification of their function after repair.
Some mechanical and optical reassembles and adjustments are critical for their
function. Such parts are not to be dismantled further than indicated in the spare
parts list.
None of the wet section parts are included in the trade-in arrangement for modules.
1-3
Service Policy, Continued
Warning Notices Follow legal requirements and local rules for safe work practices with chemicals.
Working with blood gas analyzers may result in contact with blood remnants and
with harsh disinfectants. During the various procedures wear suitable protection
gear (gloves, face protection, and protective body clothing), following legal
requirements and local rules for safe work practices.
The gloves must be free of pin holes and preferably puncture resistant. Please
consult the glove manufacturer for further information.
If contaminated material comes into contact with any lesion on the body, seek
medical advice.
AutoCheck The AutoCheck Module contains a laser scan engine which is rated as a "Class 1
Module Laser Product" according to IEC 60825-1, 1998-01.
Calibration and While performing calibrations and measurements, the analyzer must be fully
Measurement assembled. This includes the black cover for the OXI Module (to avoid
interference from strong ambient light) and the cover over the wet section (to
ensure correct thermostatting).
1-4
Test Equipment and Tools
Introduction This paragraph lists the test equipment and tools required for servicing the
ABL700 Series analyzers.
Required The following test equipment and tools are required for servicing the analyzer:
Equipment and Parts marked with “N/A” in the “Part #” column are to be purchased locally.
Tools
Part # Description Used For
390-079 PHA860 pH Meter Tester Check of electrode channels
N/A 4½ digit DMM, Fluke 8060A, Various checks
or any with equivalent or better
specifications
N/A PS/2 alphanumerical keyboard Troubleshooting the PC Module
N/A PC diagnostic tool, e.g. CheckIt Troubleshooting the PC Module
902-049 Dummy electrode Check of pH and electrolyte
electrode channels
902-050 Dummy electrode, 100 MW Check of pO2 and Metabolite
electrode channels
636-424 Test Resistor, 6.1 kW with cable Check of temperature monitors
N/A Formatted disk, empty Storing installation and service
data, Service Disk
989-409 Labels “ABL700 Service Disk” For labeling of service disks
TM
Various QUALICHECK 5+ solution For performing a test of the
S7730, S7740, S7750, S7760, or measurement quality during the
installation test
AUTOCHECKTM5+ solution
S7735. S7745, S7755, S7765
920-627 Tubing Tweezers Mounting of tubing
902-548 Spanner for valves Removal and mounting of the
membrane valves
N/A Screwdriver, 10 Torx PC Module primarily
N/A Screwdriver, 20 Torx Various screws at the bottom of the
analyzer
013-915 1.5 mm Allen key Various screws
1-5
Test Equipment and Tools, Continued
Required
Equipment and Part # Description Used For
Tools N/A Screwdriver, 2.0 mm Pozidrive Various screws
(continued)
920-643 Screwdriver, 3.0 mm Pozidrive Various screws
920-644 Screwdriver, 4.0 mm Pozidrive Various screws
914-312 Windows 95, Release 7, English Installation of Windows 95
software
914-311 Windows 95, Release 7, Installation of Windows 95
Japanese software
913-669 ABL700 Boot Disk for Formatting the C drive
Windows 95 Release 7
914-338 Windows 95, Release 8, English Installation of Windows 95
software
914-337 Windows 95, Release 8, Installation of Windows 95
Japanese software
913-750 ABL700 Boot Disk for Formatting the C drive
Windows 95 Release 8
914-499 ABL700 software, V3.71 Installation of ABL700 software
913-635 Windows 95 Certificate of To be purchased in case the
Authenticity original certificate has been lost
Windows 95 Two versions of Windows 95 exist for the ABL700 Series analysers. The table
Compatibility below indicates which version is to be used with which analysers.
Windows 95 To be used with

Release 7 Basic Unit (902-441) below R0168
The PC Module is equipped with the Main CPU PCB type
PCM-5890 (902-589).
Release 8 Basic Unit (902-441) of R0168 onwards
The PC Module is equipped with the Main CPU PCB type
PCM-5896 (902-643).
1-6
Installation ID
Introduction This paragraph explains the term “Installation ID”.
Module ID Each individual analyzer consists of a number of separate modules each with a
unique identification number. An identification number has the following syntax:
902-441R0012N0002 which is also called the serial number.
The module ID numbers are used for a large variety of purposes, e.g. tracing.
Analyzers An analyzer may consist of the following modules:

Consist of
Modules Module Module ID
Basic Unit 902-441RxxxxNzzzz
pH/BG Module 902-438RxxxxNzzzz
El/Met Module 902-439RxxxxNzzzz
Oximetry Module 902-434RxxxxNzzzz
AutoCheck Module 902-443RxxxxNzzzz
The Basic Unit is in principle a complete analyzer in which the measuring modules
are missing.
Installation ID A complete working analyzer is denoted an “installation”. An installation is in

principle identified by the module ID for the Basic Unit. However, in order to be
able to differentiate between a Basic Unit and an Installation we have put an “I” in
front of the module ID.
The syntax for an Installation ID is thus; “I-902-441RxxxxNyyyy”.
Use of The installation ID is used for identifying an analyzer in all respects, e.g.:
Installation ID
· For tracing purposes (both for the entire analyzer and its modules).
· For logging service actions.
· As a reference on service work orders and service disks.
· When ordering option keys.
The installation ID is thus the key to an analyzer.
1-7
Key Concept
Introduction This paragraph explains the key concept.
Protection of The ABL700 series includes a number of options which may be enabled upon
Options request and at a certain charge.
Examples are: Glucose, Lactate, Electrolytes.
The functionality of the analyzer (both the basic functions and especially the
options) are protected by a key system.
The analyzer software includes everything and the option keys ensure that
unauthorized use of option functionality is not possible.
The key system includes a hardware key (basic key) and a number of software
keys (option keys).
The analyzer cannot operate without the basic key.
Basic Key All analyzers include a unique battery-like hardware key, denoted Basic Key,
which is situated on the Analyzer Control PCB.
The Basic Key includes:
· A unique installation ID (for the analyzer)
· A unique serial number (of the basic key)
· A clock
The Basic Key will allow for all options to be demonstrated for a period of three
months after production. The three month period is counted down only when the
analyzer is switched on.
Option Key An Option Key is a piece of paper with a number of bar codes or a disk containing
the same information.
The contents of an option key is stored in the flash file system on the Analyzer
Control PCB. After having loaded the option key(s) it may take up to eight minutes
per option for the analyzer to decrypt the key and thus make the option(s)
available.
An option key is from the factory associated with a specific basic key and can thus
only be used with this specific installation.
Replacement of In case the Analyzer Control PCB becomes defective and needs to be replaced the
Analyzer basic key is to be moved from the defective Analyzer Control PCB to the
Control PCB replacement PCB.
In addition, the option keys must be re-installed.
1-8
Key Concept, Continued
Replacement of In case the basic key becomes defective it must be replaced.

Basic Key
Since a basic key is unique for an individual analyzer (installation) a new basic key
(Service Key)
for this particular analyzer must be ordered and produced at the factory (the new
basic key requires new option keys - they will, however, automatically be included
with the new basic key from the production).
Two options are then available:
· Wait for the new basic key to arrive, then install the basic key and the new
option keys supplied with the new basic key
· Install a Service Key as a temporary fix (the service key allows the customer to
use all options for a three month period). When the new basic key with new
option keys is received, then install the basic key and option keys. The service
key may then be used as a temporary fix for another analyzer.
In both cases the original basic key must be returned to the manufacturer for credit
and destruction.
1-9
ABL700 Series Service Manual 2. Troubleshooting
2. Troubleshooting
Overview
Introduction This chapter describes the procedures to be used for troubleshooting the ABL700
Service Error Messages.
The gloves must be free of pin holes and preferably puncture resistant. Please
medical advice.
Contents Procedures, Service Error Codes...................................................................... 2-2

Hardware Error Codes...................................................................................... 2-61
Power Supply Errors ........................................................................................ 2-64
Status Codes..................................................................................................... 2-65
2-1
2. Troubleshooting ABL700 Series Service Manual
Procedures, Service Error Codes
Introduction Messages are presented at three levels: User, Lab Manager and Service. The level
of details increases when going from User to Lab Manager and to Service.
This chapter lists in numerical order the messages shown at the Service level.
Important Always consult the Operator’s Manual for actions related to the User and Lab
Manager levels before proceeding to the Service Manual for actions related to the
Service level.
Since User and Lab Manager messages are repeated at the Service level, a “No
action required” in the “Service Actions” column below is preceded by actions
required as stated in the Operator’s Manual, where necessary.
Please note that some messages are information only.
Messages This table gives interpretations of the messages and suggested service actions:
# Message Interpretation Service Actions

1 Inconsistent The versions of the Upgrade the software for the
software different software module in question.
versions. Please modules are Reinstall analyzer software.
contact service. inconsistent. May
appear when
exchanging a
complete module or
as a result of
incomplete software
upgrade.
83 Measured value Parameter value is Perform a complete QC and
above reference above the upper limit troubleshoot accordingly.
range but within of the user-defined
the critical limits reference range but
not outside the
critical limits. This is
only a message, not
an error.
below reference below the lower limit troubleshoot accordingly.
range but within of the user-defined
the critical limits reference range but
not outside the
critical limits. This is
only a message, not
an error.
2-2
Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued
Messages
(continued) # Message Interpretation Service Actions

is below the below the lower limit troubleshoot accordingly.
critical limits but of the user-defined
within the critical limits but
measuring range within the measuring
range.
This is only a
message, not an error.
is above the above the upper limit troubleshoot accordingly.
critical limits but of the user-defined
within the critical limits but
measuring range within the measuring
range.
This is only a
message, not an error.
89 Measured QC Measured parameter No action required.
value above the value is above the
defined control upper limit of the
range defined control range
but within the
statistical range.
90 Measured QC Measured parameter No action required.
value below the value is below the
defined control lower limit of the
range defined control range
but within the
statistical range.
93 Measured value Parameter Check the electrode channel for
above the measurement value is the actual parameter according
measuring range higher than the upper to the Electrode Check
limit of the analyzer procedure.
measuring range. See Check/replace actual module
Chapter 14 for PCB.
parameter measuring
ranges.
2-3
Messages
94 Measured value Parameter Check the electrode channel for

below the measurement value the actual parameter according
measuring range lies below the lower to the Electrode Check
limit of the analyzer procedure.
measuring range. See Check/replace actual module
Chapter 14 for PCB.
parameter measuring
ranges.
99 LIS/HIS: Low General sending Check line speed, protocol,
level protocol error. LIS/HIS system configuration, cabling, etc.
send failed may not respond
correctly
(configuration) or
within the correct
time frame.
100 LIS/HIS: Low General receiving Check line speed, protocol,
level protocol error. LIS/HIS system configuration, cabling, etc.
receive failed7 may not respond
correctly
(configuration) or
within the correct
time frame.
101 LIS/HIS: Low This error message Check protocol and
level protocol should normally not configuration.
unable to send occur as some low
because level protocols, e.g.
connection is ASTM serial, are
busy queuing messages to
be sent later.
102 LIS/HIS: Low ABL700 receiver Check protocol, configuration,
level protocol timed-out during cabling, etc.
receive failed reception of a
because of message from the
timeout LIS/HIS system.
109 LIS/HIS: Low ACK or NAK was Check line speed, protocol,
level protocol not received from configuration, cabling, etc.
send failed, ACK LIS/HIS after sending
or NAK not last frame.
received
2-4
Messages
115 LIS/HIS: Low ACK or NAK was Check line speed, protocol,
level protocol not received from configuration, cabling, etc.
ACK after ENQ LIS/HIS after sending
not received ENQ.
117 LIS/HIS: The configuration Reconfigure the high level
Connection was incorrect. protocol.
manager Change forth and back between
configuration not the different high-level
correct protocols.
If error persists, remove the
connection and then add it again
using another name.
Reinstall analyzer software.
118 LIS/HIS: The configuration Reconfigure the high level
Connection seems correct, but the protocol.
manager could connection could still Change forth and back between
not open high not be opened. the different high-level
level protocol protocols.
using another name.
Reinstall the analyzer software.
128 LIS/HIS: Failed The configuration Reconfigure the high and low
to open seems correct, but the level protocols.
connection connection could still Change forth and back between
not be opened. the different protocols.
using another name.
129 LIS/HIS: Failed The connection has Ensure that the connection has
to close been opened been running normally.
connection properly, but errors If error persists, reconfigure the
occurred when connection.
closing the Remove the connection and
connection. then add it again using another
name.
2-5
Messages
131 LIS/HIS: Failed The connection is lost See corresponding low or high-
to send packet or removed while level protocol error messages.
sending (reported by If error persists, reinstall
either low or high analyzer software.
level protocol).
132 LIS/HIS: Failed The connection is lost See corresponding low or high-
to receive packet or removed while level protocol error messages.
receiving (reported by If error persists, reinstall
either low or high analyzer software.
level protocol).
133 LIS/HIS: High The configuration Reconfigure the low level
level protocol was incorrect. protocol.
could not open Change forth and back between
low level the different low-level
protocol protocols.
If problem persist, remove the
connection and add it again
using another name.
134 LIS/HIS: High The configuration Reconfigure the high level
level protocol was incorrect. protocol.
configuration not Change forth and back between
correct the different high-level
protocols.
using another name.
135 LIS/HIS: High The configuration Reconfigure the high level
level protocol seems correct, but the protocol.
could not open connection could still Change forth and back between
connection not be opened. the different high-level
protocols.
using another name.
2-6
Messages
141 LIS/HIS: Low The configuration Reconfigure the connection.

level protocol was incorrect. It may If error persists, remove the
configuration not be an incorrect port connection and add it again
correct number, IP address, using another name.
etc.
142 LIS/HIS: Low The configuration Reconfigure the connection.
level protocol seems correct, but the If error persists, remove the
failed to open connection could still connection and add it again
connection not be opened. It may using another name.
be an incorrect port
number, IP address,
etc.
143 LIS/HIS: Low The connection has Ensure that the connection has
level protocol been opened been running normally.
failed to close properly, but errors If problem persists, reconfigure
connection occurred when the connection.
closing the Remove the connection and add
connection. it again using another name.
165 LIS/HIS: High It was not possible to Check the transmission format
level protocol generate the file and correct errors if
could not transmission frames necessary.
generate high from the ABL7XX Reinstall analyzer software.
level packet data provided. May
be caused by missing
or bad transmission
format file, e.g.
ASTM.ini,
ASTM6.ini, or
HL7.ini.
166 LIS/HIS: Low The received message Check the protocol setting at
level protocol had an unexpected both ends.
received packet format.
in wrong format
2-7
Messages
167 LIS/HIS: High The received message Change the format of the
level protocol could not be messages transmitted from the
received packet translated into LIS/HIS system.
in wrong format ABL7XX data. The
expected format of
the messages is found
in the ASTM.ini,
ASTM6.ini, or
HL7.ini files.
200 User msg: This is not an error. It No action required.
indicates an operator-
entered note in the
log.
201 Westgard Rule Parameter No action required.
(1.2s) violation measurement value is
outside the mean +/-
2 SD range.
outside the mean +/-
3 SD range.
the second
consecutive for the
slot outside the mean
+/- 2 SD range. This
may indicate a shift.
204 Westgard Rule The difference from No action required.
(R.4s) violation the measurement on
the same slot exceeds
the 4 SD range. This
may indicate an
inconsistency in your
procedure or an
unstable analyzer.
2-8
Messages

the fourth consecutive
measurement outside
the mean +/- 1 SD
range on the same
side of the mean. A
trend or shift is
indicated. Patient
results should be
considered unreliable
until the problem is
corrected.
(10.x) violation measurement value is
the tenth consecutive
measurement on the
same side of the
mean. A trend or shift
is indicated. Patient
results should be
considered unreliable
until the problem is
corrected.
207 Calibration One or more No action required.
schedule scheduled
reminder(s) calibrations are
present overdue.
208 Quality control One or more QC No action required.
schedule measurements are
reminder(s) overdue.
present
209 Replacement One or more No action required.
schedule scheduled
reminder(s) replacements are
present overdue.
2-9
Messages
210 Calibration An error occurred on Check the Calibration Status for

error(s) present one or more detailed information on the
parameters during the actual error. Refer to that
last calibration. specific error message.
211 Quality control One or more errors Check the QC Status for
error(s) present occurred in the last detailed information on the
quality control actual error. Refer to that
measurement. specific error message.
212 System One or more systems Check the System Status for
message(s) errors are present. detailed information on the
present actual error. Refer to that
specific error message.
213 Automatic The last scheduled Check Network port
backup failed automatic backup connection.
failed. Check through the Windows
Explorer if Network
Neighborhood is available.
Check connections on Main
CPU PCB.
Check/replace Main CPU PCB.
214 Automatic The last scheduled No action required.
backup automatic backup was
succeeded successful.
215 Automatic The last scheduled Check Network port
backup failed. automatic backup connection.
Error code: failed. Check through the Windows
Explorer if Network
Neighborhood is available.
Check connections on Main
CPU PCB.
Check/replace Main CPU PCB.
2-10
Messages
216 Printer error The printer is out of Check paper. Clear jam or
paper; paper is install new roll as required.
jammed, or other. Check the Status of the Printer
via the Windows95 Control
Panel.
Perform a Test printout.
Check that the correct driver is
installed.
Reboot the analyzer.
Check/replace the printer PCB.
Check/replace the Thermal
printer unit.
217 Replacement: The message is used No action required.
in the Activity Log to
indicate a
replacement.
219 Conditioning Conditioning error in Check/replace liquid sensors on
error in El/Met electrolyte/metabolite El/Met module.
electrode module electrode module due Check/replace El/Met pump.
to missing detection Check/replace valves on El/Met
of Rinse solution. module.
The glucose and Check/replace Solution pump.
lactate results are Check El/Met module.
reported as ".....".
232 Oxi Water Water spectrum Check Lamp intensity and
Spectrum intensity was too low troubleshoot accordingly.
Intensity Bad or too high during Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
absorbance to pinpoint/correct the failing
calculation. OXI sub-unit.
measurements cannot Call Status for the failing sub-
be performed. unit.
Check optic fiber.
Check/replace the failing sub-
unit.
Check/replace the OXI
Controller PCB.
Check the OXI Module.
2-11
Messages
234 Oxi Sample Sample spectrum Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'

Spectrum intensity was too low to pinpoint/correct the failing
Intensity too low during absorbance sub-unit.
calculation. OXI Call Status for the failing sub-
measurements cannot unit.
be performed. Check Lamps and/or make a
Lamp adjustment.
Check Optic fiber.
Check/replace the failing sub-
unit.
Controller PCB.
235 Spectrometer Checksum error on Make an 'OXI Complete Test' to
EEPROM the EEPROM data. pinpoint/correct the problem.
reading failed OXI measurements Check/replace the cable to the
cannot be performed. Spectrometer.
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
236 Spectrometer Error during writing Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
EEPROM to spectrometer to pinpoint/correct the problem.
writing failed EEPROM. Check/replace the cable to the
Spectrometer.
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
237 Spectrometer Electronic adjustment Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
voltage bias too of spectrometer to pinpoint/correct the problem.
high voltage offset was Check cable to Spectrometer.
outside range. Check/replace the OXI
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
2-12
Messages
238 Spectrometer Electronic adjustment Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'

voltage bias too of spectrometer to pinpoint/correct the problem.
low voltage offset was Check cable to Spectrometer.
outside range. Check/replace the OXI
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
245 Spectrometer Measured Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
temperature too spectrometer to pinpoint/correct the problem.
high temperature too high. Check the actual temperature on
Wavelength the spectrometer.
correction may not be Check cable to Spectrometer.
valid any more. Check/replace the OXI
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
246 Spectrometer Measured Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
temperature too spectrometer to pinpoint/correct the problem.
low temperature too low. Check the actual temperature on
Wavelength the spectrometer.
correction may not be Check cable to Spectrometer.
valid any more. Check/replace the OXI
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
247 Spectrometer Self test of OXI Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
A/D converter controller 12-bit to pinpoint/correct problem.
failed ADC failed. It is not Check/replace the cable to the
possible to measure Spectrometer.
with the Check/replace the OXI
Spectrometer. Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
2-13
Messages
248 Spectrometer A/D converter trigger Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'

missing trigger signals missing from to pinpoint/correct problem.
spectrometer. Check/replace the cable to the
Spectrometer.
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
249 Halogen Lamp Halogen lamp voltage Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
voltage too high is too high or internal to pinpoint/correct problem.
control voltage in Check/adjust/replace the
halogen driver is too Halogen Lamp.
high. Check lamp cable.
Check/replace the Lamp Unit
PCB.
Controller PCB.
250 Halogen lamp Halogen lamp voltage Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
voltage too low is too low or internal to pinpoint/correct problem.
control voltage in Check lamp cable.
halogen driver is too Check/adjust/replace the
low. Halogen Lamp.
PCB.
Controller PCB.
251 Halogen Lamp Too high intensity Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
intensity too high from halogen lamp. It to pinpoint/correct problem.
is not possible to Check/adjust/replace the
make an OXI Halogen Lamp.
measurement. Check/replace the Lamp Unit
PCB.
Controller PCB.
2-14
Messages
252 Halogen Lamp Too low intensity Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
intensity too low from halogen lamp. It to pinpoint/correct problem.
is not possible to Check/adjust/replace the
make an OXI Halogen Lamp.
measurement. Check Optic fiber.
PCB.
Controller PCB.
254 Photodiode Photodiode current Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
current setting setting to achieve to pinpoint/correct problem.
too high 4.00Volts over Check lamp cable.
halogen lamp is too Check/adjust/replace the
high. It is not possible Halogen Lamp.
to make an OXI Check/replace the Lamp Unit
measurement. PCB.
Controller PCB.
255 Photodiode Photodiode current Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
current setting setting to achieve to pinpoint/correct problem.
too low 4.00Volts over Check lamp cable.
halogen lamp is too Check/adjust/replace the
low. It is not possible Halogen Lamp.
to make an OXI Check/replace the Lamp Unit
measurement. PCB.
Controller PCB.
256 Neon Lamp Neon lamp voltage Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
voltage too high too high. to pinpoint/correct problem.
Check/replace the Neon Lamp.
Controller PCB.
2-15
Messages
257 Neon Lamp Neon lamp voltage Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
voltage too low too low. The to pinpoint/correct problem.
hemolyzer driver also Check for Hemolyzer short
supplies voltage to circuits (cables etc.).
the Neon lamp. Check/replace the Neon Lamp.
Controller PCB.
258 Neon Lamp Neon lamp output is Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
intensity too low below limits. to pinpoint/correct problem.
Check lamp cable.
Check/replace the Neon Lamp.
Check the optical fiber for
damages.
Controller PCB.
259 Temp. error: Oxi Temperature of lamp Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
photodiode monitor photodiode is to pinpoint/correct problem.
outside tolerance (45 Check lamp cable.
+/- 0.3 C) Check/replace the Lamp Unit
PCB.
Check/replace the OXI Module
PCB.
269 Hemolyzer phase Hemolyzer phase Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
regulation failed regulation error to pinpoint/correct problem.
exceeds limits. Check hemolyzer cable.
Check/replace the Hemolyzer
Unit.
Controller PCB.
2-16
Messages
270 Temp. error: Hemolyzer Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'

Hemolyzer temperature is outside to pinpoint/correct problem.
tolerance (37 +/- 0.5 Check the Hemolyzer
C). temperature according to the
Temperature Check procedure.
Check/replace the Temperature
Sensor in Hemolyzer Unit.
Controller PCB.
290 Warning: SHb FSHb detected in the No action required.
detected range of 1-10 %.
291 SHb too high FSHb detected No action required.
greater than 10%.
Measurement
accuracy is affected.
292 Turbidity too Turbidity greater than Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
high 5% which is too high to pinpoint/correct problem.
for reliable Check the tubing for leakage.
measurements. Check/replace the Hemolyzer.
Controller PCB.
293 Warning: HbF FHbF is detected as No action required.
detected and being greater than 20
compensated for % of ctHb.
314 Oxi wavelength Wavelength Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
deviation large correction outside to pinpoint/correct problem.
limits Perform a Service tHb
calibration.
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
Check the OXI module.
2-17
Messages
315 Neon number too Fneon too high Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
high to pinpoint/correct problem.
Perform a Service tHb
calibration.
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
316 Neon number too Fneon too low, Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
low maybe caused by a to to pinpoint/correct problem.
low neon intensity. Check neon intensity.
Perform a Service tHb
calibration.
Controller PCB.
Check/replace the
Spectrometer.
326 Gas 1 cylinder Gas 1 cylinder is Replace the Gas 1 cylinder.
empty detected empty Check the Gas module
according to the Gas module
check program.
Check/replace Pressure
transducer.
Check/replace the Gas 1 Valve.
Check/replace the Analyzer
Control PCB.
327 Gas 2 cylinder Gas 2 cylinder is Replace the Gas 2 cylinder.
empty detected empty Check the Gas module
according to the Gas module
check program.
transducer.
Control PCB.
2-18
Messages
328 No leading air Too small or missing Clean the inlet gasket and inlet
segment in inlet's air segment in front probe. Perform Liquid Sensor
liquid sensor of sample during Adjustment.
within time sample aspiration. Check the Inlet according to the
frame Causes measurement Inlet Check procedure.
to abort. Check/replace Inlet probe and
tubing.
Check for leaks in the Fluidic
Module.
Check/replace Fluidic Module
solution pump.
329 QC expiration The quality control No action required.
date exceeded measurement was
performed after the
expiration date of the
lot.
331 No sample Sample did not reach Check position of Inlet probe
detected during pH/BG lower liquid while aspirating sample.
sample aspiration sensor within Check/replace pH/BG lower
required time frame Liquid Sensor.
during sample Check for leaks in the Fluidic
aspiration. Module.
Causes measurement Check/replace Fluidic Module
to abort. solution pump.
Check/replace tubing.
Check/replace pH/BG Module
PCB.
332 No sample in Sample did not reach Check/replace pH/BG upper
pH/BG upper pH/blood gas upper Liquid Sensor.
liquid sensor liquid sensor within Check/replace pH/BG Module
within time limit required time frame pump.
during sample Check/replace pH/BG Module
aspiration. valves.
Causes measurement Check/replace tubing.
to abort. Check/replace pH/BG Module
PCB.
2-19
Messages
333 pH/BG upper Sample did not reach Check/replace pH/BG upper
liquid sensor is pH/BG upper liquid Liquid Sensor.
not full within sensor within Check/replace pH/BG Module
time limit required time frame pump.
during sample Check/replace pH/BG Module
aspiration. valves.
PCB.
339 Inlet Liquid Air detected too soon Check/replace Fluidic Module
Sensor empty too in the pH/BG lower solution pump.
soon, while Liquid Sensor during Check/replace tubing from Inlet
calibrating the calibration of the to pH/BG Module.
reagent pump solution pump. Perform an Inlet calibration.
Perform a Liquid Sensor
Adjustment.
Check/replace pH/BG lower
Liquid Sensor.
PCB.
Check/replace Analyzer Control
PCB.
340 Inlet Liquid Air not detected Perform a Liquid Sensor
Sensor not empty within timeout in the Adjustment.
within timeout, pH/BG lower Liquid Check/replace pH/BG lower
while calibrating Sensor during the Liquid Sensor.
reagent pump calibration of the Perform an Inlet calibration.
solution pump. Check/replace Fluidic Module
solution pump.
PCB.
PCB.
2-20
Messages
calibrating pH/BG Pump to pH/BG Module.
pH/BG pump Calibration. Perform an Inlet calibration.
Adjustment.
Liquid Sensor.
PCB.
PCB.
while calibrating Sensor during pH/BG Liquid Sensor.
pH/BG pump Pump Calibration. Perform an Inlet calibration.
solution pump.
PCB.
PCB.
calibrating El/Met Pump to pH/BG Module.
El/Met pump Calibration. Perform an Inlet calibration.
Adjustment.
Liquid Sensor.
PCB.
PCB.
2-21
Messages

while calibrating Sensor during El/Met Liquid Sensor.
El/Met pump Pump Calibration. Perform an Inlet calibration.
solution pump.
PCB.
PCB.
354 Temp. error: Temperature on the Check the temperature
Inlet preheater Inlet Module is regulation according to the
outside limits (37.0 + Temperature Check procedure.
3/- 0.5 C). Check/replace Inlet
Heater/Sensor.
Check/replace Inlet Module
PCB.
pH/BG module pH/BG Module is regulation according to the
outside limits. (37 +/- Temperature Check procedure.
0.25 C). Check/replace pH/BG Module
Heater/Sensor.
PCB.
El/Met module El/met Module is regulation according to the
outside limits (37 +/- Temperature Check procedure.
0.35 C). Check/replace El/Met Module
Heater/Sensor.
Check/replace El/Met Module
PCB.
Barometer barometer on the regulation according to the
Analyzer Control is Temperature Check procedure.
outside limits (37 +/- Check/replace Analyzer Control
1.0 C). PCB.
2-22
Messages
367 pH/BG not filled pH/Blood Gas Check/replace Fluidic Module

within time limit module upper liquid Cal Valves.
sensor did not report Check for leaks in the
full within time measuring string.
frame, when filling Check/replace the Fluidic
the module with Module solution pump and the
calibration solution. pH/BG pump.
Causes the calibration Perform a Liquid Sensor
program to abort. Adjustment.
Check Liquid Sensors' values.
Replace Liquid Sensors if
needed.
369 El/Met not filled El/Met module upper Check/replace the Fluidic
within time limit liquid sensor did not Module Cal Valves.
report full within time Check for leaks in the
frame, when filling measuring string.
the module with Check/replace the Fluidic
calibration solution. Module solution pump and the
Causes the calibration El/Met Module pump.
program to abort. Perform a Liquid Sensor
Adjustment.
Check liquid sensors' values.
Replace liquid sensors if
needed.
374 Inhomogeneous Air bubbles detected Check/replace inlet gasket.
sample at pH/BG in sample by the Check/replace inlet probe and
module pH/BG lower liquid tubing.
sensor, which may Check/replace tubing from Inlet
effect the to pH/BG Module.
measurement. Check/replace pH/BG lower
All parameters Liquid Sensor.
marked with "?". Check/replace the pH/BG
Module PCB.
2-23
Messages
375 Calibration status The status value is Check/replace Fluidic Module

out of limits outside the range for valves.
the given parameter: Check/replace pumps.
pH: 6.700-8.100 Check the electrode channel for
pCO2: 6.20 - 2600 the actual parameter according
mmHg or 0.83 - to the Electrode Check
34.67 kPa procedure.
K+: 0.5 - 12.0 Check/replace actual module
mmol/L PCB.
Na++: 10-250 If message refers to pCO2
mmol/L during startup calibration, verify
Ca++: 0.10 - 20.0 that barcodes for the calibration
mmol/L gasses have been scanned.
Cl-: 30.0 - 900.0
mmol/L
376 Calibration Drift The Drift 1 value Check/replace Fluidic Module
1 out of range exceeds the user- valves.
defined tolerance. A Check/replace pumps.
leaking valve may Check the electrode channel for
result in mixing of the actual parameter according
calibration solutions. to the Electrode Check
procedure.
Check OXI system.
Check/replace actual module
PCB.
377 Calibration Drift The Drift 2 value Check/replace Fluidic Module
2 out of range exceeds the user- valves.
defined tolerance. A Check/replace pumps.
leaking valve may Check the electrode channel for
result in mixing of the actual parameter according
calibration solutions. to the Electrode Check
procedure.
Check/replace actual module
PCB.
2-24
Messages
378 Calibration The sensitivity value Check/replace Fluidic Module

sensitivity out of is out of range for the valves.
range given parameter: Check/replace pumps.
pH: 92 -103 % Check the electrode channel for
pCO2: 85 -100 % the actual parameter according
pO2: 5 -40 pA/mmHg to the Electrode Check
or 37.51 -300.0 procedure.
pA/kPa Check/replace actual module
K+: 92 - 105 % PCB.
Na+: 90 - 105 % If message refers to pO2 or
Ca++: 90 - 105 % pCO2 during startup calibration,
Cl-: 85 - 100 % verify that barcodes for the
Glu: 100 - 1800 calibration gasses have been
pA/mM scanned.
Lac: 150 - 2000
pA/mM
379 Calibration A response fault Clean the actual measuring
unstable. occurred during chamber with protein remover
(Response fault) calibration. on a cotton stick.
Check the actual electrode
channel according to the
Electrode Check procedure.
Check the actual module.
386 Barometer out of Barometer out of the Check the barometer according
range range: 450-800 to the Barometer Check
mmHg or 60.0-106.7 procedure.
kPa. Check/replace the Analyzer
Measurement results Control PCB.
marked with a "?".
408 Zero current Zero current too high Perform a Zero current
error during calibration. adjustment.
Check the actual channel
according to the Electrode
Check procedure.
Check/replace the actual
module PCB.
2-25
Messages
443 Ca(7.4) not Ca++ at a pH of 7.4 is No action required.

usable not usable as the
actual pH is out of the
range 7.2-7.6.
452 Interference Interference detected Replace CAL 2 solution.
during during measurement. Check the actual channel
measurement according to the Electrode
Check procedure.
Check the Isolation according to
the Isolation Check procedure.
PCB.
467 Inhomogeneous Air bubbles detected Check/clean/replace inlet
sample at El/Met by the El/Met lower gasket.
module Liquid Sensor. All Check/replace inlet probe and
parameters marked tubing.
with Sample Error Check/replace tubing from Inlet
to pH/BG Module.
Check/replace tubing from
pH/BG Module to El/Met
Module.
Check/replace El/Met lower
Liquid Sensor.
Check/replace the El/Met
Module PCB.
474 No sample in The sample was not Check/replace El/Met upper
El/Met upper detected by the Liquid Sensor.
liquid sensor El/Met module's Check for leaks between the
within time limit upper liquid sensor pH/BG Module and the El/Met
within the required Module.
time limit. Check/replace El/Met Module
pump.
valves.
PCB.
2-26
Messages
475 No sample in The sample was not Check/replace OXI Module

Oxi's liquid detected by the Liquid Sensor value.
sensor within oximetry module's Check for leaks between
time limit liquid sensor within pH/BG, El/Met, and OXI
the required time Modules.
limit. Check/replace Fluidic Module
solution pump.
valves.
Check/replace OXI Controller
PCB.
476 Measurement A response fault Clean the actual measuring
unstable occurred on the given chamber with protein remover
parameter during on a cotton stick.
measurement. Check the actual electrode
channel according to the
Electrode Check procedure.
Check the actual module.
478 pCO2 drifting The pCO2 drift value Check the Gas Unit according
exceeds the user to the Gas Unit check
defined limits + 0.3 procedure.
kPa during flushing. Check/replace the pH/BG
Module pump and valves.
Check the pCO2 channel
check procedure.
480 pO2 drifting The pO2 drift value Check the Gas Unit according
exceeds the user to the Gas Unit check
defined limits + 0.3 procedure.
kPa during flushing. Check/replace the pH/BG
Module pump and valves.
Check the pO2 channel
check procedure.
2-27
Messages
481 No Rinse plug Indicates a fluid Check/replace the pH/BG

detected in Flush transport problem Module pump and valves.
during a flush. Check for leaks.
Check/replace the pH/BG upper
Liquid Sensor.
482 Rinse plug too Indicates a fluid Check/replace the pH/BG
large in Flush transport problem Module pump and valves.
during a flush. Check for leaks.
Check/replace the pH/BG upper
Liquid Sensor.
484 Today is last day After the current day, No action required.
in current quality control
statistical month statistics obtained
- remember to over the month will
print QC be deleted and new
statistics statistics begun.
487 A new statistical A new statistical No action required.
month has begun month has begun; you
- remember to have the rest of the
export WDC data month to export data
from the previous
month to a WDC
report.
493 Warning: The detected bilirubin No action required.
Bilirubin concentration is
detected and greater than 50
compensated for umol/L.
494 Bilirubin too The detected bilirubin No action required.
high concentration is
greater than 2000
umol/L.
2-28
Messages
499 Sample too early The oximetry module For capillary micro modes,
in OXI's liquid liquid sensor detected ensure that mixing wire is used.
sensor. liquid prematurely Perform a pump calibration.
during sample Clean/replace the inlet probe.
aspiration. Causes the Check/replace the OXI Module
activity to abort. Liquid Sensor.
Check/replace the Fluidic
Module solution pump.
Module valves.
500 Rinse detected by The upper pH/BG Check/replace pH/BG upper
pH/BG upper liquid sensor detected Liquid Sensor.
Liquid Sensor liquid unexpectedly. Check/replace pH/BG pump.
during filling Check/replace pH/BG valves.
from bottom Check/replace tubing.
Check pH/BG Module.
501 Rinse not Rinse solution was Check/replace pH/BG upper
aspirated into the not detected by the Liquid Sensor.
pH/BG module pH/BG upper liquid Check/replace pH/BG pump.
within time limit sensor, when Check/replace pH/BG valves.
aspirating from Check/replace tubing.
below. Check pH/BG Module.
502 Air detected Air detected in Check for leaks from Fluidic
during filling of continuous rinse Module solution pump to the
Inlet during segment being filled Rinse bottle.
Pump Cal - into the inlet probe. Perform a Liquid Sensor
retrying... The pump calibration Adjustment.
program will retry Check/replace the pH/BG lower
filling the inlet up to liquid sensor.
2 times more and
abort if unsuccessful.
503 Unable to fill Three unsuccessful Check for leaks from Fluidic
Inlet with attempts to fill the Module solution pump to the
continuous rinse inlet probe with a Rinse bottle.
segment during continuous rinse Perform a Liquid Sensor
Pump Calibration segment have failed, Adjustment.
and the Pump Check/replace the pH/BG lower
Calibration program Liquid Sensor.
aborts.
2-29
Messages
504 No sample in The sample was not Check/replace El/Met lower

El/Met lower detected at the lower Liquid Sensor.
Liquid Sensor electrolyte/metabolite Check/replace Fluidic Module
within time limit liquid sensor within solution pump.
time limit during Check/replace Fluidic Module
sample aspiration. Waste valve.
Causes the activity to Check/replace tubing.
abort. Check/replace El/Met Module
PCB.
Check or replace Analyzer
Control PCB.
506 El/Met upper The Check/replace El/Met upper
liquid sensor did electrolyte/metabolite liquid sensor.
not detect upper liquid sensor Check/replace Fluidic Module
Cleaning did not detect liquid solution pump.
Solution during the Cleaning Check/replace Fluidic Module
program. The activity valves.
is aborted. Check/replace tubing.
PCB.
PCB.
507 pH/BG upper The pH/blood gas Check/replace pH/BG upper
liquid sensor did upper liquid sensor Liquid Sensor.
not detect did not detect Check/replace solution pump.
Cleaning solution Cleaning solution. Check/replace Fluidic Module
Cleaning is aborted. valves.
PCB.
2-30
Messages
508 Rinse Error Rinse solution was Check for other Service
not detected during messages.
the Rinse program. Troubleshoot accordingly.
Measurements and
calibrations cannot be
performed until the
condition is removed.
509 pH/BG upper The pH/blood gas Check/replace tubing from
liquid sensor did upper liquid sensor pH/BG Module valves to
not receive Rinse did not detect Rinse Fluidic Module.
from above solution during rinse. Check/replace pH/BG Module
The rinse program is valves and pump.
aborted. Check/replace pH/BG upper
Measurements and Liquid Sensor.
calibrations cannot be Check/replace pH/BG Module
performed until the PCB.
510 El/Met upper The upper Check/replace tubing from
liquid sensor did electrolyte/metabolite El/Met Module valves to
not receive Rinse liquid sensor did not Fluidic Module.
from above detect Rinse solution Check/replace El/Met Module
during rinse. The valves and pump.
rinse is aborted. Check/replace El/Met upper
Measurements and liquid sensors.
calibrations cannot be Check/replace El/Met Module
performed until the PCB.
512 Temperature The temperature was Check for other Temperature
error outside the required Service messages.
temperature range Troubleshoot accordingly.
during the
measurement or
calibration. All
results marked with a
"?".
513 No gas Measurement or Check for other Service
calibration performed messages.
during gas error. Troubleshoot accordingly.
Activity is aborted.
2-31
Messages
521 Inhomogeneous Air bubbles detected Check with specific message.

sample in the sample. More
than 0.25 uL air was
detected by a liquid
sensor during sample
aspiration. Results
may have "?" and not
be reliable.
529 Inlet liquid The pH/BG lower Check the pH/BG lower Liquid
sensor error liquid sensor Sensor values in the Liquid
calibration failed. Sensor service program.
Check/replace the pH/BG
Module PCB.
531 pH/BG upper pH/BG upper liquid Check the pH/BG upper Liquid
Liquid Sensor sensor failed to Sensor values in the Liquid
error calibrate. Sensor service program.
Module pump.
Module PCB.
532 El/Met lower El/Met lower liquid Check the El/Met lower liquid
Liquid Sensor sensor failed to sensor values in the Liquid
module pump.
module PCB.
534 El/Met upper El/Met upper liquid Check the El/Met upper liquid
Liquid Sensor sensor failed to sensor values in the Liquid
Module pump.
Module PCB.
2-32
Messages
537 Oxi Liquid Oximetry module Check the OXI Module Liquid
Sensor error liquid sensor failed to Sensor values in the Liquid
calibrate. Sensor service program.
Controller PCB.
538 pH/BG pump The pH/blood gas Check/replace the pH/BG
error module pump failed Module pump.
to calibrate. Previous Check/replace the pH/BG
calibration used until Module PCB.
a successful pump Check the pH/BG upper Liquid
calibration is Sensor values in the Liquid
performed. Sensor service program.
539 El/Met pump The El/Met module Check/replace the El/Met
error pump failed to Module pump.
calibrate. Previous Check/replace the El/Met
calibration used until Module PCB.
a successful pump Check the pH/BG lower liquid
calibration is sensor values in the Liquid
541 Reagent pump The solution pump Check/replace the Fluidic
error failed to calibrate. Module solution pump.
Previous calibration Check/replace Analyzer Control
used until a PCB.
successful pump Check the pH/BG lower Liquid
calibration is Sensor values in the Liquid
545 LIS/HIS: High The connection has Ensure that the connection has
level protocol been opened been running normally.
could not close properly, but errors If problem persists, reconfigure
connection occurred when the connection.
closing the Remove the connection and add
connection. it again using another name.
556 Inlet Liquid The pH/BG lower Check/replace the pH/BG lower
Sensor full after Liquid Sensor failed Liquid Sensor.
adjustment to calibrate. Check/replace pH/BG Module
during Startup PCB.
2-33
Messages
557 pH/BG upper The pH/BG upper Check/replace pH/BG upper

Liquid Sensor Liquid Sensor failed Liquid Sensor.
full after to calibrate. Check/replace pH/BG Module
adjustment PCB.
during Startup
558 El/Met lower The El/Met lower Check/replace El/Met lower
Liquid Sensor Liquid Sensor failed liquid sensor.
full after to calibrate. Check/replace El/Met module
adjustment PCB.
during Startup
559 El/Met upper The Liquid Sensor Check/replace El/Met upper
Liquid Sensor failed to calibrate. Liquid Sensors.
full after Check/replace El/Met Module
adjustment PCB.
during Startup
562 Oxi Liquid The Liquid Sensor Check/replace OXI Module
Sensor full after failed to calibrate. Liquid Sensor.
adjustment Check/replace OXI Module
during Startup PCB.
564 No Cleaning No Cleaning solution Check for leaks in the liquid
solution detected was detected by string.
by Oxi liquid oximetry module Check/replace the OXI Module
sensor during liquid sensor during Liquid Sensor.
initializing. Startup. Check/replace the Fluidic
Module valves.
567 No Cal 2 solution No Cal 2 solution Check for leaks in the liquid
detected by Oxi detected by oximetry string.
liquid sensor module liquid sensor Check/replace the OXI Module
during during Startup. Liquid Sensor.
initializing Check/replace the Fluidic
Module valves.
2-34
Messages
568 No Cal 2 solution Check for leaks in the liquid

detected by Oxi string.
liquid sensor Check/replace the OXI Module
during Liquid Sensor.
initializing Check/replace the Fluidic
Module valves.
569 No Cal 1 solution No Cal 1 solution Check for leaks in the liquid
detected by Oxi detected by the string.
liquid sensor oximetry module Check/replace the OXI Module
during liquid sensor during Liquid Sensor.
initializing Startup. Check/replace the Fluidic
Module valves.
571 No Rinse No Rinse solution Check for leaks in the liquid
solution detected was detected by the string.
initializing Startup. Check/replace the Fluidic
Module valves.
573 Oxi Sample During the Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
spectrum absorbance, to pinpoint/correct problem.
intensity too high calculation intensity Adjust lamp.
data from the Sample Check/replace the OXI
measurement were Controller PCB.
found to be too high. Check/replace the
It is not possible to Spectrometer.
make a measurement. Check the OXI Module.
574 Missing Cal data Measurement system Check for other Service
has no calibration messages.
data. It is not possible Troubleshoot accordingly.
to make a Perform a 1- or 2- point
measurement. calibration.
2-35
Messages
577 Timing button The Basic key is Check that the Key is placed
missing missing or invalid. correctly.
No usage of the Check that contacts in the key
analyzer is possible. holder are OK.
Replace key and Check with another Key.
restart. Replace Analyzer Control PCB.
578 Option The protected options Replace Analyzer Control PCB.
management mechanism has been Contact Radiometer.
error tampered. No usage
of analyzer is
possible. Restart
analyzer.
579 Oximetry Parameter cannot be Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
hardware reliably measured to pinpoint the problem.
problem. Not because of a Troubleshoot accordingly.
possible to hardware problem.
measure.
580 Oximetry A hardware problem Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
hardware exists in the Oxi to pinpoint problem.
problem. module. Parameter Troubleshoot accordingly.
Possible to may be measured.
measure.
581 Oxi spectrum Spectrum deviates Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'
mismatch from expected blood to pinpoint/correct the problem.
or QC spectrum. Check/replace the OXI
Measurement may be Controller PCB.
unreliable. Check/replace the Spectrometer
module.
582 tHB calibration tHb calibration failed. Check other Service messages.
outside limits Troubleshoot accordingly.
583 Measurement The parameter value Check other Service messages.
value is outside is outside the Troubleshoot accordingly.
measuring range analyzer measuring
of the parameter range for that
parameter.
2-36
Messages
588 Measured QC The parameter value No action required.

value lower than is below the lower
statistical range limit of the user-
defined statistical
range but within the
measuring range.
Measurement is not
included in statistics.
589 Measured QC The parameter value No action required.
value higher than is above the upper
statistical range limit of the user-
defined statistical
range but within the
measuring range.
Measurement not
included into
statistics.
593 Insufficient Sample volume too Check/clean/replace inlet
sample small for the gasket.
measuring mode Check/replace inlet tubing.
selected. Some Check/replace tubing from Inlet
parameters marked to pH/BG Module.
with "?". Check/replace tubing from
Module.
Check/replace El/Met lower
Liquid Sensor.
Module PCB.
597 Liquid detected Unexpected liquid Check/replace the pH/BG
in pH/BG detected by the Module valves.
module during pH/BG upper liquid Check for leaks in the liquid
Gas Calibration sensor during string.
calibration. Check/replace the pH/BG
Calibration is Module pump.
aborted. Check/replace the pH/BG upper
Liquid Sensor.
2-37
Messages
600 Demo option will One or more demo Check with database that
expire soon options currently options have been installed.
installed on the Install options and inform
system will expire customer that message will
and be removed disappear again.
within the next 7
days.
602 Inlet not filled Air detected in Check for leaks from Fluidic
properly during expected Module solution pump to the
Rinse homogeneous rinse Rinse bottle.
segment in the inlet Perform a Liquid Sensor
Probe. The Rinse Adjustment.
program will retry Check/replace the pH/BG lower
filling the inlet up to Liquid Sensor.
2 times more and set
"Rinse Error" if
unsuccessful.
603 Options being Software options are No action required.
installed presently being
installed.
604 Parameter not Parameter capability Check the installed options in
installed has not been installed the Service Option program.
or is corrupted. Check that the message "options
Measurements on being installed" is not
parameter are unable displayed.
to be made. Restore the analyzer's options
from original data/bar code or
from the Option backup disk if
created.
605 Cal expired Too long time has No action required.
passed since the last
successful calibration
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
parameter considered
invalid and values
given as ".....".
2-38
Messages
606 Cal expired (pH) Too long time passed No action required.
since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
608 Cal expired Too long time passed No action required.
(pCO2) since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
609 Cal expired Too long time passed No action required.
(pO2) since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
610 Cal expired (K) Too long time passed No action required.
since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
2-39
Messages
611 Cal expired (Na) Too long time passed No action required.
since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
612 Cal expired (Ca) Too long time passed No action required.
since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
613 Cal expired (Cl) Too long time passed No action required.
since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
614 Cal expired (Glu) Too long time passed No action required.
since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
615 Cal expired (Lac) Too long time passed No action required.
since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
2-40
Messages
616 Cal expired (Oxi) Too long time passed No action required.
since the last
on the parameter.
Calibrations on the
invalid and values
given as ".....".
618 Waste detector The waste detector Check the Waste function
error may be faulty or according to the Waste Check
damaged. procedure.
Check Waste detector
connections.
Check/replace the Waste
Detector.
Control PCB.
619 Waste container The waste container Check the function of the bottle
missing is missing or not detectors in the Service Status
properly installed. Program.
Check/replace the left Bottle
Illumination PCB.
Module PCB.
620 Waste container Waste container is Check the Waste function
full filled to near according to the Waste Check
maximum capacity. procedure.
Unless replaced soon, Check Waste detector
analyzer may be connections.
placed in Standby Check/replace the waste
until the container is detector.
replaced. Check/replace the Analyzer
Control PCB.
2-41
Messages
621 Waste container The waste container Check the Waste function
critically full is filled to maximum according to the Waste Check
capacity. The procedure.
analyzer is placed in Check Waste detector
standby mode and no connections.
measurements or Check/replace waste detector.
calibrations can be Check/replace the Analyzer
performed. Control PCB.
622 Expected Liquid One or more of the No action required.
level below 0 solution bar codes
have not been entered
correctly during
replacement. The
analyzer is thus
unable to monitor
solution
consumption.
623 Solution empty Wet section activities No action required.
have been disabled
due to one or more of
the solution
containers being
empty.
624 Solution missing One or more of the Check the function of the bottle
solution containers is detectors in the Service Status
missing or poorly Program.
mounted. Check/replace the actual Bottle
Illumination PCB.
Module PCB.
628 No Cleaning Cleaning solution Check for leaks in the liquid
solution detected was not detected by string.
by Oxi liquid the OXI module Check/replace the OXI Module
sensor during liquid sensor. Liquid Sensor.
Refill Check/replace the Fluidic
Module valves.
2-42
Messages
630 No Cal 2 solution Cal 2 solution was Check for leaks in the liquid
detected by Oxi not detected by the string.
liquid sensor OXI module liquid Check/replace the OXI Module
during Refill sensor. Liquid Sensor.
Module valves.
632 No Cal 1 solution Cal 1 solution was Check for leaks in the liquid
detected by Oxi not detected by the string.
liquid sensor OXI module liquid Check/replace the OXI Module
during Refill sensor. Liquid Sensor.
Module valves.
634 No Rinse Rinse solution was Check for leaks in the liquid
solution detected not detected by the string.
Refill Refill. Check/replace the Fluidic
Module valves.
636 Gas 1 cylinder Low volume level Replace Gas 1 cylinder soon.
low pressure. detected in Gas 1 Check the Gas module
cylinder. according to the Gas module
check program.
transducer.
Control PCB.
2-43
Messages
637 Gas 2 cylinder Low volume level Replace Gas 2 cylinder soon.
low pressure. detected in Gas 2 Check the Gas module
cylinder. according to the Gas module
check program.
transducer.
Control PCB.
641 ABL/DMS PC The analyzer was No action required.
restarted restarted from power
off.
642 ABL/DMS PC Added by DMS PC No action required.
Connected to AU when connection to
wet section is
obtained.
643 ABL/DMS PC The connection from Reboot the analyzer.
Disconnected the DMS PC to wet Check connections from the
from AU section is lost. Main CPU board through the
Connector board to the
Analyzer Control PCB.
Control PCB.
Check/replace the Connector
PCB.
Check/replace the Main CPU
PCB.
644 Missing sample The Check/replace El/Met upper
at El/Met electrolyte/metabolite Liquid Sensor.
measuring module liquid sensor Check/replace El/Met Module
module in did not detect sample pump.
Capillary 95 uL during sample Check/replace El/Met Module
mode transport. valves.
Measurement is Check/replace tubing.
aborted. Check/replace El/Met Module
PCB.
2-44
Messages
648 Calibration failed The last calibration Check for other System
or not accepted was aborted or not messages and troubleshoot
accepted. accordingly.
652 Oxi liquid sensor Rinse solution was Check for leaks in the liquid
did not receive not detected by the string.
Rinse from the oximetry module Check/replace the OXI Module
Fluidic Module liquid sensor. Liquid Sensor.
Module valves.
653 Sample in Sample detected to be Check/replace inlet gasket.
pH/BG upper too soon in the Check/replace the pH/BG
liquid sensor pH/BG upper liquid Module pump and tubing.
prematurely sensor during Check/replace the pH/BG upper
during aspiration aspiration. Liquid Sensor.
Measurement is Check Fluidic Module valves.
aborted. Check/replace the pH/BG
For analyzers with Module PCB.
the El/Met Module
and in measuring
modes the module is
emptied while filling
the pH/BG Module.
654 Sample in El/Met Sample detected as Check/replace the El/Met
upper Liquid being in the Module pump and tubing.
Sensor electrolyte/metabolite Check/replace the El/Met upper
prematurely module liquid sensor Liquid Sensors.
during aspiration too soon during Check Fluidic Module valves.
aspiration. Check/replace the El/Met
Module PCB.
655 Sample in Sample detected as Check/replace inlet gasket.
pH/BG upper being in the pH/blood Check/replace the pH/BG
liquid sensor gas module liquid Module pump and tubing.
prematurely sensor too soon Check/replace the pH/BG upper
during aspiration during aspiration. Liquid Sensor.
Check Fluidic Module valves.
Module PCB.
2-45
Messages
656 Sample in Oxi The OXI module For capillary micro modes,
liquid sensor liquid sensor detected ensure that mixing wire is used.
prematurely liquid prematurely Perform a pump calibration.
during aspiration during sample Clean/replace the inlet probe.
aspiration. The Check/replace the OXI Module
activity is aborted Liquid Sensor.
(for analyzers without Check/replace the Fluidic
El/Met module or in Module solution pump.
measuring modes Check/replace the Fluidic
where El/Met module Module valves.
is not filled).
657 Top Plug never The Rinse solution at Check/replace the pH/BG
reached pH/BG the top of the pH/BG Module valves.
upper Liquid Module was not Check for leaks in the liquid
Sensor detected by the upper string.
Liquid Sensor in the Check/replace the pH/BG upper
Rinse program Liquid Sensor.
Module pump.
PCB.
658 Inlet flaps The analyzer entered Replace flaps.
removed HOLD because both
inlet flaps were
detected as being
removed.
659 Cover removed The analyzer entered Check that the magnet is placed
or window HOLD because the in the lid over the electrodes.
opened cover was removed or In the Service Status Program
the window to the check the function of the reed
electrode modules relay in the Inlet Module.
was opened. Check/replace reed relay.
PCB.
2-46
Messages
660 Inlet calibration An error occurred Check the Inlet according to the
error during inlet Inlet Check procedure.
calibration. Analyzer Check/replace Inlet washer.
is placed in the Hold Check/replace the Inlet Module
mode until problem is PCB.
corrected. Check the Inlet Module.
661 Leak detected A leak has been Check for leaks in the liquid
detected. The string.
analyzer is placed in Check/replace the Inlet gasket.
Hold mode until the Check/replace the pH/BG lower
problem is corrected. Liquid Sensor.
Check/replace pumps.
Check/replace Liquid Sensors.
662 Barometer out of The measured Check the barometer according
range barometer value is to the Barometer Check
outside the measuring procedure.
range (60 - 106.7 Check/replace the Analyzer
kPa). Control PCB.
663 Leakage A leak is suspected in Check for leaks in the liquid
the fluid transport string.
system. Check/replace the Inlet gasket.
Check/replace the pO2
electrode.
solution pump.
Check/replace Liquid Sensors.
664 Sample transport An error occurred Check for other transport error
error during the transport messages and remedy
of the sample through accordingly.
the analyzer.
671 Analyzing Unit An option under the Return set-up to default.
service setup non service setup has
default been changed from
the default setting.
2-47
Messages
672 Inlet error: Inlet calibration failed Check/replace optic sensor

Pickup offset because of a pickup cable.
adjust error offset adjustment Check/replace optic sensor.
error. Check/replace Inlet Module
PCB.
673 Inlet error: Optic Inlet calibration failed Check/replace optic sensor
ref point error because of an optic cable.
reference point error. Check/replace optic sensor.
PCB.
674 Inlet error: No Inlet calibration failed Check/replace gasket.
gasket detected because no gasket Check/replace optic sensor
was detected. cable.
Check/replace optic sensor.
PCB.
675 Inlet error: Inlet calibration failed Replace gasket.
Position calc. because of a position
error calculation error.
676 Inlet error: Inlet calibration failed Check/replace magnet.
Sensitivity out of because sensitivity Check/replace springs.
range was out of range. Check/replace optic sensor
cable.
Check/replace optic sensor.
PCB.
677 Unreliable Will be displayed if a Check/replace Liquid Sensors
measurement or on El/Met Module.
calibration has been Check/replace El/Met pump.
tried during a Check/replace Valves on
"Conditioning error El/Met Module.
in El/Met electrode Check/replace solution pump.
module". Check/replace El/Met Module.
2-48
Messages
678 Heater error One or more of the Restart the ABL.

measuring modules Check the duty cycle of the
have experienced heater for both the El/Met and
excessive heating. pH/BG Module, if one is zero
replace the heater.
Check/replace Inlet heater.
679 Barometer error Measured parameter Check for Barometer error
may be unreliable due messages.
to an error with the Troubleshoot accordingly
barometer.
680 pH/BG module The pH/blood gas Restart ABL.
not active module is not active Check connections to and from
or not responding due pH/BG Module.
to an internal Check pH/BG Module
communication hardware error section.
problem. Check/replace Analyzer Control
PCB.
Re-install software.
681 El/Met module - The El/Met module Restart ABL.
not active is not active or not Check connections to and from
responding due to an El/Met module.
internal Check El/Met module hardware
communication error section.
- Software PCB.
configuration does Re-install software.
not match analyzer
type.
682 Oxi module not - The oximetry Restart ABL.
active module is not active Check connections to and from
or not responding due OXI Module.
to an internal Check OXI Module hardware
- Software PCB.
configuration does Re-install software.
not match analyzer
type.
2-49
Messages
683 Inlet module not The Inlet module is Restart ABL.

active not active or not Check connections to and from
responding due to an Inlet Module.
internal Check Inlet Module hardware
PCB.
Re-install software.
688 ctHb/ceHb too ctHb < 1 mmol/L or Check the sample.
low for Oxi ceHb < 0.75 mmol/L. Run an OXI complete test and
calculation If ctHb is too low troubleshoot accordingly.
FHHb, FO2Hb,
FCOHb and FMetHb
are not calculated. If
ceHb = cHHb +
cO2Hb is too low
sO2 is not calculated.
689 Gas pressure The gas pressure Check the gas module
offset voltage out offset voltage according to the gas module
of range. measured from the check and troubleshoot
transducer is out of accordingly.
range 0.07V-0.35 V.
690 Automatic AU DMS software has No action required.
SW Repair detected that the
Analyzer Control
PCB does not have
any application
software and has
initiated an automatic
installation.
691 AU in bootstrap DMS software has No action required.
mode detected that the
Analyzer Control
PCB does not have
any application
software.
692 ABL not The analyzer is not No action required.
connected to connected to
Radiance Radiance.
2-50
Messages
693 ABL not The analyzer has No action required.

connected to been refused
Radiance - connection to
incorrect Radiance because of
password an incorrect
password.
694 ABL connected The analyzer is No action required.
to Radiance connected to
Radiance.
695 ABL The analyzer has No action required.
disconnected been disconnected
from Radiance from Radiance.
696 ABL<>Radiance Communication error Check that interconnecting
communication between the analyzer cables are connected to the
error and Radiance. designated ports and that the
connections are secure.
Check that the communication
settings are correct.
Replace the Main CPU PCB.
697 Requested The scheduled QC Refill AutoCheck carousel
AutoCheck QC ampoule was absent according to packing list.
ampoule not in the carousel. Verify that the QC-schedule is
present in been configured as expected.
carousel
698 Performing If the scheduled QC No action required.
AutoCheck on ampoule was absent
last ampoule in in the carousel, the
schedule instead analyzer was
of non-present configured to perform
QC measurement on
the last scheduled
ampoule.
699 AutoCheck QC The analyzer was No action required.
measurement configured to perform
started due to AutoCheck
calibration error measurements in case
of 1- or 2-point
calibration errors.
2-51
Messages
700 Scheduled Last calibration No action required.

AutoCheck not contained an error,
run due to errors and the user has
in last calibration configured the
analyzer so that no
AutoCheck
measurements will be
performed if this
happens.
703 QC expired QC measurement is No action required.
25% overdue (if
corrective action
"Lock analyzer" has
been selected in
Setup program
Corrective Actions).
704 AutoCheck QC The scheduled QC No action required.
measurement is measurement was not
repeated accepted; the
measurement was
repeated as requested
in Corrective Actions.
705 AutoCheck QC The scheduled and No action required.
measurement is the 1st QC
repeated twice measurement were
not accepted; the
measurement was
repeated twice as
requested in
Corrective Actions.
707 Replacement(s) Replacement is 10% No action required.
overdue by 10%. overdue (if corrective
Analyzer locked. action "Lock
analyzer" has been
selected in Setup
program Corrective
Actions).
2-52
Messages
708 Corrective action Scheduled No action required.

not possible due AutoCheck
to empty measurement was
AutoCheck requested, but the
carousel carousel was empty.
709 El/Met module Software Either:
not expected configuration does Switch analyzer off, remove the
not match analyzer El/Met module (and mount a
type. Blind module), and switch on
again.
Or:
Enter the Options service
program and touch Change
Analyzer Type to make the
analyzer accept the module.
710 Oxi module not Software Either:
expected configuration does Switch analyzer off, remove the
not match analyzer OXI Module (and mount a
type. Blind Module), and switch on
again.
Or:
Enter the Options service
program and touch Change
Analyzer Type to make the
analyzer accept the module.
711 Warning: DysHb Blood sample has a No action required.
High high level of DysHb.
712 FHbF Composition of blood No action required.
measurement not sample makes FHbF
possible measurement too
inaccurate, but
oximetry parameters
are corrected for HbF.
713 ctBil Blood sample ctHb is No action required.
measurement not so high that nearly no
possible plasma is left to
measure plasma
bilirubin on.
2-53
Messages
714 AutoCheck A mechanical error Check the AutoCheck module.

mechanical error has occurred in one of
the AutoCheck sub
modules.
715 AutoCheck Communication error Check internal cable
communication between AutoCheck connections.
error sub modules. Replace laser.
Replace AutoCheck Module
PCB.
716 AutoCheck cover The cover was Put the AutoCheck cover back
missing removed from the on
AutoCheck module.
717 Carousel packing The AutoCheck No action required.
non-optimal carousel has not been
packed according to
schedule.
718 AutoCheck A warning is No action required.
carousel will displayed in a user-
need refilling configurable time
soon before replacement is
due.
719 Insufficient Air bubbles detected Check/replace tubing from Inlet
sample at pH/BG in the sample by the to pH/BG Module.
module lower liquid sensor, Check/replace pH/BG lower
which may effect the Liquid Sensor.
measurement. Check/replace the pH/BG
All parameters Module PCB.
marked with "?".
720 Insufficient Check/replace tubing from Inlet
sample at El/Met to pH/BG Module.
module Check/replace tubing from
Module.
Check/replace El/Met Liquid
Sensor.
Module PCB.
2-54
Messages
722 Sample error Insufficient or Refer to the actual message.

inhomogeneous
sample during the
measurement.
723 No Cleaning No Cleaning solution Check if solution is drawn via
solution detected detected by pH/BG the Fluidic Module.
by inlet during lower liquid sensor Check/replace pH/BG lower
Startup during Startup (for liquid sensor.
analyzers without Check for leaks in the liquid
OXI module only). string.
Module valves.
724 No Cal 2 solution No Cal 2 solution Check if solution is drawn via
detected by inlet detected by pH/BG the Fluidic Module.
during Startup lower liquid sensor Check/replace pH/BG lower
during Startup (for liquid sensor.
Module valves.
during Startup lower liquid sensor Check/replace pH/BG lower
during Startup (for liquid sensor.
Module valves.
2-55
Messages
726 No Rinse No Rinse solution Check if solution is drawn via

Startup during Startup (for liquid sensor.
Module valves.
727 No Cleaning No Cleaning solution Check if solution is drawn via
Refill during Refill (for liquid sensor.
Module valves.
during Refill lower liquid sensor Check/replace pH/BG lower
during Refill (for liquid sensor.
Module valves.
during Refill lower liquid sensor Check/replace pH/BG lower
during Refill (for liquid sensor.
Module valves.
2-56
Messages
730 No Rinse No Rinse solution Check if solution is drawn via

Refill during Refill (for liquid sensor.
Module valves.
733 New part Appears when the bar No action required.
installed code for a new part is
read.
734 DMS not Data management If error persists:
connected to AU computer is Check connection between
establishing DMS PC and Analyzer Control
connection to the PCB.
Analyzing Unit or the Re-install software.
connection is lost. Replace Analyzer Control PCB.
735 Ampoule Temperature in Check the temperature inside
temperature error AutoCheck module is the AutoCheck Module.
out of range. Check that the fan is working
correctly.
736 Unstable Temperature in Check the temperature inside
AutoCheck AutoCheck module the AutoCheck Module.
temperature changes too rapidly. Check that the fan is working
correctly.
738 Ampoule(s) in AutoCheck carousel Install QC inserts for all
AutoCheck contains an ampoule ampoules present in AutoCheck
carousel not which have not been carousel
installed installed in "Control
Solutions Setup"
739 Solution's AutoCheck ampoule Contact your RADIOMETER
composition not solutions detected representative.
identifiable different from
labeling.
2-57
Messages
740 AutoCheck cover The cover could not If cover open close cover.
failure be closed or opened if cover closed open cover
correctly if cover not opened or closed
then open and close the cover.
741 AutoCheck The House could not If House open close cover.
Ampoule House be closed or opened if House closed open cover
failure correctly if House not opened or closed
then open and close the House.
742 AutoCheck System cannot rotate Be sure that the carousel is not
Carousel failure the carousel (or detect stuck and can turn around.
its movement) Check function of optical sensor
and motor.
Replace detector, motor, or
AutoCheck Module PCB as
necessary.
743 AutoCheck Be sure that the Check that the ampoule is not
Breaker failure breaker is not stuck stuck to the breaker and that the
and can turn around breaker can move correctly
744 AutoCheck Laser A communication Turn ABL off and turn it on
Setup Error error has occurred again.
between AutoCheck
module and the Check internal laser cable
internal laser. This is connections.
most possibly a Replace Laser.
communication error Replace AutoCheck Module
caused by the laser. PCB.
745 Low hard disk Free hard disk space Remove or delete archives.
space is below 100 Mb.
746 Rinse - Solution Calculated solution Check if actual solution level
low warning level is low matches calculated.
Correct if necessary.
747 Cal1 - Solution Calculated solution Check if actual solution level
748 Cal2 - Solution Calculated solution Check if actual solution level
2-58
Messages
749 Cleaning - Calculated solution Check if actual solution level

Solution low level is low matches calculated.
warning Correct if necessary.
750 Solution Calculated solution No action required.
projection level has been
adjusted adjusted
753 Service Electrode An option under the Return set-up to default.
Updatings setup service setup has
non default been changed from
the default setting.
763 AutoCheck The QC temperature Check ambient temperature.
temperature out correction algorithms Check function of temperature
of validated have been validated detection.
range within a certain Replace parts as necessary.
range. This error is
applied to the QC
result when the
temperature in the
AutoCheck module
falls above or below
the range.
764 Liquid detected During Gas Mode Replace inlet gasket. - Clear
in pH/BG liquid sample was waste lines
module during detected by the inlet
Expired Air liquid sensor or by
Sample the upper pH/BG
liquid sensor
2-59
Messages
765 Inlet is choked Rinses (after an Flush inlet and waste ducts with
aborted sample) syringe
checks for a segment
of rinse in the upper
LS of pH/BG. A high
flow resistance in the
inlet causes air to
push the rinse out.
766 ABL not The analyzer has Install more connection licenses
connected to been refused on Radiance.
Radiance - no connection to
Radiance Radiance because
connection there is no connection
license license available on
Radiance.
767 ABL not The analyzer has Update Radiance to the newest
connected to been refused version.
Radiance - ABL connection to
StatLink version Radiance because
too high the ABL StatLink
version is higher than
the Radiance StatLink
version.
768 ABL not The analyzer has Update the ABL software to the
connected to been refused newest version.
Radiance - ABL connection to
StatLink version Radiance because
too low the ABL StatLink
version is lower than
the Radiance StatLink
version.
769 ABL<>Radiance Communication error Check that interconnecting
communication between the analyzer cables are connected to the
error - XML and Radiance. designated ports and that the
packet could not connections are secure.
be parsed
2-60
Hardware Error Codes
Introduction This section describes the Hardware error codes presented on the analyzer.
Error Hardware errors on the analyzer are presented by the LEDs on the wet section
presentation modules. The LEDs are marked A, B and C.
Interpretation The following table shows the interpretation of the LEDs on the Analyzer Control
Analyzer PCB.
Control
1= On, 0= Off, Hz = Flashing
A B C Interpretation/Action Action
0 0 0.5Hz Normal operation
1 1 1 CRC-16 error in boot Replace Module PCB.
code
8 Hz 0 0 RAM Error Replace Module PCB.
0.2Hz 1 0 Missing software Reinstall software.
Replace Module PCB.
0.2Hz 0 0 Interrupted sw Reinstall software.
installation or incorrect
Replace Module PCB.
boot code
0 0 1 Module OK, waiting for Check connection.
connection to DMS PC
Check DMS PC.
Interpretation The following table shows the common interpretation of the LEDs on the
Measuring measuring and AutoCheck modules.
Modules and 1= On, 0= Off, Hz = Flashing, ?= Undefined,
AutoCheck B= 2 secs ON, 300mSec OFF
8Hz 0 0 CRC-16 error in boot Replace Module PCB.
code
8Hz 0 1 RAM error Replace Module PCB.
0 ? 1 Waiting for “Startup Check Analyzer Control PCB.
OK” from Analyzer
Replace Analyzer Control
Controller. CAN
PCB.
connection to another
module is OK.
2-61
Hardware Error Codes, Continued
Interpretation
Measuring A B C Interpretation/Action Action
Modules and 0 ? B Missing CAN bus Check cable connection,
AutoCheck connection cable, and power supplies.
(continued)
Check/replace actual module.
Check/replace Analyzer
Control PCB.
The following table shows the specific interpretation of the LEDs on the measuring
and AutoCheck modules:
1= On, 0= Off, Hz = Flashing, ?= Undefined,
? ? 0.5Hz Normal operation,
OXI module only
1 0 0.5Hz Normal operation,
Inlet module only
1 1 0.5Hz Temperature error, Check the Inlet temperature
Inlet module only according to the Temperature
check program.
Replace Inlet Heater/Sensor.
Replace Inlet PCB.
0 0 0.5Hz Inlet calibration error, Check the Inlet according to
Inlet module only the Inlet check program.
Replace the Inlet washer.
Replace Inlet PCB.
Replace Inlet module.
0 1 0.5Hz Both temperature and As above.
calibration error,
Inlet module only
? 0 0.5Hz Normal operation,
Electrode modules only
? 1 0.5Hz Temperature error, Check the Module
Electrode modules only temperature according to the
Temperature check program.
Replace Module
Heater/Sensor.
Replace Module PCB.
2-62
Hardware Error Codes, Continued
Interpretation
Measuring A B C Interpretation/Action Action
Modules and 1 1 0.5Hz IDLE, module is waiting No action required.
AutoCheck for activity request,
(continued) AutoCheck module only
0 0 0.5Hz BUSY, module is No action required.
performing an activity,
AutoCheck module only
2-63
Power Supply Errors
Introduction This section describes the symptoms, possible causes, and corrective actions for
errors caused by missing supply voltages.
Troubleshooting The following table describes the symptoms, possible causes and corrective
Procedures actions.
Symptom Troubleshooting
Nothing happens when switching on the Check power outlet. Check Mains cable
analyzer - the analyzer is completely and connection. Check main fuses.
dead. Check the fuse, F1, on the Analyzer
Control PCB. Check Power Supply.
Replace the defective part.
Valves, pumps, heat, and lamps in all Check the fuse, F4, on the Analyzer
modules are inoperative. Control PCB. Check the Power Supply.
Everything else seems to work. Replace F4, Analyzer Control PCB, or
Power Supply.
Impossible to calibrate OXI module, Check fuse, F3, on the Analyzer
analog signals are completely off. Control PCB. Check cable between
Analyzer Control and OXI Module
Everything else seems to work.
PCBs. Check the Power Supply.
Replace F3, Analyzer Control PCB,
Power Supply, or OXI Module PCB.
All measuring channels are completely Check the fuse, F2, on the Analyzer
off. Control PCB. Check the Power Supply.
Everything else seems to work. Replace F2, Analyzer Control PCB, or
Power Supply.
The printer is inoperative. Check the fuse in the printer power
cable. Replace if necessary. Check the
Everything else seems to work.
connection of the printer
communication cable.
No status messages from the Analyzing Check and remedy any error messages
Unit on the screen. in the system messages. Check the
communication cable between the DMS
PC and the Analyzer Control PCB.
Check power cable from Power Supply
to Analyzer Control PCB. Check the
fuses on the Analyzer Control PCB.
Check the Analyzer Control, DMS PC
Main board, and the Power Supply.
Replace the defective part.
2-64
Status Codes
Introduction This section describes the symptoms, possible causes, and corrective actions for
errors which occur during the loading of software after having switched on the
analyzer.
Messages and The following table lists the messages, causes and service actions.
Actions
Message Interpretation Service Action
Status code 0 No problems found N/A
(Is only displayed
shortly and is
normally not seen)
Status code 1 Version not Contact Radiometer.
supported
Status code 2 Failed to open · Press the exit button when the error
Database appears.
· Start Windows Explorer.
· Make a copy of the ROMA.db and the
ROMA.LOG file and save in a different
folder.
· Delete the ROMA.log file.
· Start the Task manager by pressing Ctrl,
Alt, Esc simultaneously.
· Press Alt and then arrow down to select
Run Application and then press enter.
· In the application window, type the
following;
c:\windows\system\dbeng50.exe -F
c:\abl700\roma.db and press enter.
· The error message "error recovered to last
checkpoint OK" should appear.
· Shut down the system and restart the
computer.
If the message "error recovered to last
checkpoint OK" is not displayed, the
database may be corrupted. In this case
contact Radiometer.
Status code 3 Failed to locate file Contact Radiometer.
2-65
Status Codes, Continued
Messages and
Actions Message Interpretation Service Action
(continued) Status code 4 Failed to identify Contact Radiometer.
database version
Status code 5 Upgrade of See Service Tip 161478712
database not
possible
Status code 6 Downgrade not An attempt to install an older version of the
possible software has been made. This is not
possible, unless the installation procedure is
started from scratch (meaning a formatting
of the harddrive and loosing all data).
Status code 7 Upgrade DLL not Contact Radiometer.
found
Status code 8 Unable to upgrade Contact Radiometer.
setup version
2-66
ABL700 Series Service Manual 3. Checkout and Adjustment
3. Checkout and Adjustment
Overview
Introduction This chapter details the procedures for checking and adjusting the analyzer.
The tools required for carrying out the procedures are listed in the paragraph “Test
Equipment and Tools” in front of the manual.
The gloves must be free of pin holes and preferable be puncture resistant. Please
medical advice.
Calibration and While performing calibrations and measurements, the analyzer must be fully
Measurement assembled. This includes the black cover for the OXI Module (to avoid

Multiple Module Check ................................................................................... 3-2
OXI Module ..................................................................................................... 3-12
Inlet Module..................................................................................................... 3-31
AutoCheck Module .......................................................................................... 3-33
Miscellaneous Check ....................................................................................... 3-38
PC Module ....................................................................................................... 3-47
3-1
3. Checkout and Adjustment ABL700 Series Service Manual
Multiple Module Check
Overview
Introduction This sub-section describes the check-out for components and functions present in
more modules. These procedures concern functions or components such as e.g.
pumps and valves.
Contents This section contains the following topics:

Electrode Check and Zero Current Calibration................................................ 3-3
Isolation Check ................................................................................................ 3-5
Liquid Sensor Check........................................................................................ 3-7
Pump Check ..................................................................................................... 3-8
Valve Check..................................................................................................... 3-9
Thermostatting Check ...................................................................................... 3-10
3-2
Electrode Check and Zero Current Calibration
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the electrode channels.

Each channel may be checked as a whole, or excluding the electrode and the wet
section (electronics only). A procedure for calibrating the zero current for the pO2,
Glu, and Lac channels is also included.
Test Equipment The test equipment required for this procedure is:
PHA860 pH Meter Tester
DMM, Digital Multi Meter, 4½ digits
902-049 Dummy Electrode (pH, pCO2, cK+, cNa+, cCa2+, cCl–)
902-050 Dummy Electrode ( pO2, Glu, Lac)
pH and The following procedure is used for checking the pH, pCO2, cK+, cNa+, cCa2+, and
Electrolyte cCl– channels.
Channels
Step Action
1. Enter the Electrode service program (Analyzing Unit).
2. Touch “Drain” to empty the measuring chambers.
3. Remove the electrode from the channel to be checked and mount the
dummy electrode, 902-049 instead. Connect dummy electrode to
PHA860 and ground PHA860 to ABL (one of the screws securing the
rinse solution preheater).
4. Set PHA860 to 0.0mV/0W (check output voltage with the DMM).
Check the displayed electrode signal for 0.0 ± 7.0mV (zero point).
5. Set PHA860 to 0.0mV/1000MW and check that the displayed
electrode signal changes less than 1.0mV (compared to step 5).
6. Set PHA860 to +200.0mV/0W (check output voltage with the DMM).
Check the displayed electrode signal for +200.0 ± 9.0mV (sensitivity).
7. Set PHA860 to +200.0mV/1000MW and check that the displayed
electrode signal changes less than 2.0mV (compared to step 7).
8. Set PHA860 to –200.0mV/0W (check output voltage with the DMM).
Check the displayed electrode signal for –200.0 ± 9.0mV (linearity).
9. Exit the service program, remove dummy electrode, and replace
electrode.
Continue on next page
3-3
Electrode Check and Zero Current Calibration, Continued
pO2 and Met The following procedure is used for checking the pO2 and metabolite channels.
Channels
Step Action
1. Enter the Electrode service program (Analyzing Unit).
3. Remove the electrode from the channel to be checked and check that
the displayed electrode signal is 0 ± 5 pA (zero point, all channels).
If outside, perform the zero current calibration.
4. Mount the dummy electrode, 902-050 (100MW resistor), and check
that the displayed electrode signal is within range (sensitivity):
pO2: [6,190 ; 6,410] [pA]
Met: [6,630 ; 6,870] [pA]
5. Exit the service program and replace electrode.
Zero Current The following procedure is used for calibrating the zero current for the pO2 and
Calibration, Met channels.
pO2 and Met
Step Action
1. Enter the Zero current calibration service program (Analyzing Unit
Service)
3. Disconnect the electrode connectors for all three electrodes.
4. Check that the actual current is:
pO2: [-625 ; +625] [pA].
Met: [-625 ; +625] [pA].
If outside, the channel is defective.
5. Touch “Save” and check that the actual current values are transferred
to the zero current column.
6. Reconnect the electrode connectors and exit the service program.
3-4
Isolation Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the electrical isolation in the measuring
modules in the analyzer.
Test Equipment DMM, Digital Multi Meter, 4½ digits

In case your DMM cannot measure resistance at 1GW a 100 MW 10% resistor is
also required.
Analyzer The following procedure is used for checking the electrical isolation of the
Isolation Check complete wet section (all modules installed in the analyzer).
Step Action
1. Enter the Isolation service program (Analyzing Unit).
2. Touch “Fill” and wait for the filling to complete.
3. Check that the voltage value displayed is < 500 mV.
4. Exit from service.
Module The following procedure is used for checking the electrical isolation of a specific
Isolation Check module when outside and disconnected from the analyzer.
PH/BG and El/Met Modules:
Step Action
1. Remove the module from the analyzer.
2. Check that the resistance between one of the screws securing the
passive preheater and the preheater itself is 1 GW
(90.9 ±9.1 MW using the 100 MW shunt).
passive preheater and the chassis connector J9 on the Module PCB is
1 GW (90.9 ±9.1 MW using the 100 MW shunt).
4. Install the Module in the analyzer.
3-5
Isolation Check, Continued
Module Inlet Module:

Isolation Check
(continued) Step Action
preheater and the preheater itself is 1 GW (90.9 ±9.1 MW using the
100 MW shunt).
preheater and the chassis connector J9 on the Module PCB is 1
GW (90.9 ±9.1 MW using the 100 MW shunt).
OXI Module
Step Action
2. Check that the resistance between the tie rod for securing the black
cover and one of the steel nipples on the preheater is 1 GW (90.9 ±9.1
MW using the 100 MW shunt).
3. Check that the resistance between the housing of the hemolyzer and
the chassis area on the OXI Module PCB is 1 GW (90.9 ±9.1 MW
using the 100 MW shunt).
4. Check that the resistance between the tie rod for securing the black
cover and the chassis area on the OXI Module PCB is 1 GW
(90.9 ±9.1 MW using the 100 MW shunt).
3-6
Liquid Sensor Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the liquid sensors.
Test Equipment No test equipment is required for these procedures.
Cal/Full/Empty The following procedure is used for checking the performance of the liquid
Check sensors.
Step Action
1. Enter the Liquid Sensor service program (Analyzing Unit).
2. Call a liquid sensor calibration and wait for it to complete.
3. Check that the light intensity levels are < 200
Hint: If above, the flow path should be cleaned or the sensor should
be replaced.
4. Touch “Fill” and check after completion that the full values are below
the latest calibration threshold values.
5. Touch “Empty” and check after completion that the empty values are
above the latest calibration threshold values.
Diagram This diagram gives an overview of the signal levels and the analyzers
interpretation of the signals.
Liquid Sensor Interpretation

Empty value during calibration
100
90
80 Empty
70
Signal Level [%]
60% of empty value during

60
calibration
50
40
30 Full
20
10
0 3
3-7
Pump Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the pumps.
2 beakers
Stop watch
Functional The following procedure is used for checking the function of the pumps.
Check
Step Action
1. Enter the Pump service program (Analyzing Unit).
2. Select the pump to be checked.
3. Touch “Increase speed” repeatedly and check that the pump may be
set to turn at the different positive speeds (from inlet towards waste).
4. Touch “Decrease speed” repeatedly and check that the pump may be
set to turn at the different negative speeds (from waste towards inlet).
Pump Speed The following procedure is used for checking the pump speed.
Check
Step Action
1. Select the pump to be checked.
2. Disconnect the ends of the pump tube.
3. Touch “Increase speed” until the speed is 100 µL/s.
4. Put one end of the pump tube into a measuring beaker and the other
end into a liquid supply beaker.
5. Start the stop watch when the solution starts to run into the measuring
beaker.
6. Touch “Start/Stop” to stop the pump when 60 seconds have elapsed.
7. Check that the measuring beaker contains 6.0 ±1.2 mL.
3-8
Valve Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the valves (except the proportional
valves in the gas module).
DMM, Digital Multi Meter
Pull/Hold Check The following procedure is used for checking the pull, hold and release functions
of the valves.
Step Action
1. Enter the relevant Valve service program (Analyzing Unit).
2. Select the valve to be checked.
3. Activate “Pull/Release” and check (audibly and visually) that the
valve is pulled momentarily.
4. Activate “Pull/Hold” and check (audibly and visually) that the valve is
pulled and held.
Please note that only one valve at the time can be held.
5. Release the valve.
Electrical Check The following procedure is used for checking the electrical function of the valves.
Step Action
1. Disconnect the plug for the valve to be checked at the PCB.
2. Connect the DMM to the two pins of the female plug. Check the
resistance of the coil in the valve for:
Membrane valves [66 ; 82] [W]
Tube valve [116 ; 144] [W]
3. Connect the DMM between one of the two pins of the female plug and
the valve housing. Check that the coil is not shorted to the housing.
If the coil is shorted to the housing the valve must be replaced.
4. Repeat item 3 for the other pin of the female plug.
5 Reconnect the plug to the PCB.
3-9
Thermostatting Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the temperature regulation systems for
the liquid transport system.
Test Equipment The following test equipment is required for the electrical check procedure:
DMM, Digital Multi Meter, 4½ digits
636-424 Test Resistor 6.1kW
Visual Check The following procedure is used for visually checking the function of the
temperature regulation system.
Step Action
1. Enter the Thermostatting service program.
2. Check that the temperatures displayed are within the limits given.
3. Exit the service program.
Electrical Check The following procedure is used for checking the temperature regulation system
(Temperature (monitor) electrically.
Monitor)
Step Action
1. Enter the Thermostatting service program.
2. Obtain access to the module PCB for which the temperature monitor
is to be checked.
3. Disconnect the plug for the NTC to be checked at the PCB.
4. Connect the test resistor to the two pins on the PCB (J numbers refer
to the connectors on the module PCB).
Check that the temperature displayed is 37±0.2°C:
Inlet J6, pins 1 and 2
pH/BG J4, pins 1 and 2
El/Met J4, pins 1 and 2
Oximetry hemolyzer J8, pins 1 and 2
5. Remove the test resistor, reconnect the plug to the PCB and assemble
the analyzer.
3-10
Thermostatting Check, Continued
Electrical Check The following procedure is used for checking the temperature regulation system
(Preheaters) electrically.
Step Action
2. Disconnect the plug for the heating element to be checked at the PCB.
3. Connect the DMM to the two pins of the female plug (J numbers refer
to the connectors on the module PCB).
Check the resistance of the heating element for:
Inlet [126 ; 234] [W]. J6, pins 5 and 6
pH/BG [71 ; 79] [W]. J4, pins 3 and 6
El/Met [71 ; 79] [W]. J4, pins 3 and 6
4. Reconnect the plug to the PCB and assemble the analyzer.
3-11
OXI Module
Overview
Introduction This section describes the check-out for the OXI module. For checking the Liquid
sensor and the Valve read the “Multiple Module Check”.

Complete Check............................................................................................... 3-13
Service tHb Calibration.................................................................................... 3-16
SAT100 Calibration ......................................................................................... 3-18
Preparation of Blood Sample with sO2 =99.9% .............................................. 3-20
Hemolyzer Status Check.................................................................................. 3-21
Lamp Unit Status Check .................................................................................. 3-23
Lamp Adjustment............................................................................................. 3-25
Spectrometer Status/EEPROM Check ............................................................. 3-29
Warning The Spectrometer part of the OXI module MUST NOT under any circumstances
be dismantled. Only the Fibre can be disconnected from the Spectrometer.
To avoid influence from intensive ambient light the black cover must be mounted
on the OXI module during calibration, QC or blood measurement and tHb
calibration.
3-12
Complete Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the complete OXI module. The status of
the subunits may be checked by use of separate service programs.
Note Running the Complete Check will electronically re-adjust several values in the
OXI module and may remove an earlier detected error. Running the tests on the
subunits (status check) does not re-adjust values.
A 1- or 2-point calibration must be called after a Complete Check has been
performed.
Check-out
The following procedure is used for checking the performance of the OXI Module.
Step Action
1. Enter the OXI System Check program.
2. Touch the “Oximetry Complete test” key.
3. Wait for the test to complete i.e. when the three Status fields have
changed from “Testing”.
4. Check that all Status results are “Passed”.
5. If one of the tests fails, use the Status check program for the actual
sub-unit for troubleshooting.
6. Exit the program with the “Back” touch-key.
7. Remember to perform a 1- or 2-point calibration when leaving the
service programs.
Accept criteria The performance of the Oxi module is accepted if:

Unit Accepted if:
Spectrometer Passed
Lamp Unit Passed
Hemolyzer Passed
3-13
Complete Check, Continued
Accept criteria The following tables show the detailed accept criteria for the parts in the OXI
detailed module:
Spectrometer:
Parameter Accepted if:
EEPROM Reading Correct checksum read
Temperature Reading Within 10 - 45 oC
Data collection test AD conversion completed and trigger pulses from
Spectrometer received.
Voltage Bias Within 0.0 - 0.5 V
Stdev Dark Value 0.8 - 3.0
Mean Dark Value Within 10.0 - 300.0 mV
Max-Min Dark Value See table below.
Exposure Time msec StDev Dark Max- Min dark

Value value
0 3 0.8 - 3.0 1 - 50
1 6 N/A 1 - 50
2 12 N/A 1 - 50
3 24 N/A 1 - 50
4 48 N/A 1 - 50
5 96 N/A 1 - 50
6 192 N/A 1 - 50
7 384 N/A 1 - 50
3-14
Complete Check, Continued
Accept criteria Lamp Unit:

detailed
(continued) Parameter Accepted if:
Thermostat Temperature Within 44.7 - 45.3 oC
Thermostat Heat Within 1 - 99%
Halogen OFF Voltage Within 0.00 - 0.10 V
Photodiode Current Within 80 - 395 mA
Halogen ON Voltage Within 3.90 - 4.10 V
Halogen Regulator Within regulation area
Status
Halogen Intensity Within 2000 - 3900 counts
Halogen Shape Test Intensity spectrum shape compared correct to
reference shape.
Halogen Pixel Test No outliers.
Halogen Linearity Test Linearity within 0.0 - 1.0 %
Halogen Stability Test Stability within -0.1 to +2.0 mabs
Neon Voltage Within 275 - 325 V
Neon Intensity ³ 50 %
Neon Position Within 0.1 - 2.0
Hemolyzer:
Thermostat temperature Within 36.9 - 37.1 oC
Thermostat Heat Within 1 - 99 %
Tuning voltage Within 10 - 40 Vpeak
Tuning frequency Within 28 - 32.5 Hz
Impedance shape Impedance shape compared correct to reference
shape
Cavitation absorbance ³ 10 mabs
Cavitation drive current £ 80%
3-15
Service tHb Calibration
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to calibrate the OXI module. This calibration is
only to be carried out if:
· the measured sO2 on a blood sample with sO2 = 99.9 % is outside the range
99.9% ±0.5% or the sO2 result on a S7770 tHb calibrator is outside the insert
mean value ±0.5%.
· the Spectrometer has been replaced.
· the fiber has been replaced or the fiber has been dismantled at either end.
· the Hemolyzer has been replaced.
tHb calibrator S7770
External keyboard
Important A special algorithm for calculating the tHb value when measuring on the S7770
solution has been developed. The algorithm differs considerably from the
algorithm used for blood samples.
The special algorithm is automatically selected during the service tHb calibration.
The special algorithm is also automatically selected during the first measurement
in the blood mode performed after a service tHb calibration. This means that:
· The check procedure overleaf MUST be performed as the first action following
the service tHb calibration, and
· If the check procedure fails a new service tHb calibration MUST be performed.
Calibration The following procedure is used for calibrating the module:
Step Action
1. Reset corrections for sO2, tHb, COHb and MetHb in the “Parameter
set-up” program: Offset = “0”, Slope = “1”.
2. Perform a 1 or 2 point calibration.
3. Shake the S7770 ampoule gently for 15 seconds.
4. Enter the tHb calibration program by touching the tHb calibration box
in the Oximetry System screen.
5. Type in the Data code from the S7770 Insert.
6. Press “Continue”.
7. Break the S7770 ampoule and place it in the adaptor.
3-16
Service tHb Calibration, Continued
Calibration
Step Action
(continued)
8. Open the Inlet, place the S7770 on the Inlet and press “Aspirate”.
9. When all results are “Passed”, i.e. when the Status Limits are Zero, the
analyzer has accepted and stored the Calibration.
10. In case the calibration failed, troubleshoot and perform a new
Calibration.
11. Exit the program.
12. Continue with the Check procedure below.
Check The following check is performed to ensure that the calibration has been performed
correctly.
As the S7770 ampoule contains sufficient solution for two samples, steps 1 and 2
below may be skipped if only one sample was used during the tHb.
Step Action
1. Read the “Important” paragraph on the previous page.
2. Shake the S7770 ampoule gently for 15 seconds.
3. Break the S7770 ampoule and place it in the adaptor.
4. In normal measuring mode aspirate the S7770 as a normal sample
(195mL Syringe Mode).
5. Check that the results are within the limits on the inserts for the
S7770.
6. If not, perform a new tHb calibration.
3-17
SAT100 Calibration
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to calibrate the OXI module. The SAT100
calibration is an alternative to the service tHb calibration.
Test Equipment The following is required for the SAT100 calibration:

A blood sample:
· Saturated to 99.9 % according to the procedure “Preparation of Blood Sample
with sO2 = 99.9%”, or
· With an exact, known saturation between 95 and 105 % (the exact value must be
determined on a reference analyzer - not the ABL which is to be calibrated).
An external keyboard.
Procedure The following describes the procedure for making a SAT100 calibration.
Step Action
1. Reset corrections for sO2, tHb, COHb and MetHb in the “Parameter
set-up” program: Offset = “0”, Slope = “1”.
2. Perform a 1- or 2-point calibration.
3. Prepare a blood sample according to the procedure “Preparation of
Blood Sample with sO2 = 99.9%” later in this chapter.
An alternative preparation method may be used, but then the exact sO2
value must be determined on a reference analyzer.
4. Transfer the sample into a syringe and then immediately into the
analyzer in the normal measuring mode.
5. The results must be as follows:
pH: 7.300 to 7.500.
pO2: > 400 mmHg (53.2 kPa).
tHb: 10 to 17 g/dL (6.2 to 10.6 mmol/L).
COHb: < 5%.
MetHb: < 3%.
Cturb: < 0.2%
6. Enter the SAT100 calibration program by touching the SAT100
Calibration box in the Oximetry System screen.
7. Correct for the actual tHb value (measured in normal mode in item 4)
according to the “SAT100 Correction” section below and type the
corrected Saturation value.
8. Using a syringe, collect the prepared sample and press “Continue”.
3-18
SAT100 Calibration, Continued
Procedure
Step Action
(continued)
9. Open the Inlet, place the syringe on the Inlet and press “Aspirate”.
10. When all results are “Passed”, i.e. the Status Limits will be Zero, the
analyzer has accepted and stored the Calibration.
11. If "Failed", then troubleshoot and repeat the SAT100 calibration.
12. Exit the program.
SAT100 The Saturation must be corrected to compensate for the influence of the tHb value
Correction as shown below.
In case the blood sample is prepared according to “Preparation of Blood Sample
with sO2 = 99.9%” then “99.9” must be used for “sO2” in the formular.
In case another preparation method is used then the sO2 value obtained on the
reference analyzer must be used for “sO2”.
g/dL
Corrected sO2 = sO2 - (ctHb - 17.8g/dL)*0.036
Example: Saturated sample = 99.9%. Measured ctHb =14 g/dL:
Type in corrected sO2 = 99.9% - (14 - 17.8) * 0.036 = 100.04%
mmol/L
Corrected sO2 = sO2 - (ctHb - 11.0 mmol/L)*0.058
Example: Saturated sample = 99.9%. Measured ctHb = 9.0 mmol/L:
Type in corrected sO2 = 99.9% - (9.0 - 11.0) * 0.058 = 100.02%
Check The following check is performed to ensure that the calibration has been performed
correctly:
Step Action
1. In normal measuring mode aspirate the sample (185mL Syringe
Mode).
2. Check that the sO2 result is within ±0.1% compared to the corrected
sO2 value.
3. If not, perform a new SAT100 calibration.
3-19
Preparation of Blood Sample with sO2 = 99.9%
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to prepare a blood sample with an sO2 of 99.9%.
Required Carbogen gas (5% CO2 + 95% O2). This should be readily available at most
Materials hospitals.
10 mL test tube with stopper
Pipette for 500 µL
Block or bath thermostatted to 37 °C
Vortex mixer
Fresh heparinized blood from a healthy non-smoking adult donor
(please note that there is no need for the blood to be arterial)
Capillary tube (85-100 µL).
Note The oxygenation may be carried out in a number of different ways and this
procedure is to be considered as a suggestion. Other procedures may be used;
however, the criteria for pH, pO2, tHb, COHb and MetHb stated in the SAT100
calibration procedure must be fulfilled.
Preparation of Follow this procedure for preparing a blood sample to obtain a sO2 of 99.9%.
Blood Sample
with sO2=99.9% Step Action
1. 500-600 µL of the blood is pipetted into the test tube.
2. Close the tube with the stopper and place it in the thermostatted
block/bath for five minutes.
3. Open the test tube and flush it with the carbogen gas (flow rate
approx. 1 L/min) for 15 seconds and then immediately close the test
tube with the stopper.
4. Place the test tube on the Vortex mixer and mix for 30 seconds.
5. The blood sample is now ready for use.
Importants As soon as a capillary tube has been filled with a sample, the gas in the test tube
must be replenished from the carbogen cylinder for five seconds, and the stopper
must be replaced. The test tube should then be thermostatted again.
A sample in a capillary tube must immediately be aspirated into the analyzer.
The sample in the test tube must be mixed regularly and especially just before
drawing a sample in order to ensure continued correct sO2 and ctHb levels.
3-20
Hemolyzer Status Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the status of the Hemolyzer part of the
OXI module.
Check-out The following procedure is used for checking the status of the Hemolyzer.
Step Action
1. Enter the Hemolyzer Status check program by touching the
Hemolyzer Status box in the Oximetry System screen.
2. Press “Cuvette Fill”.
3. Press “Hemolyzer ON”.
4. Check that the actual values are within the limits shown in the table
“Accept criteria” below.
5. Check the tubing for leaks.
6. Exit the program with the “Back” touch key.
Accept Criteria The performance of the hemolyzer is accepted if:

Thermostat Heat Within 1 - 99%
Hemolyzer ON
Voltage Within 10 - 75 Vpeak
Current Drive Within 20 - 90 %
Frequency Within 28 - 32.5 kHz
Phase Within -30 to +30 deg.
3-21
Hemolyzer Status Check, Continued
Check of The following procedure is used to check the thermostatting parts of the
Thermostatting Hemolyzer if the above check failed on temperature.
Parts
Step Action
1. Disconnect the plug for the thermistor on the OXI module PCB (J8)
2. Connect the DMM to the two pins of the female plug. Check the
resistance of the thermistor element to be in the interval 4.55 - 18.5
kW (corresponds to 10 - 45 oC)
If outside, the element is either shorted or open, and the thermistor
must be replaced.
3. Check the resistance from each pin on the female plug to the
Hemolyzer metal housing for > 10 MW.
If below the thermistor element is shorted to the thermistor housing
and must be replaced.
4. Reconnect the plug to the PCB.
3-22
Lamp Unit Status Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the Lamp Unit part of the OXI module.
Check-out The following procedure is used for checking the performance of the Lamp unit.
Step Action
1. Enter the Lamp Unit Status program by touching the Lamp Unit
Status box in the Oximetry System screen.
2. Touch “Fill” to fill the cuvette.
3. Touch “Halogen Lamp On/Off” (it may take 4-8 seconds before the
Halogen Result field changes to “On”).
4. Check that the actual values (except Neon values) are within the limits
given on the screen (also shown in the table below).
5. Touch “Neon Lamp On/Off” (it may take 4-8 seconds before the Neon
Result field changes to “On”). The Hemolyzer is also switched on as
the same driver circuit is used for both devices.
6. Check that the actual values (except Halogen values) are within the
limits given on the screen (also shown in the table below).
7. Exit the program with the “Back” touch key.
Accept Criteria The performance of the Lamp Unit is accepted if:

Thermostat Heat Within 1 - 99 %
Halogen Lamp N/A
Halogen Voltage Within 3.9 - 4.1 V (Halogen Lamp ON)
Halogen intensity Within 2000 - 3900 (Halogen Lamp ON) counts
Neon Lamp N/A
Neon Voltage Within 275 - 325V (Neon Lamp ON)
Neon intensity ³ 50% (Neon Lamp ON)
Neon position Within 0.1 - 2.0
3-23
Lamp Unit Status Check, Continued
Check of The following procedure is used to check the Photo diode thermostatting parts if
Thermostatting the above check failed on temperature.
Parts
Step Action
1. Disconnect J1 on the Lamp Unit PCB.
2. Connect the DMM to the terminals of the thermistor element R5 on
the Lamp Unit PCB. Check the resistance element to be in the interval
3.82- 18.5 kW (corresponds to 10 - 50 oC).
If outside, the element is either shorted or open, and the PCB must be
replaced.
3. Reconnect the J1 to the PCB.
Lamps Visual The following procedure is used to visually check the Halogen and Neon Lamp.
Check
Step Action
1. In the Lamp Adjustment program, touch “Halogen Lamp On/Off” (it
may take 4-8 seconds before the Halogen Result field changes to
“On”).
2. Look in the inspection hole on the top of the Lamp Unit and check the
Halogen lamp is lit (yellow light).
3. Touch “Neon Lamp On/Off” (it may take 4-8 seconds before the
Neon Result field changes to “On”).
4. Look in the inspection hole on the top of the Lamp Unit and check the
Neon lamp is lit (red light).
3-24
Lamp Adjustment
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the lamp if necessary.
Different Types Please note that different types of hardware in the lamp unit exist. The procedure
of Hardware for adjusting the lamp unit is, however, identical.
Changes implemented during the period where analyzers were produced as
complete analyzers are related to the serial number of the Basic Unit, whereas
changes implemented after the introduction of module sales are related to the serial
number of the Lamp unit itself.
Basic unit, 902-441R Lamp Unit Hardware

0001 - 0080 Brass finger screw for adjustment
0081 - 0098 As above but including internal brass lamp stabilizing
bushing
0099 - 0144 Allen adjustment screw (instead of finger screw) and
internal brass lamp stabilizing bushing
0145 onwards OXI module no longer included in 902-441.
Lamp Unit, 902-458R Lamp Unit Hardware

0094 onwards Lamp soldered onto cable, new lamp holder, spring,
and stabilizing bushing.
0100 onwards Allen lock screw on the top (marked “1” on the
illustration below) is moved to the side of the Lamp
unit (above the neon lamp).
Allen adjustment screw removed (its function is taken
over by the stronger spring introduced in R0094).
New lens which reduces the light intensity and makes
the adjustment less sensitive included.
Warning Take care not to shorten the screwdriver to the back of the Lamp Unit PCB when
loosening the flange screw (newer PCBs are insulated on the back side).
3-25
Lamp Adjustment, Continued
Illustration 1
3 2
Procedure, The procedure for adjusting the position of the lamp consists of three steps which
Overview must all be carried out to obtain a correct adjustment.
Step Action
1. Move entire lamp unit to the extreme left or right.
2. Adjust lamp until maximum output is reached.
3. Move entire lamp unit until correct output is obtained.
Procedure, The following procedure is used for adjusting the Lamp unit.
Detailed
Step Action
1. Enter the “Lamp Unit Adjustment” program.
2. Touch “Fill” to fill the cuvette.
3. Tighten the brass finger screw (marked 2 on the illustration), if present
and if loose.
4. Loosen the two screws on the flange (marked 3 on the illustration).
5. Touch “Halogen Lamp On/Off” to turn on the lamp (it may take 4-8
seconds before the Halogen Lamp field changes to “On”).
6. Turn the entire lamp unit to the extreme left or extreme right - the
position resulting in the highest value must be chosen. Then tighten
the two screws.
In case the highest value is out of range (“4095”) the position resulting
in the lowest value must be chosen instead.
In case both positions result in out of range select either one and then
proceed to “Alternative Procedure” below.
3-26
Procedure,
Step Action
Detailed
(continued) 7. Loosen the Allen lock screw at the top (or on the side above the neon
lamp) of the Lamp unit (marked 1 on the illustration).
8. Loosen the black lamp holder approximately 1/12 turn and, if present,
then tighten the adjustment screw (Hex or finger screw).
Note:
If the field “Limits” shows ”Voltage outside 3.9 - 4.1 V”, the voltage
on the lamp is not in regulation. Do not continue the adjustment until
the message is removed by the analyzer.
9. Wait for two updates on the screen.
If the value increased - go to step 8.
If the value decreased - go to step 10.
If the value is “4095” the Spectrometer is out of range (too much
light) - go to step 13.
10. If present, loosen the adjustment screw (Hex or finger screw), then
tighten the black lamp holder approximately 1/12 turn and then, if
present, tighten the adjustment screw.
If the value increased - go to step 10.
If the value decreased - go to step 12.
12. Loosen the black lamp holder approximately 1/12 turn and then, if
present, tighten the adjustment screw (Hex or finger screw).
13. Tighten the Allen lock screw (1) at the top (or on the side above the
neon lamp) of the Lamp unit.
14. Loosen the two flange screws again. Move the entire Lamp unit until
the intensity equals 3200 ±100, then tighten the screws.
Repeat this step in case the intensity changes to outside the limits
when tightening the two screws.
15. Exit the service programs to allow the analyzer to rinse and cool
down.
16. Call a Complete Oximetry Test and check after completion that the
Halogen intensity is within 3400 ±300.
17. Exit service and perform a 1- or 2- point calibration.
3-27
Alternative This procedure is only used in called for in step 6 of “Procedure, Detailed” above.
Procedure
Step Action
1. Loosen the Allen lock screw at the top (or on the side above the neon
lamp) of the Lamp unit (marked 1 on the illustration).
2. Loosen the black lamp holder approximately 1/12 turn and then, if
present, tighten the adjustment screw (Hex or finger screw).
Note:
If the field “Limits” shows ”Voltage outside 3.9 - 4.1 V”, the voltage
on the lamp is not in regulation. Do not continue the adjustment until
the message is removed by the analyzer.
Repeat item 2 until the value is 3200 ±100.
4. Tighten the Allen lock screw at the top (or on the side above the neon
lamp) of the Lamp unit (1).
5. Exit the service programs to allow the analyzer to rinse and cool
down.
6. Call a Complete Oximetry Test and check after completion that the
Halogen intensity is within 3400 ±300.
7. Exit service and perform a 1- or 2- point calibration.
3-28
Spectrometer Status/EEPROM Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the status of the Spectrometer part of the
OXI module.
Test Equipment The test equipment required for this procedures is:
Warning The Spectrometer MUST NOT under any circumstances be dismantled.
Check-out The following procedure is used for checking the performance of the Spectrometer.
Step Action
1. Enter the Spectrometer Status check program.
2. Wait approx. 40 seconds.
3. Check that the actual values are within the limits shown in the table
“Accept criteria” below.
4. Enter Spectrometer EEPROM program.
5. Check that the Statistics are available according to the table
“Statistics” below.
Accept Criteria The status of the Spectrometer Unit is accepted if:

o
Spectrometer Temperature Within 10 - 45 C
Neon Voltage Within 275 - 325 Volts
Neon Intensity ³ 50 %
Neon position Freon 0.100 - 2.000
Wavelength offset Within -1.00 to +1.00 nm
3-29
Spectrometer Status/EEPROM Check, Continued
Statistics The following statistics must be available:

Run Number Available
Active Wavelength Cal. # Available
Wavelength Cal. Offset Available
Wavelength Cal. Slope Available
Wavelength Cal. Temp Available
Active Neon Cal Available
Factory Neon Cal. Available
Band width Cal Available
Optical Components Available
Other Components Available
Check of The following procedure is used to check the Spectrometer thermistor if the above
thermistor check failed on temperature.
Step Action
1. Disconnect the plug for the Spectrometer at the OXI module PCB
(J10)
2. Connect the DMM to the pins 8 and 20 of the female plug. Check the
resistance of the thermistor element to be in the interval 3.82 - 18.5
kW (corresponds to 10 - 50 oC).
If outside, the element is either shorted or open and the complete
spectrometer must be replaced.
3. Reconnect the plug to the PCB.
3-30
Inlet Module
Overview
Introduction This section describes the check-out for the Inlet module. For checking
temperature regulation read the “Multiple Module Check”.
Contents This section contains the following topic:

Inlet Check ....................................................................................................... 3-32
3-31
Inlet Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the inlet.
Test Equipment No test equipment is required for this procedure.
Calibration The following procedure is used for checking the calibration of the inlet.
Check
Step Action
1. Enter the Inlet service program (Analyzing Unit Service).
2. Touch “Calibrate” to initiate a calibration of the inlet.
3. Check upon completion that the result of the calibration is “PASSED”
for all parameters.
Functional The following procedure is used for checking the function of the inlet.
Check
Step Action
1. Perform the calibration check.
2. Touch “Extend Probe” and “Retract Probe” to check that the probe
may be moved to the various logical positions.
3. Check that the photo detector status indicates:
“Light” when the probe is in the positions: Service, Wash, Lock,
Cone2, and Cone3,
and
“Darkness” when in the remaining positions.
3-32
AutoCheck Module
Overview
Introduction This section describes the check-out and alignment of the AutoCheck module.
Contents This section contains the following topics.

AutoCheck Module Check............................................................................... 3-34
3-33
AutoCheck Module Check
Purpose The purpose of these procedures are to check and adjust the AutoCheck Module.
Test Equipment No test equipment is required for this procedure (except for a carousel with
ampoules).
Three Three procedures are given below. These procedures are used as follows:
Procedures
Procedure Used upon
Align Laser Removal of laser scanner from aluminum plate (typically
Position 1 for replacing the scanner).
Valid for AutoCheck Modules of R0045 onwards only.
Align Laser Module installation (first assembly of analyzer) or
Position 2 disassembly of the module.
Align Carousel Module installation (first assembly of analyzer) or
disassembly of the module.
Align Laser The following procedure is used for mechanically adjusting the position (tilting) of
Position 1 the laser scanner upon disassembly of the laser system or replacement of the
scanner.
The procedure is only valid for AutoCheck Module of R0045 onwards which
includes the possibility of mechanically adjusting (tilting) the laser scanner.
The procedure is carried out with the module connected to the analyzer, however,
the module has not been inserted into the AutoCheck module compartment (the
module stands on the front edge of the compartment and the rear panel leans
against the inlet module).
Step Action
1. Enter the AutoCheck service program Align Carousel/Laser.
2. Put one unused AutoCheck ampoule into position 1 of an empty
carousel.
3. Open the lid (manually), put the carousel into the AutoCheck module
and close the lid (manually).
4. Touch “Align Laser Position” (causes the carousel position #1 to be
moved to the laser).
5. Wait for the value on the display to be updated and check that the
value is within [191 ; 193].
3-34
AutoCheck Module Check, Continued
Align Laser
Step Action
Position 1
(continued) 6. Value >193: Tighten the adjustment nut (clockwise) by a
maximum of ½ turn.
Value <191: Loosen the adjustment nut (counter clockwise) by a
maximum of ½ turn.
Adjustment
nut
7. Repeat steps 4-6 until the value is within limits.
Align Laser The following procedure is used for aligning the position of the laser beam pointed
Position 2 at the bar code on the ampoules. The procedure is to be carried out after a module
installation and whenever the module has been taken apart.
Step Action
2. Put one unused AutoCheck ampoule into position 1 of an empty
carousel.
3. Open the lid (manually), put the carousel into the AutoCheck module
and close the lid (manually).
4. Touch “Align Laser Position” (causes the carousel position #1 to be
moved to the laser).
5. Wait for the value on the display to be updated and check that the
value is within [182 ; 202].
6. Exit Align Carousel/Laser and enter instead Barcode Scanning.
7. Touch “Toggle Lid” to open the lid, put a carousel filled with unused
ampoules into position in the module and touch “Toggle Lid” to close
the lid.
8. Touch “Scan” to scan the ampoules.
9. Check that all ampoules are scanned correctly.
3-35
Align Carousel The following procedure is used for aligning the carousel to the inlet. The
procedure is to be carried out after a module installation and whenever the module
has been taken apart.
Step Action
2. Fill a carousel completely with unused AutoCheck ampoules and put
it into position in the module.
3. Touch “Align Carousel” (causes the lid to open, if closed, the carousel
house to tilt to the upper position, and an ampoule to be positioned
across from the inlet).
4. Pull the inlet probe forwards until it is close to the end of the ampoule
(to ease the adjustment).
5. Check that the center of the ampoule is positioned right across from
the inlet probe.
If not aligned properly, use the touch-keys “¬” or ” ®” to align the
ampoule with the inlet probe.
The alignment value is automatically stored when touching the arrow
keys. Please note, however, that only values in the range [80;120] will
be accepted.
Functional The following procedure is used for checking the function of the AutoCheck
Check Module.
Step Action
1. Enter the AutoCheck Status/Control service program.
2. Touch “Toggle House” and check that the lid slides open and the
carousel house tilts to the up position.
3. Touch “Toggle House” to move the house to the down position.
4. Touch “Toggle Breaker” and check that the breaker comes forward;
then touch “Toggle Breaker” to move the breaker to its zero position.
5. Put a filled carousel into position in the module and touch “Carrousel
Zero”.Check that the carousel moves to the zero position (position #2
in the carousel towards the inlet).
6. Touch “Condition” and check that the conditioning is initiated.
Note Items 7, 8, and 9 may be skipped if Align Laser Position is carried out
prior to the Functional Check.
3-36
Functional
Step Action
Check
(continued) 7. Exit AutoCheck Status/Control and enter Barcode Scanning.
8. Touch “Scan” to scan the ampoules.
9. Check that all ampoules are scanned correctly.
10. Exit the service program and return to the normal operation mode.
11. Initiate two AutoCheck measurements to verify that the module
operates correctly, that is, conditions the ampoules, selects the right
type of AutoCheck ampoule, breaks the ampoule, and that the
analyzer aspirates and measures.
3-37
Miscellaneous Check
Overview
Introduction This sub-section describes the check-out for various components and functions
which do not refer to a specific module.

Barometer Check.............................................................................................. 3-39
Gas Module Check........................................................................................... 3-40
Waste Check .................................................................................................... 3-41
Printer Check.................................................................................................... 3-42
Power Supply Check........................................................................................ 3-43
Electrical Safety Test ....................................................................................... 3-44
3-38
Barometer Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the temperature regulation systems for
the barometer and the barometer itself.
Test Equipment The following test equipment is required for the electrical check procedure:
Reference barometer
Temperature The following procedure is used for visually checking the function of the
Check temperature regulation system.
Step Action
1. Enter the Barometer service program (Analyzing Unit Service)
2. Check that the temperature displayed is within the following limit:
Temperature 37.0 ±1.0 °C.
Barometer The following procedure is used for checking the function of the barometer.
Check
Step Action
1. Enter the Barometer service program (Analyzing Unit Service)
2. Obtain the correct barometric pressure from a reference barometer.
3. Correct the barometric pressure for the altitude difference between the
reference barometer and the analyzer (if any).
The barometric pressure decreases approximately 0.133 kPa or 1
mmHg per each 10 meters increase in altitude. However, this is only
valid at altitudes below 1000 meters.
4. Check that the unadjusted pressure is equal to the one obtained from
the reference barometer ±0.133 kPa (±1 mmHg).
If outside, exit the service program, enter the setup program, and
correct the barometer.
3-39
Gas Module Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the gas module.
Procedure The following procedure is used for checking the function of the gas regulation
system.
Step Action
1. Enter the Gas service program (Analyzing Unit).
2. If GAS1 is not already selected, touch “Toggle gas type” until GAS1
is selected.
3. Touch “Open Valve” to open the valve.
4. Check that “Transducer offset voltage” is within [0.07 ; 0.35] [V].
5. Touch “Start/Stop” to close the valve.
6. Touch “Increase flow by 10 mL/s” until “Flow Setpoint” is 50 mL/s.
7. Touch “Start/Stop” to start the regulator.
8 Check that “Actual flow” is within [40 ; 60] [mL/s].
9. Touch “Start/Stop” to stop the activity.
10. Touch “Volume measurement” and check that “Gas bottle volume” is
100% (with gas cylinders which are known not to be empty).
11. Repeat steps 2 through 10 for GAS2.
Electrical Check The following procedure is used for checking the electrical function of the valves.
of Valves
Step Action
1. Disconnect the plugs at the valve to be checked.
2. Connect the DVM to the two pins of the valve. Check the resistance of
the coil in the valve for [100 ; 200] [W].
3 Reconnect the plugs to the valve.
3-40
Waste Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to check the waste detector.
Test Equipment No test equipment is required for this procedure.
Procedure The following procedure is used for checking the function of the waste detector.
Step Action
1. Enter the Waste service program (Analyzing Unit)
2. If the detector is ready and some values are missing, touch “Run” to
initiate a measuring cycle. Wait 120 seconds for the cycle to complete.
3. Check if the voltage displayed for T_ambient is [100 ; 500] mV.
If outside check connection to waste detector or replace the unit.
4. Check that the value displayed for Slope (T_low - T_high) is in
accordance with the figure below.
Waste Signals This figure shows the interpretation of the Slope (T_low - T_high) in terms of full
or empty depending on the ambient temperature.
Ambient Temperature Waste Full or Empty

(approximate relationship) (fixed threshold)
500 600
450
T_low - T_high [mV]
500
400
T_ambient [mV]
350 400
300
250 300
200
200
150
100 100
10 20 30 40 100 200 300 400 500
Am bient Temperature [°C] T_ambient [mV]
3-41
Printer Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to enable check of the Printer Unit.
Test Equipment An external keyboard is required for this procedure.
Procedure The following procedure is used to check the Printer Unit
Step Action
1. Enter the Service program: “Software” and “Start Windows95 Control
Panel”
2. Select the “Printers” icon and press Enter on the keyboard.
3. Select the “Ticket” icon and “File” (Alt-F) and “Properties” on the
menu.
4. Press “Print test page” and check the print-out is according to the
illustration below.
5. Close the printer windows and the control panel.
Illustration
3-42
Power Supply Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to enable check of the Power Supply.
Test Equipment A DMM, Digital Multi Meter is required for this procedure..
Layout of The power supplies are checked by connecting the DMM to the pins on the
Connector connector J1 on the Analyzer Control PCB which has the following layout:
J1 - Pin Position Color of wire Voltage Check Range

1 Top White +24 V +24 ±1.2 V
2 White +24 V +24 ±1.2 V
3 Blue -12 V -12 ±0.6 V
4 Black Ground
5 Green Power Good Logical High (TTL)
6 Black Ground
7 Black Ground
8 Black Ground
9 Black Ground
10 Yellow +12 V +12 ±0.6 V
11 Red +5.2 V +5.2 ±0.050 V
12 Bottom Red +5.2 V +5.2 ±0.050 V
Voltages with identical designation in the voltage column above are interconnected
both in the Power Supply and on the Analyzer Control PCB (more wires to reduce
the resistance). The check range given above is independent of the load.
Procedure The following procedure is used to check the Power Supply.
Step Action
1. Remove the GAS1 cylinder.
2. Remove the rear panel covering the electronics and the gas module.
3. Using the DMM, check that the individual supplies are within ranges.
4. Assemble the analyzer.
3-43
Electrical Safety Check
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to enable an electrical safety check of the
analyzer.
Tested in the Before shipment from the factory, each analyzer has passed a routine test carried
Factory out in accordance with the requirements specified in the following standards for
laboratory equipment:
IEC IEC 1010-1
USA (UL) UL 3101-1
Canada (CSA) CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1
Europe (EU) EN61010-1
Test not As no repairs are allowed on the power supply, it is not required that an Electrical
Required Safety Check is performed upon the completion of any type of service on the
analyzer.
Test Equipment The following test equipment is required for these procedures:
Protective Bonding Test
· Protective earth conductor tester which is able to measure resistance in the range
0.0 - 0.2 W using a test current in the range 5-25 A.
Dielectrical Strength Test
· Dielectrical strength tester with minimum 2 kV / 5 mA, 50/60 Hz output
including a voltage indicating meter.
· Test line cord with two banana plugs, 617-932 (line/neutral=red, earth=green).
Documentation For documenting the results obtained during this test use the Electrical Safety Test
Report found in Section 10 of this manual.
The test report may be stored in your local analyzer file.
3-44
Electrical Safety Check, Continued
Protective This procedure consists of two checks, one without the line cord and one with.
Bonding Test Please refer to figures 1 and 2 overleaf.
Step Action
1. Connect the protective earth conductor tester as shown on figure 1
(line cord disconnected).
The resistance is measured between the earthing contact at the line
cord receptacle and any part of the accessible metal chassis which
could become live in the event of a fault.
2. Read the resistance.
Pass level: Less than 0.1 W.
3. Connect the protective earth conductor tester as shown on figure 2
(line cord connected).
The resistance is measured between the earthing contact of the mail
plug of the line cord and any part of the accessible metal chassis
which could become live in the event of a fault.
4. Read the resistance. During the testing, the line cord must be moved
section by section over the entire length.
Pass level: Less than 0.2 W.
Figures 1 and 2 The two figures below show how to connect the test equipment during the steps of
the protective bonding test.
Metal Metal
Q Chassis Q
Chassis
Figure 1 Figure 2
3-45
Electrical Safety Check, Continued
Dielectrical The dielectrical strength test is a high voltage test of the power supply.
Strength Test
CAUTION Excessive or repeated testing may unnessarily stress the power
supply and must therefore be avoided.
Carry out the test as follows:
Step Action
1. Connect the test line cord to the analyzer and then the dielectrical
strength tester between the primary circuit (red banana plug) and any
part of the accessible metal chassis.
2. Set the power switch on the analyzer to the ON position.
3. Perform the test.
The test voltage must be raised from 0 to 1.5 kV within 2 seconds and
then held at 1.5 kV for 2 seconds after which it must be swithed off.
Pass criteria: No flash-over or breakdown.
3-46
PC Module
Overview
Introduction Please note that no analyzer service program for the PC module is included. We
recommend the use of a general available diagnostics tool, such as TouchStone
CheckIt or similar tools.

BIOS Setup ...................................................................................................... 3-48
Software Installation ........................................................................................ 3-50
Module Upgrade .............................................................................................. 3-54
PC Module Check ............................................................................................ 3-56
Touch Screen Calibration................................................................................. 3-57
3-47
BIOS Setup
Purpose These procedures are used to set up the BIOS after having replaced the Main CPU
PCB.
Two Versions of Two versions of the Main CPU PCB exist as indicated in the table. As the BIOS
Main CPU PCB setup for these two boards are different, two procedures are given.
Main CPU PCB Installed from factory in Basic Unit (902-441)

902-589 (PCM-5890) R0001 through R0167
902-643 (PCM-5896) R0168 onwards
Procedure for The following explains the procedure for setting up the BIOS in PC Modules
PCM-5890 equipped with the Main CPU PCB type PCM-5890:
Step Action
1. Switch on the Analyzer
2. During the memory test, press “DELETE” to enter BIOS Setup
3. Enter the password if requested
4. Load BIOS Defaults
5. Enter Standard CMOS Setup
6. Set Drive A: = 1.44 Mb
7. Set Drive B: = None
8. Escape and Enter BIOS Features Setup
9. Set Boot sequence = C, A and Memory parity check = Enabled
10. Escape and Enter PCI Configuration Setup
11. Set 1st Available IRQ=11 and 2nd available IRQ = 10
12. Escape and Enter Chipset Features Setup
13. Set IDE Primary Slave PIO = Mode 0
14. Escape and Enter Password Setting
15. Set Password to 89.452
16. Press “F10” to save and exit the BIOS Setup
3-48
BIOS Setup, Continued
Procedure for The following explains the procedure for setting up the BIOS in PC Modules
PCM-5896 equipped with the Main CPU PCB type PCM-5896:
Step Action
1. Switch on the Analyzer.
2. During the memory test, press “DELETE” to enter BIOS Setup.
3. Enter the password (“89.452”) if requested.
4. Choose "LOAD BIOS DEFAULTS" and press "Enter".
5. Press "y" and press "Enter".
6. Choose "LOAD SETUP DEFAULTS" and press "Enter".
8. Choose "INTEGRATED PERIPHERALS" and press "Enter".
9. Choose "Parallel Port Mode" and press "page down" until SPP is
selected.
10. Press "Esc".
11. Press "F10".
3-49
Software Installation
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to install the necessary software in case the hard
disk has been replaced.
Equipment The following equipment is required for the procedure:

Required
Software package, that is Boot Disk, Windows95 CD, and ABL700 CD
External keyboard
Note See also “Software upgrade” in the Service program Section.
Warning Do not touch the CD disc surfaces.
Important It is important that the user setup of the analyzer is unchanged after having
installed software. Therefore, always:
Step Action
1. Before initiating any software installation procedure, "Save setup" on
a disk (Status/Control, Utilities, Setup).
2. After having completed the software installation, "Load setup" from
the disk (Status/Control, Utilities, Setup).
Partitioning the The procedure explains the steps for partitioning the hard disk:
Hard disk
Step Action
1. Insert the Boot disk in the floppy drive and switch on the Analyzer
2. When the Prompt A:> is available type in “FDISK” and press Enter
3. When "Do you wish to enable large disk support (Y/N)" appears type
"Y".
4. Select “1. Create DOS partition” and press Enter
5. Select “1. Create primary DOS” partition and press Enter
6. Accept the defaults by pressing Enter for the next questions until
asked to shut down.
7. Switch Off the Analyzer
3-50
Software Installation, Continued
Windows95 The procedure explains the steps for installing the Windows95 and the ABL700
Software software.
Installation
1. Insert the Win95 CD in the drive (the boot disk is still in A).
2. When the Prompt A:> is available type in “Wincopy” and press Enter.
3. When the message “Will now format your C: drive” is displayed,
press any key to continue (Ctrl+C skips the installation).
4. When asked for, remove the Floppy and the CD and switch the
analyzer off and on.
5. When asked for, type in Name and Company and press Enter.
6. In the License screen use TAB to get to “I accept the agreement”.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
7. Type in the Analyzer’s original License number supplied with the
Certificate Of Authenticity. Click “Finish”.
8. For Windows access, type in Name and Password (if wanted).
If a start-up without user intervention is wanted type in “DEFUSER”
as name and no password.
9. Accept to keep existing files.
10. Select “No” for further DHCP messages.
11. Select the desired Time Zone.
12. Call the Control Panel and perform a Touch Screen Calibration by
pressing the “Citron Touch Screen” icon. Follow the instruction on
the screen.
13. Continue with the Network and ABL700 software installation.
3-51
Network This procedure is to be considered as an example (a number of different network

Installation. drivers exist).
In cases where a network connection is not required the network driver should not
be installed.
The procedure explains the steps for installing the network adaptor:
1. From the Control Panel select “Network”.

2. Add Client: “Client for Microsoft Network” and add Service: “File
and Printer sharing for Microsoft Network”.
3. Choose the identification tab in the “Network” dialog box and enter
relevant identification for the actual customer.
4. Accept to keep existing files.
5. Accept to restart (Windows95).
6. Continue with the ABL700 Software Installation.
ABL700 The procedure explains the steps for installing the ABL700 software:
Software
Installation Step Action
1. Insert the ABL700 CD (autostarts) and follow the instructions given
by the Installation program.
2. Accept to restart.
3. Press Enter to cancel password.
4. When the ABL700 program is running, enter Service programs,
Software.
5. Select “Module upgrade” and “Install AU SW”.
During the installation of the AU SW the bottle illumination is used
for indicating the status, see below.
6. When finished select “Restart ABL725”.
7. Remove the CD.
3-52
Status of AU During the installation of the AU SW the bottle illumination is used for indicating
SW Installation the status as follows:
Device Indication Status

Cleaning Flashes at 0.5 Hz The bootstrap code is active.
CAL1 Illuminated The bootstrap code is connected to the AU
engine (the AU engine takes care of all
communication to the Analyzing Unit)
Waste + Rinse Illuminated The FLASH file system is formatted or data
is restored from the RAM disk.
During this period the AU SW
installation must not be interrupted as
this may cause back-up data to be lost.
3-53
Module Upgrade
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to update the software on the Analyzer.
Equipment The ABL700 CD is required for the procedure.

Required
Important It is important that the user setup of the analyzer is unchanged after having
installed software. Therefore, always:
Step Action
1. Before initiating any software installation procedure, "Save setup" on
a disk (Status/Control, Utilities, Setup).
2. After having completed the software installation, "Load setup" from
the disk (Status/Control, Utilities, Setup).
ABL700 The procedure explains the steps for upgrading the ABL700 software:
Software
Upgrade 1. Insert the ABL700 CD in the CD-drive and press “Software”,
“Module Upgrade” to enter the Software Upgrade program.
2. Wait until the Software Upgrade screen is displayed.
3. Touch the appropriate key for the desired action.
4. Wait until the Upgrade screen is displayed.
5. Touch the “Restart the ABL700” touch-key
3-54
Module Upgrade, Continued
Status of AU During the installation of the AU SW the bottle illumination is used for indicating
SW Installation the status as follows:
Device Indication Status

Cleaning Flashes at 0.5 Hz The bootstrap code is active.
CAL1 Illuminated The bootstrap code is connected to the AU
engine (the AU engine takes care of all
communication to the Analyzing Unit)
Waste + Rinse Illuminated The FLASH file system is formatted or data
is restored from the RAM disk.
During this period the AU SW
installation must not be interrupted as
this may cause back-up data to be lost.
3-55
PC Module Check
Purpose To check if the correct adapters and drivers for the display, modem, and mouse
(touch-screen), are installed.

In case of general PC problems, a PC tool such as Touchstone “Check It”
diagnostics kit or similar is recommended for further troubleshooting.
Check-out Check as follows:
Step Action
1. Enter the Service program: “Software” and “Start Windows 95
Control Panel”
2. Select “System” and the tab “Device Manager”
3. Check that there are no conflicting items i.e. no “!” or “?” in the list
4. Expand the Display, Modem and Mouse and check that the drivers
correspond to the illustration below.
5. Exit from the Control Panel by “Cancel” and hitting the X in the
corner or by pressing “Alt” + “F4” on the keyboard.
Screen
3-56
Touch Screen Calibration
Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to calibrate the Cursor position on the Display in
case the Touch Screen or the Hard disk has been replaced or the DMS WIN95
software has been re-installed
Test Equipment The following test equipment is required for this procedure:
External keyboard.
Warning Do not modify other parameters than the ones described in the procedure.
Procedure The following procedure is used to adjust the cursor position:
Step Action
1. Enter the Service program: “Software” and “Start Windows95 Control
Panel”
2. Select the “Citron Infrared Touch” icon and press Enter on the
keyboard.
3. If the screen “Citron IRT connection Parameters” appears press “No”.
Otherwise press “Calibrate” and follow the instructions on the screen.
4. Press “Properties” and “Advanced”
5. Set “X-beam” and “Y-beam” to 1, press “OK” and “Close”
6. Close down the Control Panel.
3-57
ABL700 Series Service Manual 4. Replacement Procedures
4. Replacement Procedures
Overview
Introduction This chapter describes the procedures for replacements, module installation (new
analyzer), up/downgrade of hardware, and test of the analyzer.
medical advice.

pH/BG, El/Met, and Thermostatted Blind Modules ........................................ 4-3
OXI Module ..................................................................................................... 4-11
Inlet Module..................................................................................................... 4-18
Fluidic Modules ............................................................................................... 4-23
Gas/Analyzer Control Module ......................................................................... 4-27
Basic Unit......................................................................................................... 4-33
PC Module ....................................................................................................... 4-49
Parts List Update.............................................................................................. 4-59
Important Always establish an ESD protected area before removing a module from the
analyzer or exposing electronics to prevent damage of the electronics.
Some flat cable connectors are equipped with a locking device. Always press on
the side before pulling the connector to avoid damage.
When installing or re-installing a module, always:
· Ensure that no pins of the flat cable socket are slightly bent
· Insert the plug of the flat cable straight into the socket
· Ensure that flat cables are not pinched or damaged when inserting the module
into the analyzer
4-1
4. Replacement Procedures ABL700 Series Service Manual
Overview, Continued
Important Flex PCBs are locked to the connector. Always unlock before pulling the flex PCB
(continued) from the connector to avoid damage. Always lock upon assembly to ensure
permanent contact.
Never use sharp tools for handling tubing to avoid damage.
While performing calibrations and measurements, the analyzer must be fully
assembled. This includes the black cover for the OXI Module (to avoid
When installing a complete module (in case of an upgrade of the analyzer or a
temporary fix of a problem) and when exchanging any of the parts, which are
recognized by the Parts List service program, the part number and serial number
for the new part must be entered into the Parts List service program (by scanning
its bar code or by using an external keyboard). Please refer to the paragraph
describing the program for information about which parts are recognized.
Always perform either the Service Test or the Module Installation Test upon
completion of any type of service (e.g. installation, upgrade, or replacement) and
document the results if required. To determine which of the two tests to perform
after the servicing, please refer to the description of the tests in Chapter 5.
Switching the In order to switch off both the DMS PC and the analyzing unit properly, follow the
Analyzer off procedure below.
Step Action
1. In the Service Setup program, set “Ignore removal of cover” to “Yes”.
2. Touch “Status/Control”, “Utilities”, “Power Down”, and then
“Confirm power down”.
This will initiate a proper shut down of the PC (the analyzing unit will
not be affected).
3. Open the front cover (clear plastic which gives access to electrodes).
This will initiate a draining of the wet section.
4. Wait for the PC to shut down and the wet section to complete the
draining.
5. Switch the analyzer off and disconnect from the mains.
4-2
pH/BG, El/Met, and Thermostatted Blind Modules
Introduction This paragraph describes the dismantling and replacement procedures for the parts
in the pH/BG, El/Met and Thermostatted Blind Modules. The references in the
procedures refer to the figures at the end of the paragraph.
Warning DO NOT:
Touch any of the components in the lens unit as this will jeopardize the visibility
of the electrode chambers.
ALWAYS:
Establish an ESD protected area before removing a module from the analyzer to
prevent damage of the electronics.
Replacement of Important:
Module or Prior to removing and especially prior to mounting the pH/BG or El/Met Module
Module PCB PCB on the module it is important to open all electrode connectors completely.
Otherwise the contact springs may be damaged when sliding the PCB into place.
The following steps must be carried out after having replaced the complete pH/BG
or El/Met Modules, or the pH/BG or El/Met Module PCBs:
Step Action
1. Use the software versions service program to check that the software
versions (build) for the Inlet, pH/BG, El/Met, and OXI modules are
identical.
If the versions are not identical, use the module upgrade service
program to install the AU software.
2. Perform a zero current calibration of the pO2 and Met channels.
Removal of Follow the procedure below when removing the Thermostatted Blind Module.
Thermostatted
Blind Module Step Action
1. Switch off the analyzer (see page 2 of this chapter).
2. Remove the plastic cover plate securing the connection pipe (two
Allen screws).
3. Disconnect the rubber tube between the El/Met and Thermostatted
Blind Modules at the El/Met Module and the tube connecting the
Thermostatted Blind Module to the OXI Module at the connection
pipe. Wipe off any liquid at the nipples.
4. Remove the two screws, marked “A” in figure 1, located at the center
top and center bottom of the module.
4-3
pH/BG, El/Met, and Thermostatted Blind Modules, Continued
Removal of
Step Action
Thermostatted
Blind Module 5. Gently lift the module until the end of the Power and CAN bus cable
(continued) is visible - then disconnect the cable at the Thermostatted Blind
Module PCB.
Removal of Follow the procedure below when removing the El/Met Module.
El/Met Module
Step Action
3. Remove the plastic cover plate securing the connection pipe on the
Thermostatted Blind Module (two Allen screws).
Blind Modules at the El/Met Module. Wipe off any liquid at the
nipple.
5. Disconnect the rubber tube between the pH/BG and El/Met Modules
at the pH/BG Module. Wipe off any liquid at the nipple.
6. Disconnect the Rinse solution tube at the left membrane valve on the
El/Met Module.
top and center bottom on both the El/Met and Thermostatted Blind
Modules.
8. Gently lift both modules a little until the El/Met Module is free of the
Thermostatted Blind Module - then put down the Thermostatted Blind
Module again.
9. Gently lift the El/Met Module until the end of the Power and CAN bus
cable is visible - then disconnect the cable at the El/Met Module PCB.
10. When sliding the El/Met Module back into the analyzer, ensure that
the ferrite core on the cable is not caught in a narrow place as this may
damage the Module PCB when tightening the screws.
4-4
Removal of Follow the procedure below when removing the pH/BG Module.
pH/BG Module
Step Action
3. Remove the plastic cover plate securing the connection pipe on the
Thermostatted Blind Module (two Allen screws).
Blind Modules at the El/Met Module. Wipe off any liquid at the
nipple.
5. Disconnect the rubber tube between the pH/BG and El/Met Modules
at the pH/BG Module. Wipe off any liquid at the nipple.
6. Disconnect the rubber tube between the Inlet and pH/BG Modules at
the Inlet Module. Wipe off any liquid at the nipple.
El/Met Module. Wipe off any liquid at the nipple.
pH/BG Module. Wipe off any liquid at the nipple.
9. Disconnect the two gas tubes between the steel nipples and the pH/BG
Module at the steel nipples.
top and center bottom on both the pH/BG, El/Met and Thermostatted
Blind Modules.
11. Gently lift the Thermostatted Blind Module up until the end of the
Power and CAN bus cable is visible - then disconnect the cable at the
Thermostatted Blind Module PCB.
12. Gently lift the pH/BG and El/Met Modules a little until the pH/BG
Module is free of the El/Met Module - then put down the El/Met
Module again.
13. Gently lift the pH/BG Module until the end of the Power and CAN
bus cable is visible - then disconnect the cable at the pH/BG Module
PCB.
14. When sliding the pH/BG Module back into the analyzer, ensure that
the ferrite core on the cable is not caught in a narrow place as this may
damage the Module PCB when tightening the screws. Check also the
position of the ferrite core on the cable for the El/Met Module before
tightening its screws.
4-5
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the measuring chamber:
Measuring
Chamber and Step Action
Liquid Sensors 1. Switch off the analyzer (see page 2 of this chapter).
2. Remove the electrodes.
3. Remove the two screws marked “B” in figure 1.
4. Slightly loosen the five screws, marked “E” in figure 2, securing the
electrode connectors (they are a bit too long).
Carefully slide the measuring chamber housing, marked “F” in figure
2, with electrode connectors up.
5. The five sealing rings, marked “G” in figure 2, for the measuring
chamber will probably remain in the measuring chamber housing -
carefully take them out.
6. Remove the heat conductor, marked “H” in figure 2. Must be replaced
with a new heat conductor upon assembly.
7. Disconnect the tubes at the two liquid sensors, marked “I” in figure 2.
Wipe off any liquid at the nipples.
8. Remove the two screws, marked “C” in figure 1, securing the
measuring chamber and lift the chamber.
9. Remove the washer, marked “K” in figure 2, and then carefully
remove the two liquid sensors without damaging the flexible PCB.
10. Remove the heat conductor, marked “J” in figure 2, underneath the
measuring chamber. Must be replaced with a new heat conductor upon
assembly.
Assembly:
Step Action
1. Fit the new heat conductor in the groove, carefully mount the liquid
sensors (black side towards measuring chamber) and the washer on
the new measuring chamber, put the chamber into place and secure it
with the two screws.
2. Fit the five sealing rings for the measuring chamber on the new
chamber, fit the new heat conductor over the measuring chamber,
carefully slide the measuring chamber housing into place and secure it
tightly with the two screws.
Then tighten the five screws securing the electrode connectors.
4-6
Replacement of The following table describes the procedures for replacing the pump rotor.
Pump Rotor
Step Action
1. Remove the pump tubing from the pump housing.
2. Pull the rotor upwards.
3. Remove the sealing ring, marked “L” in figure 2 (to be replaced with a
new), and clean the well if any deposits are present.
4. Fit a new sealing ring into place (cone-shaped surface pointing
downwards).
5. Fit the rotor into place (note the orientation on the axle). The rotor
clicks into place when pushed down.
6. Mount the pump tubing.
7. Call a pump calibration to check its effectiveness.
Replacement of The following table describes the procedure for replacing valves.
Valves
Step Action
2. Disconnect the plugs for the two valves.
3. Remove the securing spring, marked “N” in figure 2, securing the
valves to the module and pull the valves from the module.
4. Remove (unscrew) the valve to be replaced using the tool, 902-548.
5. Carefully unpack the valve (front-end pointing upwards) making sure
that the moving parts of the valve stay in the valve housing.
CAUTION
In case the moving parts come out:
Do not touch the outer surface of the anchor (removes the oil film).
Make sure that the spring fits correctly and enters the wells at both
ends (to avoid damage of the spring).
6. Carefully mount the valve in its well (front of valve pointing
upwards). Tighten the valve at a torque of 50 ±5 Ncm.
7. Slide the valves into the module and secure them with the clip.
8. Connect the valves to the PCB (Rinse solution valve to J7 and the air
valve to J6).
9. Reassemble and then check the function of the valve (Analyzing Unit
service program).
4-7
Replacement of The following table describes the procedures for replacing the NTC resistor.
NTC resistor
Step Action
2. Remove the four screws, marked “D” in figure 1, securing the box
covering the prisms and remove the box.
3. Remove the prism unit; marked “M” in figure 2 (three screws). Do not
touch the surfaces of the prisms and lenses. Please note that the prisms
easily come off (secured only by a loose force-fit).
4. Remove the NTC resistor.
5. Fit the new NTC resistor and ensure that the hole is filled with heat
sink compound.
6. Mount the prism unit ensuring that the leads for the NTC are free.
7. Mount the box covering the prisms, again ensuring that the leads for
the NTC are free.
8. After assembly and start, perform the temperature check.
4-8
Figure 1 pH/BG or El/Met Module seen from the top and bottom.
B
C D
4-9
Figure 2 pH/BG or El/Met Module, exploded view.
H
K
G
I
N
M
4-10
OXI Module
Introduction This section describes the dismantling and replacement procedures for the parts in
the OXI module.
Two Versions The OXI Module is found in two versions where the main difference is the
material used for the chassis plate. The original chassis was made of metal, which
was painted grey, whereas the new is made of black plastic. The black plastic
chassis is introduced in OXI modules of RUN 211 onwards.
Warning DO NOT:
· Adjust the Lamp unless needed.
· Touch the Lamp glass when replacing bulbs.
· Attempt to loosen or tigthen ANY screws unless described in the procedures.
· Dismantle the subunits unless described below.
· Bend or stretch the optical fiber cable.
· Reuse the tube securing clamps.
Illustration Lamp Unit
Valve
Liquid Sensor
Vibration dampers Hemolyzer Unit
Spectrometer Unit
Optical fiber
OXI Controller PCB
4-11
OXI Module, Continued
Replacement of When having replaced the complete OXI Module or the OXI Module PCB, then:
Module or
Module PCB Step Action
1. Use the software versions program to check that the software versions
(build) for the Inlet, pH/BG, El/Met, and OXI modules are identical.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when removing the OXI module:
OXI Module
Step Action
1. Switch off the analyzer (see page 2 of this chapter) and remove the
cover on the OXI module.
2. Disconnect the pump tubing on the preheater. The tube securing
clamp must be renewed at reassembly.
3. Loosen pinch valve and disconnect the tubing on the module to the
left of the OXI module.
4. Remove the screw at the top and bottom of the module and carefully
pull out the complete module to the point where the CAN bus cable is
accessible.
5. Disconnect the CAN bus cable at the connector “Power”.
6. Mounting is done in the reverse order.
7. Power on and check the halogen intensity in the Lamp Adjustment
program. Perform a Lamp Adjustment if needed.
8. Perform an OXI Complete test and a service tHb calibration.
9. Exit the service program, wait for the Rinse to complete, and then
perform a 1- or 2- point calibration.
4-12
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the Lamp Unit:
Lamp Unit
Step Action
1. Remove the OXI module from the analyzer as described above.
2. Disconnect the flat cable on the Lamp Unit PCB.
3. Disconnect the Neon Lamp cable on the OXI PCB (J3).
4. Remove the two screws securing the Lamp Unit. Pull the unit straight
up so that it is still fixed on a small clamp.
program. If outside limits, perform a Lamp Adjustment.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the halogen lamp:
Halogen Lamp
Step Action
1. Remove the cover on the OXI module.
2. Remove the metal stand-off located between the Lamp Unit and the
Spectrometer.
3. Unscrew the black holder pointing towards the Spectrometer.
4. Remove the brass stabilizing bushing and the defective lamp (with
cable).
5. Insert the new lamp with cable (636-417) ensuring that the notch on
the lamp fits on the pin in the metal house.
6. Insert the stabilizing bushing (924-206) and the spring (876-673) then
mount and tighten the black lamp holder 924-205).
7. Assemble the remaining parts.
4-13
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the Neon lamp:
Neon Lamp
Step Action
2. Disconnect the Neon Lamp cable on the OXI PCB (J3).
3. Unscrew the outer squared black part on the Neon lamp holder.
4. Screw in the new lamp and connect the cable.
5. Assembling is done in the reverse order.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the Hemolyzer Unit:
Hemolyzer Unit
Step Action
2. Remove the Lamp Unit as described above.
3. Remove the pinch valve and tubing. The tube securing clamp must be
renewed at reassembly.
4. Disconnect the Heater cable (J7), the Thermistor cable (J8) and the
Hemolyzer cable (J6) on the OXI PCB.
5. Pull off the tubing at the liquid sensor, and carefully remove the
sensor. The tube securing clamps must be renewed at reassembly.
6. Remove the two screws securing the Hemolyzer Unit to the main
module.
7. Pull the Unit sligthly out towards yourself, until the Allen screw
securing the optical fiber (placed on the side of the Hemolyzer) is
accessible.
8. Loosen the Allen screw and pull out the optical fiber.
9. Pull out the Hemolyzer Unit.
10. Loosen the Allen screw (next to the heater transistor) securing the
thermistor and remove the thermistor. Mount it in the new hemolyzer.
4-14
Replacement of
Step Action
Hemolyzer Unit
(continued) 11. Replacement/assembly is done in the reverse order.
Ensure that the optical fiber is pushed completely in to the end stop (it
may be necessary to unscrew the Allen screw further to prevent it
from acting as a false end stop) - then tighten the Allen screw. If the
fiber is not at the end stop when tightening the Allen screw this may
damage the fiber.
The tube securing clamps must be renewed at reassembly.
program. Perform a Lamp Adjustment if needed.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the plastic tubing nipple on the
Plastic Nipple Hemolyzer (connects the cuvette to the tube going to the heater):
on Hemolyzer
Step Action
1. Pull the Hemolyzer from the analyzer as described above.
2. Remove and discard the tubing clamp (secures the heater tube to the
plastic nipple) and disconnect the heater tube.
3. Remove the liquid sensor.
2. Remove the two screws securing the brass plate and plastic tubing
nipple.
3. Remove the brass plate and carefully withdraw the plastic nipple.
Ensure that the O-ring, 835-351, comes off too (must be renewed at
reassembly).
4. Reassemble in reverse order.
5. Perform an OXI Complete test.
If the test for the hemolyzer fails, the hemolyzer must be replaced.
4-15
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the Spectrometer:

Spectrometer
Step Action
2. Unscrew the optical fiber from the Spectrometer.
3. Disconnect and remove the flat cable connecting the Spectrometer.
4. Disconnect the Lamp Unit PCB flat cable from the OXI PCB.
5. Remove the metal plate, which guides the optical fiber.
6. Unscrew the four screws (from the front of the OXI module), which
secures the Spectrometer.
On OXI Modules below R0211 (metal chassis) four vibration dampers
(855-506) and four plastic washers (924-127) may now fall from the
assembly.
7. Pull the complete Spectrometer out over the OXI PCB.
8. Assembly is done in the reverse order.
Remember to tighten the optical fiber.
For OXI Modules below R0211 the four vibration dampers are placed
against the spectrometer and the four isolation washers between the
vibration dampers and the OXI module chassis plate.
4-16
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the optical fiber:
Optical Fiber
Step Action
2. Unscrew the optical fiber from the Spectrometer.
3. Remove the pinch valve and tubing. The tube securing clamp must be
renewed at reassembly.
4. Remove the two screws securing the Hemolyzer Unit to the main
module.
5. Pull the Unit sligthly towards yourself, until the Allen screw securing
the optical fiber (placed on the side of the Hemolyzer) is accessible.
6. Loosen the Allen screw and pull out the optical fiber.
7. Replacement/assembly is done in the reverse order.
Ensure that the optical fiber is pushed completely in to the end stop (it
may be necessary to unscrew the Allen screw further to prevent it
from acting as a false end stop) - then tighten the Allen screw. If the
fiber is not at the end stop when tightening the Allen screw this may
damage the fiber.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the Liquid sensor:
Liquid Sensor
Step Action
1. Pull off the tubing at the liquid sensor, and carefully remove the
sensor. The tube securing clamps must be renewed at reassembly.
2. Disconnect the sensor flex cable on the OXI PCB.
3. Mount the new sensor (clear side towards the hemolyzer), the tubing
with clamp and connect the flex cable. Note that the connectors must
be facing the spectrometer.
4. Perform a Liquid sensor adjustment.
4-17
Inlet Module
in the Inlet Module. The references in the procedures refer to the figures at the end
of the paragraph.
Warning ALWAYS:
Establish an ESD protected area before removing the module from the analyzer to
Replacement of Follow the procedure below after having replaced the complete Inlet Module or the
Module or Inlet Module PCB:
Module PCB
Step Action
1. Use the software versions service program to check that the software
versions (build) for the Inlet, pH/BG, El/Met, and OXI modules are
identical.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the Inlet probe.
Inlet Probe
Step Action
1. Enter the Recording Replacements screen.
1. Slide off the two inlet handles, marked “A” in figure 1, to the right.
2. Remove the inlet washer, marked “B” in figure 1.
3. Push the lock, marked “C” in figure 1, to the right, disconnect the tube
and remove the probe, marked “D” in figure 1.
4. Assemble and touch Restart.
Removal of Inlet Follow the procedure below when removing the Inlet Module.
Module
Step Action
2. Disconnect the tubes at positions marked “E” in figure 1.
4-18
Inlet Module, Continued
Removal of Inlet
Step Action
Module
(continued) 3. Remove the two screws marked “F” in figure 1 (rear left and front
center). Do not touch the four screws at the center of the module at
this point.
4. Gently lift up the module until the end of the Power and CAN bus
cable is visible - then disconnect the cable.
5. When assembling, please note that the rear left screw marked “F” in
figure 1 is longer than the front center screw.
Removal of Inlet Follow the procedure below when removing the inlet preheater.
Preheater
Step Action
1. Remove the Inlet Module from the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the two tubes to the preheater. Wipe off any liquid at the
nipples.
3. Remove two screws, marked “G” in figures 1 and 2, securing the
preheater.
4. Disconnect the cable for the preheater at the Inlet Module PCB.
5. In case of liquid spillage ensure that the preheater, isolation plate,
isolation bushings, and screws are completely dry before assembly.
Removal of Inlet Follow the procedure below when removing the inlet probe system.
Probe System
Step Action
2. Disconnect the rubber tube at the inlet probe. Wipe off any liquid at
the nipple.
3. Disconnect the cables for the stepping motor and the Inlet Pickup PCB
at the Inlet Module PCB.
4. Remove the two large screws, marked “H” in figure 1, at the center
top of the module.
5. Carefully remove the entire inlet probe system with motor from the
module.
4-19
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the stepping motor.
Stepping Motor
Step Action
2. Remove the Inlet probe system.
3. Place the inlet probe system with motor downwards and black housing
upwards.
4. Remove the two screws, marked “I” in figure 2, securing the motor.
5. Assemble in reverse sequence ensuring that the leads from the motor
point towards the rear of the module.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when replacing the inlet pickup PCB.
Inlet Pickup
PCB Step Action
3. Remove the Inlet Pickup PCB (two screws, marked “J” in figure 2).
Cover Off Follow the procedure below when replacing the Cover off switch.
Switch
Step Action
3. Remove the two remaining screws, marked “K” in figure1, at the
center top of the module (small screws) and remove the switch.
4-20
Figure 1 The following figure shows the Inlet Module seen from the top and from the
bottom.
G
E
F C
D
4-21
Figure 2 The following figure shows the Inlet Module seen from the top and from the
bottom.
I
G
4-22
Fluidic Modules
in the Fluidic Modules.
Warning ALWAYS:
Replacement of The following table describes the procedure for replacing the pump rotor.
Pump Rotor
Step Action
1. Remove the pump tubing.
3. Remove the sealing ring on the motor axle (to be replaced with a
downwards).
5. Fit the rotor into place (note the orientation on the axle; ensure that the
type of rotor is correct). The rotor clicks into place when pushed
down.
7. Call a pump calibration to check its effectiveness (Analyzing Unit
service program).
Removal of The following table describes the procedure for removing the Right Fluidic
Module Module. For details regarding the tubing please refer to the tubing diagram in the
spare parts section.
Numbers and letters in the following procedure refer to the tubing diagram in
Chapter 9.
Step Action
2. Disconnect the two waste pump tubes, “12” and “13”, at the left side
of the tubing organizer, “F”.
3. Disconnect the tubes, “15”, “16”, “17”, “18”, and “20B” at the Fluidic
Module.
4-23
Fluidic Modules, Continued
Removal of
Step Action
Module
(continued) 4. Disconnect the OXI pump tube, “14” at the OXI Module by first
removing the tube clamp and then the tube).
5. Remove the three solution bottles and the dummy to the left.
6. Remove the four screws situated in each corner of the module.
When assembling, please note that the screw at the upper left corner is
shorter than the three other.
7. Gently lift up the module until the ends of the two cables are visible -
then disconnect the cables.
8. Upon assembly ensure that the vibration dampers are present in each
of the four screw positions.
Replacement of The following table describes the procedure for replacing valves.
Valves
Step Action
2. Disconnect the plug for the valve to be removed.
3. Remove (unscrew) the valve using the tool, 902-548.
4. Carefully unpack the new valve (front end pointing upwards) making
sure that the moving parts of the valve stay in the valve housing.
CAUTION
In case the moving parts come out:
Do not touch the outer surface of the anchor (removes the oil film).
Make sure that the spring fits correctly and enters the wells at both
ends (to avoid damage of the spring).
5. Carefully mount the valve in its well (front of valve pointing
upwards).
Tighten the valve at a torque of 50 ±5 Ncm.
6. Connect the valve to the PCB (V1 to J1).
See the note below Figure 1 in this paragraph.
7. Reassemble and check the function of the valve (Analyzing Unit
service program).
4-24
Replacement of The following table describes the procedure for replacing the pump motor.
Pump Motor
Step Action
2. Remove the pump tubing.
4. Remove the sealing ring on the motor axle (to be replaced with a
5. Disconnect the cable for the motor at the PCB.
6. Remove the two screws securing the motor and remove the motor.
7. Fit the new motor in place (with the cable exit from the motor
pointing towards the middle of the module).
Secure the motor ensuring that the ground wire is attached and
reconnect the cable to the PCB.
downwards).
9. Fit the rotor into place (note the orientation of the axle; ensure that the
type of rotor is correct). The rotor clicks into place when pushed
down.
11. Call a pump calibration to check its effectiveness (Analyzing Unit
service program).
Replacement of
Bottle The following table describes the procedure for replacing bottle connectors.
Connector
Step Action
1. Remove the bottle attached to the connector.
2. Using polygrib pliers gently unscrew the connector (counter-
clockwise). Ensure that also the O-ring is removed (to be replaced
with a new).
3. Clean the hole for the connector (distilled water).
4. Mount a new O-ring on the new connector and fit it on the module.
Ensure that the O-ring fits correctly.
Carefully tighten the bottle connector at a torque of 25 ±5 Ncm,
ensuring that the surface is not damaged.
4-25
Liquid Spillage The following table describes the procedure for cleaning and drying in case of
liquid spillage.
Step Action
1. Remove the tubing in the affected area.
Remove also the pump rotor and sealing ring in case the spillage is in
a pump.
2. Clean and dry the area and also the draining channel leading from the
area.
Figure 1, The figure below is a bottom view of the Right Fluidic Module.
Bottom View
See the note below.
Valves
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
V7 V8
V6 V5 V4
V1 V2 V3
Note The sequence of connectors for the valves on the Fluidic Module PCB has been
changed. For both versions of the PCB V1 is to be connected to J1 etc.
Fluidic Module PCB, Mounted in Basic Units, Sequence of connectors

902-436 of Runs: 902-441, of Runs: for valves on the PCB
0001 - 0039 0001 - 0183 As indicated in Figure 1
above
0040 onwards 0184 onwards Reverse order (J1 to the
left and J8 to the right)
4-26
Gas/Analyzer Control Module
in the Gas/Analyzer Control Module.
Warning Always establish an ESD protected area before exposing, removing, and handling
of electronics to prevent damage.
Gas/Analyzer The following procedure is used for removing the Gas/Analyzer Control Module.
Control Module,
Removal Step Action
2. Remove the gas cylinders and the cover for the wet section.
3. Remove the rear panel covering the electronics (six screws).
4. Disconnect all the cables connected to the Analyzer Control PCB.
(For analyzers with Analyzer Control PCB 902-450, the cover plate
for the PCB must be removed to disconnect cables).
5. Disconnect the two gas tubes at the top steel nipples.
6. Remove the five screws at “A” (Figure 1) and withdraw the module.
Gas/Analyzer D
Module, A
Figure 1
A
A
A B C A
4-27
Gas/Analyzer Control Module, Continued
Pressure Follow this procedure for replacing the Pressure Transducer.

Transducer,
Replacement Step Action
1. Switch off the analyzer and disconnect it from the mains.
2. Remove the gas cylinders.
3. Remove the cover for the wet section.
4. Remove the rear panel covering the electronics.
5. Remove the two screws, marked “D” in figure 1, and the plate
covering the transducer and withdraw it from the housing.
6. Discard the washer, 837-045 (902-441 below R0094), or the two O-
rings, 835-449 and 835-305 (902-441 R0094 onwards).
7. Mount two new O-rings, 835-449 and 835-305 in the housing.
For 902-441 below R0094 the original washer is to be replaced by the
two O-rings.
8. Mount the new pressure transducer.
Note that the metal side must face the O-rings and that the three wires
in the plug must be to the right (closest to the printer).
9. Assemble the remaining parts and switch on the analyzer.
10. Perform the gas module check.
Flow Regulator Follow this procedure for replacing the flow regulator with valve (left or right).
with Valve,
Replacement Step Action
1. Remove the Gas/Analyzer Control module as described above.
2. Disconnect the thin metal tube connected to the valve to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the two connectors (electrical connection) from the valve
to be replaced.
4. Remove the protection bar at the bottom of the flow regulators (two
screws, “E”, on figure 2).
5. Remove the two screws marked “B” (left regulator) or “C” (right
regulator) on figure 1 and withdraw the regulator.
6. Mount in reverse order.
7. Perform the gas module check.
4-28
Gas Module, Bottom of gas module.

Figure 2
E E
Analyzer This procedure is used for replacing the Analyzer Control PCB, 902-450.
Control PCB,
For replacing the an Analyzer Control PCB, 902-625, see below.
Replacement
(902-450)
Step Action
2. Remove the gas cylinders and the back cover for the gas module (six
screws).
3. Disconnect the cable for the PC Module (lower right corner of the
Analyzer Control PCB)
4. Remove the two screws securing the cover plate for the Analyzer
Control PCB and withdraw the plate.
5. Disconnect all cables connected to the Analyzer Control PCB.
6. Remove the two threaded tie-rods securing the PCB (situated in the
upper right and left corners of the PCB) and withdraw the PCB.
7. Move Basic Key from the original Analyzer Control PCB and put it
into the socket on the new PCB.
Please refer to the PCB layout drawing in section 10.
4-29
Analyzer
Step Action
Control PCB,
Replacement 8. Mount in reverse order.
(902-450)
When mounting the cover plate for the Analyzer Control PCB the
(continued)
long contact springs must slide into the metal box (not visible) and the
short guides must be on the outer surface of the box (visible).
9. Restore the option keys, if any, by re-scanning the bar codes via the
Options service program.
Analyzer This procedure is used for replacing the Analyzer Control PCB, 902-625.
Control PCB,
For replacing the an Analyzer Control PCB, 902-450, see above.
Replacement
(902-625)
Step Action
screws).
4. Remove the two screws securing the PCB (situated in the upper right
and left corners of the PCB) and withdraw the PCB.
When mounting the cover plate for the Analyzer Control PCB the
long contact springs must slide into the metal box (not visible) and the
short guides must be on the outer surface of the box (visible).
4-30
Replacing This procedure is used for replacing the Analyzer Control PCB, 902-450 by the
902-450 by new type 902-625.
902-625
Replacing 902-450 by 902-625 must only be carried out in case a replacement 902-
450 cannot be obtained.
The new type must not be replaced by the earlier one..
Step Action
screws).
3. Disconnect the cable for the PC Module (lower right corner of the
Analyzer Control PCB)
4. Remove the two screws securing the metal cover plate for the
Analyzer Control PCB and withdraw and discard the plate.
6. Remove the two threaded tie-rods securing the PCB (situated in the
upper right and left corners of the PCB) and withdraw the PCB.
7. Remove and discard the isolation foil (located behind the Analyzer
Control PCB).
8. Remove and discard the rear part of the shielding box for the Analyzer
Control PCB (secured by force fit at the upper left and right corners).
9. Remove and discard the ground clip at the bottom of the Gas Module
chassis.
4-31
Replacing
Step Action
902-450 by
902-625 11. Mount the new PCB an connect the cables.
(continued)
Please note that all the original cables must be reused (CAN-bus
cables with ferrite coil and shielded printer cable).
4-32
Basic Unit
in the Basic Unit.
Warning ALWAYS:
Establish an ESD protected area before exposing, removing, and handling of
electronics to prevent damage.
Waste Detector, The following table describes the procedure for replacing the Waste Detector.
Replacement
Step Action
2. Remove the waste bottle.
3. Pull the analyzer forwards until the front part of the analyzer (with
solution bottles and fluidic modules) is accessible from underneath.
All four rear feet must rest securely against the table.
4. Unscrew the screw securing the cover plate for the waste detector.
5. Unscrew the two screws securing the cover plate for the Left Bottle
Illumination PCB (and the PCB itself).
6. Disconnect the plug for the waste detector from the Bottle
Illumination PCB.
7. Remove the clip securing the waste detector and push the detector
forward (towards the missing waste bottle and lead the cable through
the hole.
8. Gently guide the new waste detector and the rear end of the rubber
membrane into the hole. Only the rounded part (solid black on the
figure) of the membrane must be visible from the front.
9. Connect the waste detector to the Bottle Illumination PCB, J10 pins 1
and 2.
4-33
Basic Unit, Continued
Waste Detector,
Step Action
Replacement
(continued) 10. Mount the remaining items.
Ensure that the O-rings are situated correctly at the windows for bottle
detection and illumination (may be viewed from the top through the
windows) - they must touch the windows.
Do not use sharp tools for removing and placing the O-rings as
scratches may jeopardize bottle detection.
11. Switch on the analyzer and perform the waste check.
Left Bottle The following table describes the procedure for replacing the Left Bottle
Illumination, Illumination PCB.
Replacement
Step Action
2. Unscrew the screw securing the cover plate for the waste detector.
3. Unscrew the two screws securing the cover plate for the Left Bottle
4. Disconnect the cable to the Waste Detector.
5. Remove the two plastic lock washers holding the screws, metal
washers, PCB and cover plate together.
6. Disconnect the cable to the Fluidic Module.
7. Mount in reverse order and switch on the analyzer.
8. Check the function of the bottle illumination.
9. Perform the waste check.
4-34
Right Bottle The following table describes the procedure for replacing the Right Bottle
Illumination, Illumination PCB.
Replacement
Step Action
2. Unscrew the two screws securing the cover plate for the Right Bottle
3. Remove the two plastic lock washers holding the screws, metal
washers, PCB and cover plate together.
4. Disconnect the cable to the Fluidic Module.
5. Mount in reverse order and switch on the analyzer.
6. Check the function of the bottle illumination.
Power Supply, The following table describes the procedure for replacing the Power Supply.
Replacement
Step Action
2. Disconnect all connectors (if any) on the back of the PC module
(keyboard, mouse etc)
3. Remove the rear panel covering the power supply (five screws).
4. Remove display frame from the PC Module (two screws at the top and
two screws at the bottom front).
5. Remove the two screws on the top of the PC module. These are
located behind the display mounting plate.
6. Tilt the module forwards and disconnect the printer cable on the rear
of the module and then the power cable at the bottom of the module.
7. Remove the two screws securing the power supply.
4-35
Power Supply,
Step Action
Replacement
(continued) 8. For Basic Units (902-441) below RUN168:
Remove the two screws securing the cover plate for the Analyzer
Control PCB and withdraw the plate.
9. Disconnect the power and fan cables at the Analyzer Control and the
power cable for the printer at the Power Supply.
10. Withdraw the power supply from the analyzer.
11. Remove the grey back panel on the Power Supply including the CE
mark and the CSA/UL approvals (four screws). The panel is to be
mounted on the new Power Supply.
12. Mount a ground strap (888-560 cut to a length of 192 ±2 mm) on the
new power Supply as shown:

Note For Basic Units (902-441) below RUN168:
When mounting the cover plate for the Analyzer Control PCB, the
long contact springs must slide into the metal box behind the PCB
(not visible) and the short guides must be on the outer surface of the
box (visible).
4-36
AutoCheck Module
in the AutoCheck Module. The references in the procedures refer to the figures at
the end of the paragraph.
Warning ALWAYS:
Check after Please refer to Chapter three for the procedures for checking and adjusting the
Disassembly and AutoCheck Module after disassembly and replacement.
Replacement
Two manual adjustment procedures are given.
· Adjustment of the position of the carousel, which is to be carried out upon
disassembly of the module and replacement of any part.
· Mechanical adjustment of the laser position, which is to be carried out on
AutoCheck Modules of R0045 onwards upon disassembly or replacement of the
scanner assembly.
Removal of Follow the procedure below when removing the AutoCheck Module.
AutoCheck
Module Step Action
1. Switch off the analyzer (see page 2 of this chapter)
2. Remove the Inlet Module.
3. Slide the lid of the AutoCheck Module completely off and remove the
carousel.
4. Remove the four screws securing the module.
5. Gently lift up the module until the end of the Power and CAN bus
cable is visible at the rear left of the module - then disconnect the
cable.
4-37
AutoCheck Module, Continued
Replacement of The original fan, 580-175, with distance ring, 3 mm screws, and threaded plate has
Fan been discontinued and is replaced by a new fan, 2.5 mm screws and threaded plate.
Follow the procedure below when replacing the original type fan with the new
type, 905-780.
Step Action
1. Remove the AutoCheck Module from the analyzer.
2. Remove the four 3 mm screws securing the fan (on the rear of the
module).
3. Disconnect the cable at the AutoCheck Module PCB and slide the fan
with ring and threaded plate out.
The figure below shows the original design.
Discard the original fan, screws, distance ring, and threaded plate.
4. Assemble the module using the new parts (please note that the new
screws do not fit 100% in the original AutoCheck chassis)..
Please note that the wing on the threaded plate is to be situated
vertically in the middle of the module (see above).
Replacement of Follow this procedure when removing the house tilt motor with gearbox.
House Tilt
Motor/Gearbox Step Action
2. Remove the screw at the lower front edge of the module chassis
securing the laser (refer to picture 1 in the back of this paragraph).
3. Disconnect all cables from the AutoCheck Module PCB.
4. Remove the three screws securing the AutoCheck Module PCB with
aluminum plate and carefully pull the PCB.
5. Remove the four screws securing the metal chassis to the plastic top.
6. Loosen the ground screw at the upper front edge.
4-38
Replacement of
Step Action
House Tilt
Motor/Gearbox 7. Detach the cable for the house up detector board from the cable
(continued) holder.
8. Move the carousel house to the up position.
9. Carefully move apart the two halves of the module.
10. Remove the four screws securing the angle with the house tilt and lid
slide motors and withdraw the assembly.
11. Remove the two screws securing the house tilt motor to the angle and
remove the Tyrap securing the wires to the bracket for the lid slide
motor.
12. Reassembly is done in reverse order.
Ensure that the clutch of the Carousel Tilt Gearbox engages into
grooves on the axle. Remember to mount the brass bushing (shown on
the right-most photo) before putting the parts together (as shown on
the left-most photo).
Secure the wires to the bracket of the lid slide motor using a Tyrap.
The wires for the lid slide and house tilt motors and the cable for the
house up detector PCB must be routed behind the mirror unit for the
laser.
The cable for the ampoule opener motor must be slided in between the
laser and the aluminum plate for the AutoCheck Module PCB.
4-39
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when removing the lid slide motor with gearbox.
Lid Slide
Motor/Gearbox Step Action
7. Detach the cable for the house up detector board from the cable holder
and then move the carousel house to the up position.
8. Carefully move the two halves of the module apart.
9. Remove the four screws securing the angle with the carousel tilt and
lid slide motors and withdraw the assembly.
10 Loosen the hex screw securing the brass tooth wheel to the lid slide
motor and remove the tooth wheel.
11. Remove the Tyrap securing the wires for the carousel tilt motor to the
bracket for the Lid Slide motor, remove the two screws securing the
lid slide motor to the angle and disconnect the cable at J20 on the
AutoCheck Module PCB.
4-40
Replacement of
Step Action
Lid Slide
Motor/Gearbox 12. Reassembly is done in reverse order.
(continued)
Ensure that the clutch of the carousel tilt gearbox engages into
grooves on the axle. Remember to mount the brass bushing (shown on
the right-most photo) before putting the parts together (as shown on
the left-most photo).
Secure the wires for the carousel tilt motor to the bracket for the lid
slide motor by means of a Tywrap.
laser.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when removing the carousel spin motor assembly.
Carousel Spin
Motor Assembly Step Action
7. Detach the cable for the house up detector board from the cable
holder.
4-41
Replacement of
Step Action
Carousel Spin
Motor Assembly 9. Carefully move apart the two halves of the module.
(continued)
10. Disconnect the two remaining cables at the carousel interface PCB
(J11 and J12).
11. Through the two holes in the carousel housing unscrew the two screws
securing the carousel spin motor assembly (please note that the black
top part, situated just below the carousel when in place, may now be
loose).
On this photo the protective

plastic foil for the PCB has
been removed.
12. Push and pull the motor assembly upwards.

laser.
4-42
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when removing the carousel spin and temperature
Carousel Spin detector.
and Temp.
Detector PCB Step Action
1. Remove carousel spin motor assembly
2. Separate the two halves of the black spin motor housing (they may be
held together by a force fit).
3. Slide the cable through the hole in the part attached to the motor.
4. Remove the two screws securing the carousel spin and temperature
detector PCB and withdraw the PCB.
5 Reassembly is done in reverse order.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when removing the house up detector PCB.
House Up
holder.
9. Carefully move the two halves of the module apart.
4-43
Replacement of
Step Action
House Up
Detector PCB 10. Remove the screw securing the house up position detector PCB and
(continued) slide the PCB out.

laser.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when removing the ampoule opener motor.
Ampoule
Opener Motor Step Action
aluminum plate and carefully pull the PCB (the cable for the ampoule
openener motor is slided out).
5. Remove the C-clip and the pawl securing the motor shaft to the
ampoule opener mechanism.
C-clip, Clutch
pawl
4-44
Replacement of
Step Action
Ampoule
Opener Motor 6. Remove the two screws securing the ampoule opener motor through
(continued) the holes at the lower rear edge of the module, pull the motor and
remove the brass clutch.

580-066 (<R128) To mount the brass clutch onto the new motor,
screw it completely to the end stop, and then loosen maximum ½ turn.
580-075 (≥R128) The motor includes the clutch.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when removing the house down detector PCB.
House Down
holder.
4-45
Replacement of
Step Action
House Down
Detector PCB 9. Carefully move the two halves of the module apart; disconnect the
(continued) widest flat cable at J10 on the carousel PCB when visible.
10. Disconnect the two cables attached to the house down detector PCB.
11. Remove the two screws securing the house down detector PCB
(accessible via the hole at the bottom of the module).

laser.
Replacement of Follow the procedure below when removing the laser scanner.
the Laser
Scanner Step Action
5. Remove three screws securing the laser scanner assembly to the
aluminum plate. (Two screws and a nut on modules of R0045
onwards).
4-46
Replacement of
Step Action
the Laser
Scanner 6. Remove the three screws on the rear securing the laser scanner to the
(continued) black plastic panel with window plate.

For AutoCheck Modules of R0045 onwards tighten the adjustment nut
until the scanner is parallel to the aluminum plate for the AutoCheck
Module PCB.
Adding Laser Follow the procedure below for upgrading AutoCheck Modules below R0045 to
Adjustment to include the possibility to adjust the direction of the laser beam.
Modules <R45
Step Action
1. Carry out the procedure “Replacement of the laser scanner”, steps 1
through 6.
2. Remove the two screws securing the window plate to the black plastic
panel and discard the plastic panel.
3. Mount the window plate on the new black plastic panel, 816-342.
4. Mount the laser on the new black plastic panel.
5. Apply Lock Tite to the rounded end of the threaded pin, 012-814.
Using a hex key screw the pin into the bushing and tighten firmly.
4-47
Adding Laser
Step Action
Adjustment to
Modules <R45 6. Mount the spring, 876-885, at the threaded pin.
(continued)
7. Holding the laser scanner horizontal, mount the adjustment nut,

tighten to fix at approximately horizontal position (see step 8).
8. Mount the two original screws now with spring washers, 046-901,
tighten at a torque of 0.5 Nm.

The screw referred to in Picture 1 is not to be mounted.
Picture The following picture is referred to in various procedures:
Picture # Function
1 Screw on the front lower edge of the module chassis securing the
laser (AutoCheck Modules, 902-443, below R0045 only):
4-48
PC Module
Introduction This section describes the dismantling and replacement procedures for the parts in
the PC module.
Illustration This illustration shows the location of screws.
Removal of the Follow this procedure for removing the complete PC module.
PC module
Step Action
2. Remove the Printer Unit (4 screws and two cables).
3. Remove the front cover over the LCD display (4 screws).
4. Disconnect the connectors, if any, on the back of the PC module
(barcode reader, keyboard, etc.).
5. Remove the two screws on the top of the PC module. These are
located behind the display mounting plate (marked “C”)
6. Tilt the module forwards and remove the power cable and the serial
cable at the bottom of the module.
7. Remove the two clamps over the turning axle for the module.
8. Pull away the complete PC module.
9. To get access to connectors and internal parts, remove the ten torx
screws and pull out the unit backwards.
4-49
PC Module, Continued
Replacement of The following describes the procedure for replacing the Display, the Touch panel
Touch panel, and the backlight. The Touch panel can be replaced without removing the entire
Display and PC module.
Backlight
Step Action
2. Remove the front cover over the LCD display 4 (screws)
3. Remove the screws holding the Touch panel (marked “A”).
Disconnect the flat cable and remove the panel. Mounting is done in
the reverse order.
4. In case the Touch screen has been replaced, a cursor adjustment must
be performed. See chapter 3.
5. Remove and dismantle the PC module as described above.
6. Disconnect the two backlight connectors on the Inverter PCB.
7. Remove the screws holding the Display (Marked “B”) and disconnect
the flat cable.
8. Remove the two screws on the white backlight holder for replacement
of the backlight lamps.
9. Mounting is done in the reverse order
Replacement of The following describes the procedure for replacing the Disk Drives.
Disk Drives
Step Action
3. Disconnect the Display cable on the Main PCB. Disconnect the Touch
panel and the Inverter cables on the Power distribution PCB. Separate
the two parts.
4. Remove the four screws securing the hard disk with mounting bracket
to the intermediate plate (3½” hard disk); disconnect the flat cable and
power cable, and then remove the hard disk.
The intermediate plate must be removed to obtain access to the screws
securing the floppy and CD-ROM drives.
Please note that when removing the four screws securing the
intermediate plate, the floppy drive is loose.
5. Remove the four screws from the bottom of the CD drive and
disconnect the flat cable to remove the drive. Pull out the drive
backwards.
4-50
Replacement of
Step Action
Disk Drives
(continued) 6. Having removed the intermediate plate above, disconnect the flat
cable and the power cable, and then pull out the drive forwards.
New spare parts floppy drives are delivered with a new flat cable and
power cable (both longer) because the connectors on the floppy drive
have switched places.
In addition, a new intermediate plate for the hard disk is included. The
new plate is to be used in 901-441 from R0168 onwards to move the
hard disk a few millimetres forwards (to make space for the new
cables).
7. Mounting is done in the reverse order. When mounting the Display
cable on the Main PCB, check the orientation. The connector has a
marked “pin 1”.
8. In case the hard disk has been replaced make a complete software
installation (see "Software Installation" in chapter 3).
Replacement of The following describes the procedure for replacing the Main CPU PCB.
the Main CPU
PCB Step Action
the two parts.
4. Remove the Floppy as described above.
5. Remove the four corner screws on the Main PCB. Loosen the one
located next to the Connector board (if mounted).
6. Disconnect all cables and pull out the PCB towards the Printer
connector.
7. Transfer the Cache RAM module (PCM-5890 only), the RAM
module(s), and the fan assembly to the new board.
9. Perform a BIOS setup.
4-51
Replacing Main The following describes the procedure for replacing the earlier PCM-5890 Main
CPU PCB CPU PCB by the newer type PCM-5896.
PCM-5890 by
NOTE
PCM-5896
This procedure should only be carried out in case a PCM-5890 cannot be obtained.
A number of additional parts are needed to replace PCM-5890 by PCM-5896.
A complete Main Board Upgrade Kit, 905-779, includes the following parts:
902-643 Main CPU PCB, PCM-5896
365-434 64 Mb SDRAM module (DIMM)
580-178 Fan
636-429 Cable Kit
902-644 Power Distribution PCB (including a relay)
In addition, a new version of Windows 95 (Release 8) must be installed.
Proceed as follows:
Step Action
1. Remove the original PCM-5890 Main CPU PCB as described under
“Replacement of the Main CPU PCB” above.
2. Remove the existing cables connected to the PCM-5890 Main CPU
PCB (to be substituted by the cables supplied in the new cable kit).
3. Remove the existing Power Distribution PCB as described below and
mount instead the new type.
4. Install the new SDRAM module into the new Main CPU PCB.
5. Connect the cables from the new cable kit to the Connector PCB.
6. Ensure that the cables to the floppy drive (power) and Power
Distribution PCB are in fact connected to the Connector PCB before
sliding the new Main CPU PCB into position.
7. The new Centronics cable for the internal printer is to be routed as
shown on the figure in step 9 and secured by the two cable holders
supplied with the new cable kit.
8. The new Display cable must be routed as shown on the figure in step 9
and secured onto the top of the CD-ROM drive using the cable holder
supplied with the new cable kit.
4-52
Replacing Main
Step Action
CPU PCB
PCM-5890 by 9. Routing and securing of cables.
PCM-5896
(continued)
Replacements The following describes the procedure for replacing parts on the Main PCB
on the Main
PCB Step Action
the two parts.
4. The Cache RAM module (PCM-5890 only) and RAM module(s) is
now accessible.
5. Main CPU PCB PCM-5896
To remove the CPU Fan, remove the screws on the Fan. When
mounting the new Fan, the flow must be towards the CPU.
Main CPU PCB PCM-5890
See separate paragraph below.
4-53
Replacements of The following describes the procedure for replacing the Connector and Power
the Connector distribution PCBs.
and Power
Distribution Step Action
PCBs
panel and the Inverter cables on the Power distribution PCB.
4. Remove the two screws holding the Power Distribution PCB.
5. Disconnect all cables and remove the PCB.
6. In case the PCB does not slide out easily, loosen the CD drive.
7. Remove the two screws holding the Connector PCB.
8. Remove the four hex nuts on the COM connectors.
9. Disconnect all cables and remove the PCB.
Replacing the This paragraph describes the procedure for replacing a 2.5" hard disk drive by a
2.5" Hard Disk 3.5" type.
by the 3.5" Type
Step Action
1. Remove the PC Module from the analyzer as described above.
2. Remove the existing hard disk as described above.
3. Remove and discard the existing flat cable (IDE) connecting the hard
disk and CD-ROM drives to the Main CPU PCB.
4. For Basic Units, 902-441, below Run 168 including the PCM-5890
Main CPU PCB:
Remove and discard the Power cable connected between CN15 on
the Main CPU PCB and Power1 on the Power Distribution PCB.
For Basic Units of Run 168 onwards including the PCM-5896 Main
CPU PCB:
No action.
5. The original hard disk was secured to two angles on the chassis.
Locate the centre-most angle. Using a pair of pliers, bend the angle
back and forth until it breaks off.
See drawing in step 7.
4-54
Replacing the
Step Action
2.5" Hard Disk
by the 3.5" Type 6. Hold on to the floppy drive while removing the four screws securing
(continued) the floppy drive.
7. Install the intermediate plate, which includes four threaded stand-offs,
as shown below (secures the floppy drive again).
Angle to be
Intermediate removed in
plate step 5
Bottom view of PC Module.

8. Install the 3.5" hard disk (with U-shaped panel) using the four screws
supplied with the kit.
The hard disk can only fit into the PC with the IDE connector pointing
to the right (ref.: drawing in step 7).
9. Connect the new IDE flat cable to the CD-ROM drive (middle
connector) and the Main CPU PCB (CN13 on PCM-5890 and CN5 on
PCM-5896).
Unfold if Main CPU

PCM-5896 PCB
CD-ROM
Drive
Hard Disk
Adapter
4-55
Replacing the
Step Action
2.5" Hard Disk
by the 3.5" Type 10. Wrap the O-ring around the IDE cable at the hard disk adapter end.
(continued)
O-ring
11. Connect the new flat cable to the hard disk drive.
Secure the IDE cable to the hard disk Adapter PCB with the O-ring
(move the O-ring so it sits over the IDE cable connector and the Hard
Disk Adapter PCB).
Cable
holder
O-ring
12. Fit the cable holder on the IDE cable and attach it to the bottom plate
as shown above.
11. Connect the new power cable as follows:
CN15 on Main CPU PCB
if PCM-5890
NC if PCM-5896
Power1 on
Hard disk Power
power Distribution
input PCB
4-56
Replacing the
Step Action
2.5" Hard Disk
by the 3.5" Type 12. Complete the assembly of the PC Module and then re-install the PC
(continued) into the analyzer.
13. Make a complete software installation (see "Software Installation" in
chapter 3).
Replacement of The original fan is no longer available and has been replaced by a new type, which
Fan on Main is mounted in a different way as detailed below.
CPU PCB
PCM-5890 Step Action
1. Switch off the analyser (see page 2 of this chapter).
2. Remove and dismantle the PC as described above.
3. Remove the existing fan by bending the securing device outwards (on
rear and front of the CPU) as shown.
Tool
Fan
Cooler Securing
device
CPU
4. Remove the heat sink compound on the surface of the CPU.

5. Dismantle the new fan with cooler.
4-57
Replacement of
Step Action
Fan on Main
CPU PCB 6. Slide the frame with the four threaded stand-offs pointing upwards
PCM-5890 onto the CPU (in the direction rear to front).
(continued)
7. Slide the cooler (with smooth surface towards the CPU) and the fan
onto the stand-offs.
8. Secure the fan and cooler using the four washers and threaded
bushings. To ensure an optimal cooling of the CPU, make sure that
the four threaded bushings are tightened evenly.
9. Connect the fan to the Main CPU PCB and check the connection of all
cables.
10. Assemble the PC Module and install it into the analyser.
4-58
Parts List Update
Purpose The purpose of this paragraph is to outline a procedure for updating the Parts List
service program.
Parts List The Parts List must be updated when exchanging any of the parts, which are
Update, When? recognized by the Parts List service program.
The update of the Parts List must be carried out before producing a service disk
upon completion of the service visit.
A complete list of the parts, which are recognized, is found in the paragraph
describing the Parts List service program.
Note Please note that the analyzer will automatically update the parts list with the part
and serial numbers for complete modules following an installation or an upgrade.
Procedure The following describes the procedures for updating the Parts List. The update
may be carried out by either scanning the bar code on the new part (or packing
material) or by keying the same information via the on-screen or an external
keyboard.
Bar code scanning
Step Action
1. Enter the Parts List service program.
2. Scan the bar code on the new part itself or on its packing material.
3. Check that the screen is updated and then exit from the service
programs.
Entering via keyboard
Step Action
1. Enter the Parts List service program.
2. Key in the part number and serial number for the new part.
Example:
The new part is 902-454R0025N0002, Inlet Module PCB.
Then key in: “90245400250002” and press ENTER.
3. Check that the screen is updated and then exit from the service
programs.
4-59
Parts List Update, Continued
Note The analyzer automatically updates the parts list for PCBs/modules including a
CPU, e.g. the pH/BG Module. The serial number for the module as a whole and for
the module PCB is stored in the module PCB.
However, if the module PCB is exchanged, the following must be considered:
Exchange Consideration and Additional Action

The existing module PCBs from the factory only includes the serial number
PCB is exchanged by for the PCB, not for the module (as this is not known
a new PCB directly until the PCB is actually installed into a specific
from the factory module).
Thus the serial number of the module must be entered
manually
The existing module Apart from the serial number of the module PCB itself,
PCB is exchanged by the module PCB also includes the serial number of the
one from another module into which it was originally installed.
analyzer.
Thus the serial number of the module it is now installed
into must be entered manually
4-60
ABL700 Series Service Manual 5. Installation, Configuration, and Test Procedures
5. Installation, Configuration, and Test Procedures
Overview
Introduction The procedures in this section explain how to upgrade or downgrade an existing
analyzer to include more or less active modules, that is to replace blind modules by
e.g. measuring modules or vice versa.
medical advice.

Module Upgrade and Downgrade Procedures ................................................. 5-3
Configuration, Test, and Documentation Procedures ...................................... 5-12
Important Always establish an ESD protected area before removing a module from the
analyzer or exposing electronics to prevent damage of the electronics.
Some flat cable connectors are equipped with a locking device. Always press on
the side before pulling the connector to avoid damage.
When installing or re-installing a module, always:
· Ensure that no pins of the flat cable socket are slightly bent
· Insert the plug of the flat cable straight into the socket
· Ensure that flat cables are not pinched or damaged when inserting the module
into the analyzer
Flex PCBs are locked to the connector. Always unlock before pulling the flex PCB
from the connector to avoid damage. Always lock upon assembly to ensure
permanent contact.
While performing calibrations and measurements, the analyzer must be fully
assembled. This includes the black cover for the OXI Module (to avoid
5-1
5. Installation, Configuration, and Test Procedures ABL700 Series Service Manual
Overview, Continued
Important When installing a complete module (in case of an upgrade of the analyzer or a
(continued) temporary fix of a problem) and when exchanging any of the parts which are
recognized by the Parts List service program. The part number and serial number
for the new part must be entered into the Parts List service program (by scanning
its bar code or by using an external keyboard). Please refer to the paragraph
describing the program for information about which parts are recognized.
Always perform either the Service Test or the Module Installation Test upon
completion of any type of service (e.g. installation, upgrade, or replacement) and
document the results if required. To determine which of the two tests to perform
after the servicing, please refer to the description of the tests in Chapter 5.
Switching the In order to switch off both the DMS PC and the analyzing unit properly, follow the
Analyzer off procedure below.
Step Action
1. In the Service Setup program, set “Ignore removal of cover” to “Yes”.
2. Touch “Status/Control”, “Utilities”, “Power Down”, and then
“Confirm power down”.
This will initiate a proper shut down of the PC (the analyzing unit will
not be affected).
3. Open the front cover (clear plastic which gives access to electrodes).
This will initiate a draining of the wet section.
4. Wait for the PC to shut down and the wet section to complete the
draining.
5. Switch the analyzer off and disconnect from the mains.
5-2
Module Upgrade and Downgrade Procedures
Overview
Introduction The procedures in this section explain how to install and remove modules in an
analyzer.

Module Upgrade .............................................................................................. 5-4
Module Downgrade.......................................................................................... 5-9
Modular Design The analyzer is built-up by modules each providing different functionality. All the
and Flexibility basic functions required for all configurations are included in the Basic Unit.
The optional functionality such as measuring modules and AutoCheck module is
available separately. The various possibilities are given below.
AutoCheck The following modules may be installed in the AutoCheck Compartment, which is
Compartment the area in front of the Inlet Module.
Location Available Modules

AutoCheck 902-443 AutoCheck Module and 886-480 divided front cover
Compartment OR
886-436, Blind Panel and 886-483 front cover
Measuring The following modules may be installed in the Measuring Compartment which is
Compartment the area to the right of the Inlet Module.
Location Available Modules

902-438, pH/BG Module
1 (present in all possible configurations of the analyzer)
902-439, El/Met Module OR 902-532, Blind Module
2
902-532, Blind Module
3 (present in all possible configurations of the analyzer)
902-434, OXI Module OR 902-547, Blind Module
4
5-3
Module Upgrade
Purpose The purpose of this paragraph is to outline procedures for performing a hardware
upgrade, that is, replace a blind module/panel with a measuring module or the
AutoCheck module.
Equipment To carry out the procedures the following equipment may be required depending
Required on which action is to be performed:
Pair of tubing tweezers
Pozidrive screwdrivers
Allen Keys
All accessories, that is, electrodes, membrane kits, solution bottles, gasses, and
QUALICHECKTM / AUTOCHECKTM.
Option keys, if required.
Note In case the analyzer is upgraded temporarily, that is, the module is to be removed
after e.g. a demonstration period; the module must be enabled by the built-in four-
month demonstration facility (new analyzers) or by entering a demo extension key.
This is to enable the downgrade.
In case the analyzer is upgraded permanently, the module must be enabled by
entering the corresponding option key.
5-4
AutoCheck Follow the procedure below for upgrading an analyzer to include the AutoCheck
Module Module.
Step Action
2. Remove the blind panel covering the AutoCheck Compartment, four
screws.
3. Unpack the AutoCheck Module. Ensure that the ground strap at the
bottom of the module is in place.
4. Remove the transport safety device from the tilt mechanism.
5. In the AutoCheck Compartment bend the two flat cables for the Bottle
Illumination PCBs as shown.
It is important that the bend is as close to the front edge of the

analyzer as possible and that the flat cables lie against the bottom.
6. Fold out the cable holder (circled in item 4) on the left-hand wall of
the compartment and make it flush with the wall.
7. Move the AutoCheck flat cable (CAN bus) to the right edge of the
compartment and hold it here. The cable either lies loose at the bottom
(earlier analyzers) or is secured to the left wall of the compartment
(newer analyzers).
5-5
AutoCheck
Step Action
Module
(continued) 8. While holding on to the AutoCheck flat cable (CAN bus) install the
foam pad at the rear wall of the AutoCheck Compartment
9. Disconnect the two tubes attached underneath the inlet washer and
remove the Inlet Module (refer to page 4-18).
10. Connect the AutoCheck flat cable (CAN bus) to the module.
11. Slide the module into place.
Ensure that the tubing passing underneath the upper right corner of the
module is not squeezed.
12. Mount and tighten the four screws supplied with the module.
13. Reinstall the Inlet Module and reconnect the tubes.
Ensure that the Rinse solution tube is not caught underneath the right
edge of the Inlet Module.
14. Mount the divided front covers, 886-480, instead of the long front
cover.
15. Proceed to “Module Installation Test”.
5-6
El/Met Module Follow the procedure below for upgrading an analyzer to include the El/Met
Module.
Step Action
2. Remove Blind Module in measuring compartment position 2.
· Remove the screws securing the modules in the measuring
compartment, positions 2, 3, and 4 and push the modules at
positions 3 and 4 to the right.
· Disconnect tube #3 (in tube diagram B) at the pH/BG Module.
· Disconnect tube #4 (in tube diagram B) at the Blind Module in
measuring compartment position 2.
Lift the Blind Module and disconnect the CAN bus cable.
3. Unpack the El/Met Module.
4. Connect the El/Met flat cable (CAN bus) to the module.
· Ensure that the ground strap at the bottom of the Basic Unit is not
pushed down by the module PCB; it must rest against the lower
front edge of the PCB.
· Ensure that the ferrite core on the CAN bus cable is not caught in a
narrow place as this may damage the PCB when tightening the
screws.
6. Mount the two screws (011-013), push the module to the left and then
tighten the screws (check that the modules align nicely).
7. Remove the rubber stopper (#11 in tube diagram B) at the rinse out
nipple on the left membrane valve on the pH/BG Module.
8. Connect the rinse solution tube (tube #26 in tube diagram A) to the
rinse out nipple on the leftmost membrane valve on the pH/BG
Module.
9. Connect the intermediate tube (tube #3 in tube diagram A) to the
pH/BG Module.
10. Align the two remaining modules and tighten the screws.
11. Referring to “Option Keys, Parameter Configuration, Analyzer Type”,
install the required option key, select which parameters to be used,
and change the analyzer type.
5-7
OXI Module Follow the procedure below for upgrading an analyzer to include the OXI Module.
Step Action
2. Remove the OXI Blind Module.
· Remove the screw securing the black cover plate on the OXI blind
module.
· Remove the two screws securing the OXI blind module.
· Remove the two screws securing the clear plastic cover plate
securing the connection pipe on the blind module at position 3 of
the measuring compartment.
· Disconnect the valve tube at the connection pipe.
· Disconnect the pump tube from the Fluidic Module at the nipple at
the OXI blind module.
Pull the blind module and disconnect the CAN bus.
3. Unpack the OXI Module.
4. Connect the OXI flat cable (CAN bus) to the module.
· Ensure that the ground strap at the bottom of the Basic Unit is not
pushed down by the module PCB; it must rest against the lower
front edge of the PCB.
· Ensure that the ferrite core on the CAN bus cable is not caught in a
narrow place as this may damage the PCB when tightening the
screws.
· Ensure that the pump tube from the Fluidic Module is not caught
underneath the front edge of the module plate.
7. Connect the valve tube (tube #5 on tube diagram A) to the blind
module to the left.
8. Connect the pump tube from the Fluidic Module and secure it with a
clamp (924-098).
install the required option key and change the analyzer type.
5-8
Module Downgrade
Purpose The purpose of this paragraph is to outline procedures for performing a hardware
downgrade, that is, replace a measuring module or the AutoCheck module with a
blind module/panel.
Equipment To carry out the procedures, the following equipment may be required depending
Required on which action is to be performed:
Pair of tubing tweezers
Pozidrive screw drivers
Allen Keys
All accessories, that is, electrodes, membrane kits, solution bottles, gasses, and
QUALICHECKTM.
Note It is in principle not possible to downgrade an analyzer, that is remove a hardware

module and replace it by a blind panel/module, in case an option key has been
installed (scanned into the analyzer) to enable the module.
It is only possible to downgrade the analyzer in case the use of the module to be
removed is enabled by the built-in 4-month demonstration facility or a demo
extention key.
AutoCheck Follow the procedure below for downgrading an analyzer, that is, exchange the
Module AutoCheck Module with the blind panel.
Step Action
1. Referring to “Replacement Procedures” remove the Inlet Module.
2. Referring to “Replacement Procedures” remove the AutoCheck
Module
3. Reinstall the Inlet Module and reconnect the tubes.
Ensure that the Rinse solution tube is not caught underneath the right
edge of the Inlet Module.
4. Mount the AutoCheck blind panel using the screws supplied with the
panel.
5. Mount the long front cover, 886-483, instead of the divided front
covers.
change the analyzer type.
7. Proceed to “Service Test”.
5-9
Module Downgrade, Continued
El/Met Module Follow the procedure below for downgrading an analyzer, that is, exchange the
El/Met Module with the Blind Module.
Step Action
1. Referring to “Replacement Procedures” remove the El/Met Module.
2. Disconnect the rinse solution tube at the left membrane valve on the
pH/BG Module.
3. Unpack the Blind Module.
4. Connect the El/Met flat cable (CAN bus) to the module.
5. Slide the module into place in between the pH/BG and Blind
Modules.
Ensure that the tube from the other blind module to the right is not
caught underneath the right edge of the new blind module panel.
7. Connect the rubber stopper (#11 on tube drawing B) at the rinse out
nipple on the leftmost membrane valve on the pH/BG module.
8. Connect the intermediate tube (tube #3 in tube diagram B) to the
pH/BG Module.
9. Connect the intermediate tube (tube #4 in tube diagram B) to the new
Blind Module.
10. Align the two remaining modules and tighten the screws.
5-10
Module Downgrade, Continued
OXI Module Follow the procedure below for downgrading an analyzer, that is, exchange the
OXI Module with the Blind Module.
Step Action
1. Referring to “Replacement Procedures” remove the OXI Module.
2. Unpack the Blind Module.
3. Connect the OXI flat cable (CAN bus) to the module.
Ensure that the pump tube from the Fluidic Module is not caught
underneath the front edge of the module plate.
6. Connect the intermediate tube (tube #28 on tube diagram B) to the
blind module to the left.
7. Connect the pump tube from the Fluidic Module.
5-11
Configuration, Test, and Documentation Procedures
Overview
Introduction The procedures in this section explain how to check a new analyzer after
installation of the various measuring modules. In addition, they explain how to test
an analyzer following a hardware upgrade or downgrade and following service
actions. Furthermore this section explains how to document the test results.

Option Keys, Parameter Configuration, Analyzer Type .................................. 5-13
Module Installation Test .................................................................................. 5-16
Service Test...................................................................................................... 5-21
Service Disk ..................................................................................................... 5-24
5-12
Option Keys, Parameter Configuration, Analyzer Type
Purpose The purpose of this paragraph is to outline a procedure for installing Option Keys,
configure the analyzer, and to change the analyzer type.
Equipment Apart from the Option Key(s), which is a piece of paper with five bar codes, no
required additional equipment is required.
Option Keys Please note that Option Keys must only be installed in case the option is to stay in
versus the analyzer permanently.
Demo Keys
In case an option is required temporarily, e.g. for demonstration purposes, it must
be enabled by using the built-in four months demonstration facility (for new
analyzers) or by installing a Demo Extention Key.
Once an Option Key has been installed it cannot be removed again.
Option Key The following describes the procedure for installing option keys.
Installation
Step Action
1. Enter the Options service program and touch “New option”.
2. Touch "Read from disk" (option key received via e-mail and loaded
onto a disk), or
Scan the five bar codes (option key received as a piece of paper
including bar codes).
3. Touch Back to return to the Options main screen and then proceed to
“Configuration of Options” below.
After having read or scanned the option keys it may take up to 15 minutes for the
analyzer to decrypt the information. During the decryption “Options being
installed” is shown in system status (service level). Once the decryption has
completed the option keys are listed in the Options service program.
Configuration of The following describes the procedure for enabling available options .
Options
Step Action
1. Place the cursor on the option to be enabled or disabled.
2. Touch “±” (On/Off) to toggle the setting.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until desired option selection has been
accomplished.
Then proceed to “Configuration of Parameters” below.
5-13
Option Keys, Parameter Configuration, Analyzer Type,

Continued
Configuration of The following describes the procedure for selecting which electrolyte parameters
Electrolyte should be enabled.
Parameters
Step Action
1. Place the cursor on the parameter to be enabled or disabled.
2. Touch “±” to toggle the setting.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the desired parameter selection has been
acomplished.
4. Proceed to “Analyzer Type” below.
NOTE In case the number of enabled electrolyte parameters exceeds the
number of parameters available (installed option keys), the analyzer
will indicate “Parameter not installed” and “……” instead of
measured values for all electrolyte parameters.
Analyzer Type The following describes the procedure for changing the analyzer type according to
the configuration performed above.
Conditions for using this procedure:
Perform When:
procedure?
YES · Upgrading the hardware, that is, replacing Blind modules by
El/Met or OXI modules. Installing these modules causes
“XXXX module not expected” in System Messages.
· Downgrading the hardware, that is, replacing El/Met or OXI
modules by Blind modules. Removal of these modules causes
“XXXX module not active” in System Messages.
· Glu, Lac, or OXI options have expired (demo) and the options
should be removed permanently from the list of available
options.
NO · Installing/enabling an Electrolyte option.
· Changing enabled electrolyte parameters in Select Electrolyte
Profile. The parameter will be available instantly.
· Installing/enabling the Glu or Lac options. The parameter will
be available instantly.
· Installing/enabling an OXI option. The parameters will be
available instantly and the analyzer type changes automatically.
5-14
Option Keys, Parameter Configuration, Analyzer Type,

Continued
Analyzer Type Procedure:

(continued)
Step Action
1. Touch “Update Type”.
This causes the analyzing unit to restart.
During this period there is no communication between the DMS PC
and the analyzing unit for which reason “DMS not connected to AU”
is shown in system messages and it is not possible to initiate any
actions related to the analyzing unit.
2. Check that the correct analyzer type (ABL7XX) is indicated when the
restart has completed.
3. Touch Setup, General Setup, and Parameter Setup and verify that the
available parameters are as expected.
4. In case a new hardware module has been installed, proceed to
“Module Installation Test”.
5-15
Module Installation Test
Purpose The purpose of the Module Installation Test is to check that upgraded or
downgraded analyzer can perform a reproducible liquid transport in all syringe and
capillary modes.
Indirectly, the test will verify the most functions in the analyzer.
Module The Module Installation Test is to be performed upon the completion of:
Installation
Test, When? Action Detailed Action
Upgrade/Downgrade Upon upgrade of an analyzer where a blind module or
blind panel is replaced by a measuring module or the
AutoCheck Module.
Upon downgrade of an analyzer where a measuring
module or the AutoCheck Module is replaced by a blind
module or blind panel.
The analyzer must not be taken into use until the Module Installation Test has been
performed with acceptable results.
Documentation The results of the Module Installation Test may be documented for local use either
on disk or paper.
For software versions below 3.60 the reproducibility tests are carried as outlined
below, including filling in the Module Installation Report and manual calculations
and evaluations.
However, from software version 3.60 onwards the reproducibility tests may be
carried out as part of the service test. The analyzer will then store the measured
results as well as the evaluation of the results (mean and standard deviation) on the
service disk. In addition the analyzer may print a report including these data.
Equipment The following materials are required to perform the test:

Required
QUALICHECK 5+ or AUTOCHECK 5+:
6 ampoules of S7730 or S7735
6 ampoules of S7740 or S7745
1 ampoule of S7750 or S7755
1 ampoule of S7760 or S7765
1 ampoule of tHb calibrator S7770
External keyboard
1 floppy disk
5-16
Module Installation Test, Continued
Starting the Follow the procedure below to start the analyzer:

Analyzer
Step Action
1. Mount all electrodes with membranes as described in the Operator’s
Manual (Chapter 9).
Fill in Lot numbers in the Module Installation Test Report.
2. Mount solutions and gas containers as described in the Operator’s
Manual (Chapter 9).
3. Restart the analyzer.
4. Enter QC barcodes from the inserts.
Initial Test and When the analyzer has been on for half an hour, a control of the installation of the
Calibration modules and accessories is to be performed:
Step Action
1. Referring to Chapter 3, perform a zero point calibration for the pO2,
glucose and lactate channels.
2. Referring to Chapter 3, perform a Complete Check of the OXI
Module.
3. Perform a 2-point calibration.
4. Referring to Chapter 3, perform a Service tHb calibration.
Fill in the lot number and the measured values on the Module
Installation Test Report.
5. Referring to Chapter 3, perform the AutoCheck Module Check.
5-17
Service Test Referring to the paragraph “Service Test” in this Chapter, perform the Service
Test. In short the Service Test involves the following steps:
Step Action
1. Make two 2-point calibrations.
2. Make a tHb calibration (user) - only when the OXI Module is
installed.
3. Perform one QC measurement on all 4 levels.
4. Store the result of the test on a Service Disk.
For software version 3.60 onwards, the reproducibility tests should be
carried out prior to storing the data.
Reproducibility The first reproducibility test (syringe inlet) is a specific test of the following:
Test No. 1,
· The syringe inlet
What is Tested?
· Liquid transport in pH/BG module, pump and valves included.
· Liquid transport in El/Met module, if present, pump and valves included.
· Liquid transport in OXI module, if present, pump and valves included.
· Rinse performance in all modules.
· Conditioning of the gas electrodes.
· Membrane junction and fluid path between modules.
Reproducibility Perform the test as outlined below. Please note that steps 4 through 6 are carried
Test No. 1, out automatically for software versions 3.60 onwards.
Procedure
Step Action
1. Make sure that the analyzer is ready without any “?” on the 2-point
calibration.
2. In the Miscellaneous Setup check the “Extra K+/Na+ Decimals”.
3. Measure 5 different QC S7730 (or S7735) ampoules of the same lot
number.
The measurements are done either by means of the AutoCheck
Module or as normal QC measurements in the QC mode with an
adapter, both procedures are described in the Operator’s Manual.
The analyzer must not perform calibrations in between the 5
measurements.
5-18
Reproducibility
Step Action
Test No. 1,
Procedure 4. Note the values for pCO2, cK+ and ctHb if present in the Module
(continued) Installation Test Report.
5. Calculate the mean value ( X ) and the standard deviation (S0) for each
of the three parameters and note the results in the Module Installation
Test Report.
X1 + X 2 + X 3 + X 4 + X 5
X=
5
( X 1 - X )2 + ( X 2 - X )2 + ( X 3 - X )2 + ( X 4 - X )2 + ( X 5 - X )2
S0 =
4
6. Check that X is within the insert control ranges and that S0 < S0 max.
7. Remove the check mark for “Extra K+/Na+ Decimals”.
Reproducibility The second reproducibility test (capillary inlet) is a specific test of the following
Test No. 2, additional functions:
What is Tested?
· The capillary inlet
· Rinse performance in capillary inlet.
Reproducibility Perform the test as outlined below. Please note that steps 3 through 5 are carried
Test No. 2, out automatically for software versions 3.60 onwards.
Procedure
Step Action
1. Make sure the analyzer is ready without any “?” on the 2-point
calibration.
2. Measure 5 different QC S7740 (or S7745) ampoules of the same lot
number.
Prepare one capillary (195 mL) at the time, by putting the capillary
tube into the ampoule held in an angle of 45° so that the capillary tube
fills due to the capillary effect.
The measurements are done in the normal capillary blood mode.
The analyzer must not perform calibrations in between the 5
measurements.
5-19
Reproducibility
Step Action
Test No. 2,
Procedure 3. Note the values for pO2 and GLU if present in the Module Installation
(continued) Test Report.
4. Calculate the mean value ( X ) and the standard deviation (S0) for each
of the three parameters and note the results in the Module Installation
Test Report.
X1 + X 2 + X 3 + X 4 + X 5
X=
5
( X 1 - X )2 + ( X 2 - X )2 + ( X 3 - X )2 + ( X 4 - X )2 + ( X 5 - X )2
S0 =
4
5. Check that X is within the insert control ranges and that S0 < S0 max.
Software Enter the Software Versions service program and enter the software versions into
Versions the Module Installation Test Report.
5-20
Service Test
Purpose The purpose of this paragraph is to outline a procedure for performing the Service
Test and document the results if required.
The purpose of the Service Test is to verify that the analyzer calibrates correctly
and measures correctly using appropriate quality control solutions.
Service Test, The service test must be performed upon the completion of:
When?
Action Detailed Action
Installation Upon installation for a demonstration if results are to be
reported or evaluated.
Upon final placement of the analyzer.
Upgrade/ Upon installation of a new software version.
Downgrade
Upon installation of option keys (additional parameters
(software and keys
which do not require a new hardware module to be
only)
installed).
Repair Replacement of any part in the analyzing unit (wet section,
gas module, and directly related electronics)
Upon reinstallation of software
Service Test The service test is not necessary upon the completion of a visit where the action
Exceptions performed does not fall into any of the above mentioned categories. Exceptions are
for example:
Action Detailed Action

Repair Replacement of parts outside the analyzing unit (wet
section, gas module, and directly related electronics).
Parts which fall into this category are: PC-Module (except
hard disk), Printer, Power Supply, panels etc. The inlet
handles are also considered to fall into this category.
Replacement Replacement of consumables and accessories which is also
done on a regular basis by the end-user.
5-21
Service Test, Continued
Procedure The following procedure is to be carried out upon completion of a service visit
where a Service Test is required. The procedure ensures that the Service Test is
performed and that the results are stored.
The analyzer must be fully assembled. This includes the black cover for the OXI
Module (to avoid interference from strong ambient light) and the cover over the
wet section (to ensure correct thermostatting).
Step Action
1. In case a Service Test is not required for the service performed, use
the procedure outlined in the paragraph “Service Disk”.
2. Ensure that all consumables and accessories (including
QUALICHECKTM / AUTOCHECKTM) are installed and that their bar
codes are scanned into the analyzer.
3. Call two 2-point calibrations.
4. Perform a tHb calibration. The calibration must be performed in the
normal user mode, that is, not via the service program.
Only upon upgrade to include oximetry parameters, or replacement of
spectrometer or hemolyzer.
5. Perform four quality control measurements (one of each level).
6. Enter the Analyzer Installation service program and check that the
status for items 3, 4, and 5 is “OK”.
If local documentation of results on disk is required then carry out
steps 7 through to 14 (skip step 15).
If local documentation of results on paper is required then skip steps 7
through to 14 and proceed to step 15.
7. Put an empty formatted floppy disk into the disk drive.
Please note that only data from one installation can be stored on a disk
(existing data will be over-written).
8. Touch “Store Info.”.
Result: The analyzer changes to a data entry screen.
9. Check (touch) the relevant “Service Reason”
10. Type your name in the “Service Technician” field.
11. Key in the “Customer Identification” information (only required at the
first service visit or installation).
12. Touch “Store Info” to store the data on the floppy disk.
13. Fill in the label for the disk.
14. Remove the disk from the drive and put the label on the disk.
5-22
Service Test, Continued
Procedure
Step Action
(continued)
15. Touch the Print key.
The report may be signed and handed over to the customer for
documentation.
5-23
Service Disk
Introduction This paragraph explains the procedures for the use of the service disk.
Contents of The service disk contains the following types of data:

Service Disk
Installation No., date of service, calibration and quality control results (service
test), configuration of analyzer, analyzer load, etc.
Please note that patient results are not stored on the service disk.
Service Disk The service disk may be generated for local documentation and storage of the test
Why? results obtained during the Service Test or Module Installation Test.
Procedure The following procedure may be carried out upon completion of service visits.
The analyzer must be fully assembled. This includes the black cover for the OXI
Module (to avoid interference from strong ambient light) and the cover over the
wet section (to ensure correct thermostatting).
Step Action
1. Refer to the paragraph concerning “Service Test” to determine if a
service test is required for the service performed.
If a service test is required, use the procedure outlined in the Service
Test paragraph.
If a service test is not required, proceed with this procedure.
2. Ensure that all consumables and accessories (including
QUALICHECKTM / AUTOCHECKTM) are installed and their bar
codes scanned into the analyzer.
3. Call two 2 point calibrations.
4. Perform four QUALICHECK 5+ or AUTOCHECK 5+ measurements
(one on each level).
If local documentation of results on disk is required then carry out
steps 5 through to 12 (skip step 13).
If local documentation of results on paper is required then skip steps 5
through to 12 and proceed to step 13.
5. Put an empty formatted floppy disk into the disk drive.
Please note that only data from one installation can be stored on a disk
(existing data will be over-written).
6. Enter the Service Menu screen and touch “Store Info.”.
Result: The analyzer changes to a data entry screen.
5-24
Service Disk, Continued
Procedure
Step Action
(continued)
7. Check (touch) the relevant “Service Reason”
8. Type your name in the “Service Technician” field.
9. Key in the “Customer Identification” information (only required at the
first service visit or installation).
10. Touch “Store Info.” To store the data on the floppy disk.
11. Fill in the label for the disk.
12. Remove the disk from the drive and put the label on the disk.
13. Touch the Print key.
The report may be signed and handed over to the customer for
documentation.
5-25
ABL700 Series Service Manual 6. Periodic Service Procedures
6. Periodic Service Procedures
Overview
Introduction This Chapter describes the procedures for the Yearly Service and Disinfection for
the ABL700 series.
medical advice.

Yearly Service Procedure................................................................................. 6-2
Disinfection...................................................................................................... 6-6
6-1
6. Periodic Service Procedures ABL700 Series Service Manual
Yearly Service Procedure
Introduction This paragraph outlines the procedure the preventive yearly service.
Overview The following subjects will be described in this section:

· Disinfection
· Cleaning the inside of the analyzer
· Prepare for replacements
· Replacements
· Check-outs
· Service kit, part no. 905-671
Disinfection Refer to page 6 of this chapter.
Cleaning the The following table describes how to clean the inside of the analyzer.
inside of the
Analyzer Step Action
1. Shut-down the analyzer following the shut-down procedure.
2. Remove the front covers.
3. Remove the rear panel.
4. Clean the inside of the base unit with compressed air and/or a vacuum
cleaner.
5. Replace the Fan filter (924-073) according to the Operator’s Manual.
6. Mount the rear panel.
Prepare for Prepare for the replacements described overleaf as follows:

Replacements
Step Action
1. Remove and discard:
· The pump tubes from the pH/BG, El/Met, and Fluidic Modules
· The sealing ring from the pump housings
2. Inspect all pump housings and rollers for dust and crystals - clean if
necessary
3. Remove the “lid” from the OXI (or OXI Blind) module and the plastic
cover plate on the Electrode Blind module(s)
4. Remove the screws securing the Fluidic Module, left.
6-2
Yearly Service Procedure, Continued
Prepare for
Step Action
Replacements
(continued) 5. Remove and discard:
· All remaining tubing transporting fluid, including clamps, isolator,
and securing ring
· The inlet probe and gasket.
· The tubing organizer on the right Fluidic Module.
6. Clean the area where the Inlet Gasket sits and flush the waste nipples
and the preheater on the Inlet Module (using Protein Remover and
then destilled water).
7. Flush the bottle connector for the waste bottle (using Protein Remover
and then destilled water).
8. Dismount the Left and Right Bottle Illumination PCBs.
9. Remove and discard:
· The O-rings placed at the windows for the bottle detection.
Do not use sharp tools for removing (and placing) the O-rings as
Replacements This table describes how to perform the replacements.
Step Action
1. Install new O-rings, 835-473, for the bottle illumination windows.
Ensure that they are situated correctly at the windows (may be viewed
from the top through the windows) - they must touch the windows.
2. Install new sealing rings (834-647) in pump housings (place it with
the thin side downwards) and remount the pump rotors.
3. Install a new type inlet probe, 902-677 (or an original type 923-932)
and a new type inlet gasket, 902-668 (or an original type 902-488).
Please note that these two items are not included in the kit.
4. Install new tubing organizer, tubing, stoppers, clamps, securing ring,
and isolator as per the tubing diagrams and tables in the service
manual (Chapter 9).
The Y-piece (924-238) for the waste pump tubes should be installed to
replace the connection points and channels in the Fluidic Module.
Please note that the parts used during the yearly service procedure
depend on the configuration and version of the hardware.
5. Secure the Fluidic Module, left.
6-3
Check-outs The following table describes the checkout procedure for the analyzer.
Step Action
1. Perform an OXI-complete test.
2. If the lamp intensity is outside the range from 3100 to 3700, perform
the lamp adjustment.
3. Perform a service tHb calibration.
4. Perform a valve check.
5. Perform a pump check.
6. Perform a temperature check.
7. Perform a liquid sensor check.
8. Perform an electrode check and zero point calibration.
9. Perform an isolation check.
10. Perform an inlet check.
11. Perform a barometer check.
12. Perform a GAS module check.
13. Perform a waste check.
14. Check the function of the bottle detection.
15. Perform the checkout of the AutoCheck Module.
6-4
Yearly Service The table below lists the content of the yearly service kit.
Kit
Part No. Description
834-647 Sealing rings, 4 pcs.
835-473 O-rings for bottle detection, 7 pcs.
840-043 Rubber tubing, 2 meters
840-227 Silicone tubing, 2 meters
841-768 Tube between inlet probe and preheater
841-774 Tube, Rinse heater - measuring chamber, 2 pcs.
841-775 Tube, interconnecting, 4 pcs.
841-776 Tube, Inlet-pH/BG
842-255 Rubber stopper
842-326 Pump tubing for waste pump, 2 pcs.
842-327 Pump tubing for solution pump with clamp
842-328 Pump tubing for pH/BG and El/Met Modules, 2 pcs.
842-329 Tubing for OXI preheater with clamps
842-330 OXI valve tubing with securing ring and isolation bushing
844-411 Tubing Organizer for Right Fluidic Module
924-073 Fan filter
924-238 Y-piece
6-5
Disinfection
Introduction This section describes how to disinfect the analyzer.
WARNING Follow legal requirements and local rules for safe work practices with chemicals.
Disinfecting blood gas analyzers may result in contact with blood remnants and
with harsh disinfectants. During the various disinfecting procedures wear suitable
protection gear (gloves, face protection, and protective body clothing), following
legal requirements and local rules for recommended protective clothing.
The gloves must be free of pin holes and preferably be puncture resistant. Please
medical advise.
Materials Below the materials required to perform a disinfection are listed:

required
· 70% isopropyl alcohol or 50% ethanol - referred to as “alcohol” further on
· Sterile deionized water
· Disposable gloves resistant for alcohol and hypochlorite solution
· Paper towels or tissues
· Approx. 8 Plastic beakers, part no. 956-310 (100 pcs.)
· Silicone tubings, part no. 840-202
· S5362 Hypochlorite solution
· Laboratory detergent (fx 4% diversol solution)
· Inlet gasket, part no. 902-488
· Waste container, part no. 905-590
· New solutions: Cal 1 solution,
Cal 2 solution,
Rinse solution,
Cleaning solution,
· Membrane boxes for pCO2, pO2, Cl, K, Na, Ca, Glu and Lac electrodes
· pH electrode (prepare a new pH electrode 25 hours in advance according to the
insert supplied with the electrode). Or disinfect the used pH electrode, for
example, by carefully wiping off the glass membrane with a cotton stick soaked
with hypochlorite and rinse it afterwards with sterile deionized water.
6-6
Disinfection, Continued
Disinfection of Prepare the surroundings and the external surfaces prior to disinfection as follows:
surroundings
Step Action
1. Enter the Setup Service Program and set status to “YES” for:
“Ignore removal of inlet handles”,
“Ignore removal of cover”, and
“Ignore removal of bottles”
Then exit.
2. Enter the Replacement program - press “Replace other”.
3. Remove and clean with a soap solution:
The front covers
The inlet handles
4. Remove and discard the:
Inlet gasket
Cleaning solution
Cal 1 solution
Cal 2 solution
Rinse solution
Waste container (NB! Remember to mount a cap immediately)
5. Using alcohol on a paper towel or tissue wipe off:
The outer surface of the instrument
The touch screen
The inlet surroundings
The surface on the electrode modules (including the surface of the
electrode connectors)
The connectors and the surroundings for solutions and waste container
6-7
Disinfection of The following table describes how to disinfect the Wet Section.
Wet Section
Step Action
1. Mount the cover for the measuring modules.
2. Mount a new waste container according to the Operator’s manual.
3. Mount a new inlet gasket according to the Operator’s Manual.
4. Mount the inlet flaps according to the Operator’s Manual.
5. Mount silicone tubings on the connectors for the solutions and dip the
other ends in beakers filled with S5362 Hypochlorite solution.
6. Press RESTART
7. Perform a decontamination with S5362 Hypochlorite solution
according to the Operator’s Manual.
8. Perform a refill twice.
9. Remove the beakers with hypochlorite solution and replace with
beakers filled with sterile deionized water.
10. Perform the refill program twice.
11. Mount a new cleaning solution and perform the cleaning program.
Start-up The table below describes how to start the analyzer after disinfection.
Step Action
1. Enter the Replacement program - press “Replace fluid”.
2. Mount new solutions according to the procedure in the Operator’s
Manual (Remember the already mounted cleaning solution).
3. Remove the electrodes and clean the measuring chamber with sterile
deionized water on a cotton stick. Make sure that there are no
remnants of the cotton stick in the measuring chamber.
4. Remembrane and install the: pCO2, pO2, Cl, K, Na, Ca, Glu and Lac
electrodes according to the procedure in the Operator’s Manual.
5. Install a new or a disinfected pH electrode.
6. Restart the analyzer.
7. Enter the Setup Service Program and touch “Restore default” and then
exit.
6-8
IMPORTANT Your analyzer is now disinfected in the areas likely to allow growth of bacteria.
Please note that the analyzer is not necessarily free of bacterial contamination since
not all the areas have been disinfected - and the disinfection may not be 100%
effective.
The disinfected areas can be contaminated again, for example, if:
· a solution from another, contaminated analyzer is used in the disinfected
analyzer,
· an electrode from another analyzer is used in the disinfected analyzer,
· the same ampoule, syringe or H700 Ampoule Adapter is used for a
contaminated and disinfected analyzer,
· a water sample containing bacteria is measured,
· the air contains airborne bacteria.
6-9
ABL700 Series Service Manual 7. Service Programs
7. Service Programs
Overview
Introduction The purpose of the service programs is to enable the service person to check the
various parts and functions of the analyzer.
As it appears from the list of topics below the service software is divided into a
number of groups depending on the type of program.
Please note that no analyzer service program for the PC module is included. We
recommend the use of a generally available diagnostic tool, such as Touchstone
“Check It” or similar.

Entry to Service Programs, Service Disk......................................................... 7-2
Analyzing Unit Service.................................................................................... 7-7
Software ........................................................................................................... 7-77
Electrode Updatings ......................................................................................... 7-85
Options ............................................................................................................. 7-88
Service Test...................................................................................................... 7-92
Parts.................................................................................................................. 7-96
7-1
7. Service Programs ABL700 Series Service Manual
Entry to Service Programs, Service Disk
Introduction This paragraph describes how to enter the service programs (Service Screen).
As storage of data on a service disk may be carried out directly from the Service
Screen, the screens available for this purpose is also described here.
Entry to Service The following table describes the procedure for entering the service programs.
Programs
From Normal Operational Mode:
Step Action
1. Touch “Status/Control”.
2. Touch “Utilities”.
3. Touch “Service”.
Result: The logon screen appears.
4. Key in password if required and touch “Enter”. The service password
is set to “99.342” from the factory.
Result: The analyzer enters the Service Screen.
From Hold:
Step Action
1. Touch “Service”.
Result: The logon screen appears.
2. Key in password if required and touch “Enter”. The service password
is set to “99.342” from the factory.
Result: The analyzer enters the Service Screen.
7-2
Entry to Service Programs, Service Disk, Continued
Logon Screen The Logon Screen layout is as follows:

Layout
Touch-keys The table below explains the function of the touch-keys.

Logon Screen
Touch-key Function
Keypad For entering the password.
Back Returns to the Service Menu screen.
7-3
Service Menu The Service Menu Screen layout is as follows:

Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
Store Info Changes to the store info screen overleaf.
This function is used in connection with all service visits.
For further information please refer to the paragraph
“Service Disk” and “Service Test” in Section 4.
Print Information Provides a print-out of service data as shown on page 4.
Analyzing Unit Entry to the Analyzing Unit Service screen (from which
Service the various service programs relating to the analyzing unit
may be called).
Analyzing Unit Entry to the Analyzing Unit Service Setup program.
Setup
Software Entry to the Software screen (from which the various
service programs relating to the software may be called).
7-4
Touch-keys
(continued) Touch-key Function
Electrode Entry to the Electrode Updatings Service program.
Updatings
Options Entry to the Options Service program.
Service Test Entry to the Service Test program.
Parts Entry to the Parts Service program.
Disable Keyboard Disables the use of all WIN95 key stroke combinations,
such as Alt + Tab.
Back Returns to the Analyzing Unit Service screen.
Store Info The Store Info Screen, which appears after having touched the “Store Info” touch-
Screen Layout key on the Service Menu screen, has the following layout:
7-5

(Data Entry
Screen) Touch-key Function
Store Info Stores the service test results on a floppy disk.
For further information please refer to the paragraphs
“Service Disk” and “Service Test” in Section 4.
Data Entry The table below explains the function of the touch-keys.
Fields
Field Explanation
Service Reason. Tick off the main reason for the service visit.
Service Type your name.
Technician.
Customer Key in the information. The information in this field is
Identification stored on the hard disk and need only to be keyed in once
(in connection with the installation of the analyzer).
7-6
Analyzing Unit Service
Overview
Introduction The purpose of the Analyzing Unit Service programs is to enable the service
person to check the various parts and functions of the analyzer.
As it appears from the list of contents below the service software for the Analyzing
Unit is organized so that some programs concern a specific function or component
in several modules (e.g. liquid sensors), some concern a specific module (Inlet),
and some concern a specific function or component (waste detector).
This means that in case a function is duplicated in several modules such as the
liquid sensors, the program gives information about all liquid sensors in the
analyzer. This enables comparing and checking of all similar parts and functions
from one single program.

Multiple Module Programs .............................................................................. 7-10
OXI Module Programs..................................................................................... 7-31
Inlet Module Program ...................................................................................... 7-57
AutoCheck Module Programs.......................................................................... 7-61
Miscellaneous Programs .................................................................................. 7-70
7-7
Overview, Continued
Screen Layout After having touched the Analyzing Unit Service key the screen below appears.
This screen enables entry to the various service programs available for checking
the analyzing unit.
Touch Keys The table below explains the function of the touch-keys (except for the keys for
calling a specific program).
Touch Key Function

Print Provides a print-out of the information on the screen.
Service Menu Returns to the Service Menu screen.
Please note that the touch-keys “Oximetry System” and “AutoCheck” are only
visible if the modules are installed into the analyzer.
7-8
Overview, Continued
Exit from an Upon exit from any of the Analyzing Unit Service Programs available from the
Analyzing Unit screen above, the analyzer will perform the following activities:
Service Program
In case the wet section cover and/or both inlet handles have been removed
· Inlet calibration, Draining, Leak test, and Rinse.
In case none of the above have been removed
· Rinse
This is to ensure that the status of the wet section (flow path) is well defined before
returning to the normal operation mode.
7-9
Multiple Module Programs
Overview
Introduction This sub-section describes the service programs in which components and
functions present in more modules may be checked. These programs concern
functions or components such as e.g. pumps and valves.
Contents This sub-section contains the following topics:

Status Service Program .................................................................................... 7-11
Zero Current Calibration Service Program ...................................................... 7-13
Isolation Service Program ................................................................................ 7-15
Liquid Sensor Service Program ....................................................................... 7-17
Electrode Service Program............................................................................... 7-19
Pump Service Program..................................................................................... 7-21
Valve Service Program .................................................................................... 7-23
Thermostatting Service Program...................................................................... 7-26
Setup Service Program..................................................................................... 7-28
7-10
Status Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check of the various parts which cannot
be checked using the other service programs.
Entry The program may be called from the Analyzing Unit Service screen.
Screen Layout The Status Check screen layout is as follows:
Touch-key Function
Toggle Measuring Turns alternately the light in the measurement chambers
Lights on and off.
Toggle Bottle Enables and disables alternately the bottle illumination.
Illumination
7-11
Status Service Program, Continued
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen (updated
Fields once every second):
The reference voltages obtained in this program are offset in relation to the zero
point as the system may only transfer positive voltages.
Field Explanation
Inlet Handles Status of the handles as read by the detector. The status
may be “INLET_CLOSED”, “CAPILLARY_OPEN”,
“SYRINGE_OPEN”, or “HANDLES_OFF”.
Cover Status of the wet section cover as read by the detector. The
status may be “On” or “Off”.
Measuring Light Status of the measuring light in the measuring chambers of
the pH/BG and El/Met Modules. The status may be “On”
or “Off”.
Bottle Illumination Status of the bottle illumination. The status may be “On”
or “Off”.
Waste detector “Empty” or “Full”.
indicates
Waste bottle The status may be “Present” or “Removed”. If the bottle
illumination is “On”, then the illumination for a specific
bottle is switched off when removing the bottle.
Rinse bottle As for the waste bottle.
Rinse2 bottle As for the waste bottle. The status is shown as “Present”
even though only the blind panel is present.
Cal3 bottle As for the waste bottle. The status is shown as “Present”
even though only the blind panel is present.
Cal1 bottle As for the waste bottle.
Cal2 bottle As for the waste bottle.
Cleaning bottle As for the waste bottle.
7-12
Zero Current Calibration Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check and a calibration of the pO2,
glucose, and lactate electrodes.
Screen Layout The Zero Current Calibration screen layout is as follows:
Touch-key Function
Save Saves the actual zero current (all channels simultaneously).
Drain Drains the wet section. To be touched prior to
disconnecting an electrode connector.
7-13
Zero Current Calibration Service Program, Continued
Field Explanation
Zero current is the zero current which is presently stored in the analyzer
(saved during the last zero current calibration).
Actual current is the actual zero current which will be stored in the
analyzer in case “Save” is touched.
7-14
Isolation Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check of the isolation of the wet section.
Screen Layout The Isolation screen layout is as follows:
Touch-key Function
Rinse Calls a Rinse cycle.
Fill Fills the wet section with rinse solution.
Drain Drains the wet section.
7-15
Isolation Service Program, Continued
Field Explanation
Voltage Indicates the voltage at the output of the measuring circuit.
The voltage is proportional to the current flowing between
the galvanically isolated ground and the analyzer ground
terminals.
The voltage displayed is interpreted as follows:
< 500 mV Isolation is OK
(in case of extremely low current, the
voltage may be slightly negative)
500 - 1,300 mV Liquid spillage causes leak current in
the system. The modules should be
dismantled, cleaned, and dried.
> 1,300 mV Hardware defect such as a short
circuit between two voltages or two
components which must be isolated
from each other.
Current Indicates the current mentioned above.
7-16
Liquid Sensor Service Program
Purpose Enables a check of the performance of the liquid sensors. The function of all liquid
sensors in the analyzer may be checked using this program.
Screen Layout
Touch-keys The table below explains the function of the touch-keys:
Touch-key Function
Liquid Sensor Calls a calibration of the liquid sensors.
Calibration
Fill Fills all liquid sensors.
Drain Drains the wet section (all liquid sensors).
Print Provides a printout of the information on the screen.
7-17
Liquid Sensor Service Program, Continued
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen:
Fields
Field Explanation
Status Indicates the calibration status for the liquid sensors.
“Calibration OK” when calibration is accepted. “Not
calibrated” if sensor is not included or outside acceptance
limits.
Light Intensity of the LED in the liquid sensor (current applied to the
LED). The current may be set to 254 different levels
(“1”=minimum, “254”=maximum).
Threshold Value Indicates the calibration value for the liquid sensor.
(Cal value = 60 % of the empty value).
Present Value Output from the liquid sensor.
Dynamic range is [0 ; 255].
Present Status Interpretation of the present value .
Empty: Present value > threshold value.
Full: Present value £ threshold value.
7-18
Electrode Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check of the electrode channels.
Each channel may be checked as a whole, or excluding the electrode and the wet
section (that is, electronics only).
Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
Fill Fills the electrode chambers with rinse solution
Rinse Calls a normal rinse cycle.
Drain Drains the wet section. To be touched prior to replacing an
electrode with a dummy electrode.
7-19
Electrode Service Program, Continued
The reference voltages obtained in this program are offset in relation to the zero
point as the system may only transfer positive voltages.
Field Explanation
2.5 Vref 2.5 V reference voltage for the electrode channel. The
voltage reflects the transfer function for the channel.
0 Vref 0 V reference voltage for the electrode channel.
Electrode signal Actual voltage or current obtained from the electrode (or
connected test equipment).
The electrode signals for pO2, glucose and lactate are
compensated for the zero point calibration.
7-20
Pump Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check of the operation of the pumps.
The function of all pumps in the analyzer may be checked using this program.
Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
Arrows Select the pump to be checked.
Increase Increases the speed of the selected pump.
Decrease Decreases the speed of the selected pump.
Start/Stop Starts or stops the selected pump.
Only one pump can be started. When activating this key
for a second pump the first pump will be stopped.
Reason: Starting more pumps simultaneously could cause
unintended liquid flow, create vacuum or over
pressure in the wet section.
7-21
Pump Service Program, Continued
Touch-keys
Pump Calibration Calls a pump calibration which determines the
effectiveness (Calibration factor) for the pumps.
Information
Fields The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen:
Field Explanation
Cal. status Interpretation of Calibration factor
Speed Actual pump speed in mL/s. The sign in front of the
number indicates the direction (+ for clockwise, - for
counterclockwise)
Cal. factor Pump effectiveness obtained during the last pump
calibration, expressed in percent of the nominal value.
7-22
Valve Service Program
Purpose Two Valve service programs are available, one for the Fluidic Module and one for
the Measuring Modules.
The purpose of these programs is to enable a check of the operation of the valves
(pull and hold, and release functions). The function of all valves in the analyzer
(except for the two valves in the gas module) may be checked using these
programs.
All valves are in the released state upon entry.
Screen Layout The layout of the screen for the Fluidic Module Valves Check is as follows:
(Fluidic Module)
7-23
Valve Service Program, Continued
Touch-keys The table below explains the function of the touch-keys for both programs.
Touch-key Function
Arrows Selects the valve to be checked
Pull and hold Pulls and holds the selected valve.
Only one valve can be held. When touching this key for a
second valve the first valve will be released.
Reason: Holding more valves simultaneously could cause
unintended liquid flow.
Release Releases the selected valve
Print Provides a print-out of the information on the screen
Valves will be released upon return.
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen for both
Fields programs:
Field Explanation
State of the valve, “Pulled” or “Released”
No. of actions for the selected valve.
since power on
7-24
Valve Service Program, Continued
Screen Layout The layout of the screen for the Measuring Module Valves Check is as follows:
(Measuring
Modules)
7-25
Thermostatting Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check of the performance of the
temperature regulation of the liquid flow path.
The program provides both the absolute temperatures and the power dissipated in
the heating elements (duty cycle).
Entry The program may be called from the Analyzing Unit Service screen
Screen Layout
Touch-keys The table below explains the function of the touch keys:
Touch-key Function
Toggle Fan Moves the cursor between the two fans
Selection
Regulation On/Off Turns the analyzers regulation of the fans on or off
High Speed Sets the speed of the selected fan to the high speed
Low Speed Sets the speed of the selected fan to the low speed
Fan Off Turns the selected fan off
7-26
Thermostatting Service Program, Continued
Touch-keys
Print Provides a printout of the information on the screen
Back Returns to the Analyzing Unit Service screen
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen:
Fields
Field Explanation
Status Indicates if the temperature of the heating device is within
limits (“OK”)
Setpoint Target value for the temperature regulator
Temp. Actual temperature of the device
Please note that if the displayed temperature jumps a lot
between updates (>5 °C) the NTC resistor is open, shorted,
or disconnected.
If the temperature is low (between the ambient temperature
and the correct temperature) and the duty cycle is high for
an extended period of time (for one of the heat channels)
the heating element is either defective or disconnected, or
the unit may not be correctly assembled.
Duty cycle Indicates the percentage of maximum power applied to the
heating device
Regulation State Err1: Regulation not in control (may not be
able to heat to correct temperature).
Heat power is too high with fans off.
S1 through S5: Normal regulation states where fan
speeds and temperature setpoints vary.
Err5: Regulation not in control (may not be
able to cool to correct temperature).
Heat power is too low with fans on.
Analyzing unit fan High speed, Low speed, Off
speed
Power Supply fan High speed, Low speed, Off
speed
7-27
Setup Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to change or cancel the analyzer’s normal action
caused by the status of the wet section.
This facility may be used to reduce the waiting time during troubleshooting and
demonstration of the analyzer.
Entry The program may be called from the Main Service screen by touching “Analyzing
Unit Service Setup” and from the Analyzing Unit Service screen by touching
“Service Setup”.
Screen Layout The Service Setup screen layout is as follows:
7-28
Setup Service Program, Continued
Touch-key Function
Arrows Selects the item to be set up.
Yes/No Toggles between “No” and “Yes”. Default is “No”.
If any of the items marked with an “*” below are set to
“Yes” the analyzer does not operate in accordance with the
Operator’s Manual. This is indicated on the display by a
yellow traffic light and a system message.
Restore default Changes the status for all items to default (“No”).
Exit Setup Only present if the program was called from the Service
Menu screen.
Returns to the Service Menu screen and functions as
cancel if Save Setup is not touched.
Service Menu Only present if the program was called from the Analyzing
Unit Service screen.
Returns to the Service Menu screen.
Back Only present if the program was called from the Analyzing
Unit Service screen.
Returns to the Analyzing Unit Service screen and
functions as cancel if Save Setup is not touched.
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen.
Fields
Field Explanation
* Rinse only at Reduces the normal startup of the analyzing unit to
power on perform only a rinse. This must be carried out before
switching off the analyzer.
* Ignore removal Removal of inlet handles is ignored.
of inlet handles
* Ignore removal Defective detector or missing cover for wet section is
of cover ignored.
7-29
Setup Service Program, Continued
Information
Fields Field Explanation
(continued) * Ignore removal Removal of bottles is ignored
of bottles
Disable waste Waste check is disabled.
check
* Suppress Frequent calibrations after replacement of membranes or
frequent electrodes are suppressed.
calibrations
Disable leak Disables the program for detecting leaks in the wet section.
detection
* Disable gas Disables the measurement of the gas volume in the
volume cylinders. This concerns only the measurement performed
measurement during normal operation - it is still possible to measure the
gas volume in the gas service program.
* Disable Disables the regression calibration for the glucose and
regression lactate electrodes.
calibration
* Enable printout Enables the printout of the turbidity with each sample
of turbidity result.
* Disable Disables the conditioning cycle for the AUTOCHECK
AutoCheck ampoules.
ampoule condition
Enable fixed probe Causes the inlet probe to extend to a fixed position in the
position syringe mode (instead of detecting the position of the
plunger)
Enable choked Enables the detection and reporting of obstruction of the
inlet detection inlet system (clot)
Leak Detect This program runs on a regular basis in the normal operation mode and checks for
Program leaks in the measuring system (flow path).
The program first seals the inlet (inlet probe in lock position) and then alternately
creates a minor overpressure and vacuum by turning the solution supply pump (P2
in the Fluidic Module).
The change in the output of the pO2 electrode is used for determining if it is
possible to create and maintain the overpressure and vacuum.
If the program fails (due to e.g. missing electrode, disconnected electrode
connector, leaking or disconnected tubes) the analyzer enters the Hold mode.
7-30
OXI Module Programs
Overview
Introduction The purpose of the OXI module service programs is to enable the service person to
check the various parts and functions in the module. Each of the parts and
functions may be checked separately.
Note that in some check programs, it is necessary for other parts to be working, i.e.
parts of the Lamp Unit check can only be performed without errors if the
Spectrometer and Wet Section flow are working correctly.
The program includes a number of sub-programs which may be called by touching
the specific box on the screen.

Complete Oximetry Test Service Program ...................................................... 7-33
tHB Calibration Service Program .................................................................... 7-40
SAT100 Calibration Service Program.............................................................. 7-43
Hemolyzer Status Check Service Program ...................................................... 7-46
Lamp Unit Status Check Service Program....................................................... 7-48
Lamp Adjustment Service Program ................................................................. 7-50
Spectrometer EEPROM Service program........................................................ 7-52
Spectrometer Status Check Service Program................................................... 7-55
Warning The Spectrometer part of the OXI module MUST NOT under any circumstances
be dismantled. Only the Fiber can be disconnected from the Spectrometer.
During calibration, QC or blood measurement and tHb calibration the black cover
must be mounted on the OXI module, to avoid influence from intensive ambient
light.
7-31
Overview, Continued
Entry screen
7-32
Complete Oximetry Test Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check of the complete OXI module. The
tests are performed with Rinse solution with overpressure in the cuvette.
Note Running the Complete check will electronically re-adjust several values in the OXI
module, and may remove an earlier detected error. Running the tests on the
individual modules (status check) does not re-adjust values.
A 1-point calibration must be called after a Complete Test has been performed.
Entry In the OXI module check program, press the: “Complete Oximetry Test” touch key
to enter the program. The program will automatically run through predefined tests
and display the statistics and status for the parts.
Screen Layout,
Complete
Oximetry Test
7-33
Complete Oximetry Test Service Program, Continued
Touch-keys The following table describes the touch-keys that can be activated in the Complete
Oximetry Test program.
Touch-key Function
Back Returns to the OXI Check Module screen
Print Provides a printout of the complete information on the
screen
Spectrometer Gives detailed Spectrometer information retrieved during
Results the Complete test.
Lamp Results Gives detailed Lamp Unit information retrieved during the
Complete test.
Hemolyzer Results Gives detailed Hemolyzer information retrieved during the
Complete test.
Screen layout,
Spectrometer
7-34
Information The table below explains the tests performed and the information on the screen.
fields, The actual test may be Passed or Failed.
spectrometer
Field Explanation
EEPROM Reading Checksum calculation of the E2prom in the
Spectrometer.
Temperature Reading Checks the temperature of the Spectrometer.
Data collection test Checks that the ADC on the OXI PCB is working, and
that trigger pulses from the Spectrometer are received.
Voltage Bias Checks the offset voltage needed to get the
Spectrometer output voltage positive
Stdev Dark Value Checks the Standard Deviation of the Dark value.
(signal/noise ratio)
Mean DarkValue Checks the Mean Dark Value at different exposure
times (3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192 and 384 mSec)
Max-Min Dark Value Checks for single pixel errors (diverting from mean
Dark value).
Screen layout,
Lamp
7-35
Information The table below explains the information on the screen. The actual test may be
fields, Lamp Passed or Failed.
Field Explanation
Thermostat Checks the temperature of the photodiode
Temperature
Thermostat Heat Checks the percentage of maximum power applied.
Halogen OFF Checks the voltage on the lamp when supposed OFF
Voltage
Photodiode Current Checks the current at Vhalogen = 4.0 V.
Halogen ON Voltage Checks the voltage of the lamp when supposed ON
Halogen Regulator Checks that the lamp voltage regulator is within
Status regulation area.
Halogen Intensity Check of the Halogen lamp maximum intensity at 3
Test mSec exposure time. 4095 is maximum intensity.
Intensity
1 128 pixels
Halogen Shape Test Checks the overall shape of the spectrum.

mAbs
1 128 pixels
7-36
Information
fields, Lamp Field Explanation
(continued) Halogen Pixel Test Checks the sensitivity of the single pixels by comparing
to the neighbour pixels.
Intensity
25 26 27
approx.:
26 = (27-25)/2 + 25
1 128 pixels
Halogen Linearity Checks the linearity at different exposure times.

Test Exposure time
mSec
24
12
6
3
1 128 pixels
Halogen Stability Checks the halogen light output stability.

Test V out
ton time
Neon Voltage Checks the voltage of the lamp when supposed ON

Neon Intensity Checks the intensity in percent. Output = 4095 at an
exposure time of 384 mSec = 100%
Neon Position Checks the position of the Neon wavelengths
(585.25nm) on the diode array. Correlated to pixel 70
and 71.
Fneon = pixel 70/pixel71
7-37
Screen layout, The Hemolyzer Unit Result screen layout is as follows:

Hemolyzer
Information The table below explains the information on the screen. The actual test may be
fields, Passed or Failed.
Hemolyzer
Field Explanation
Thermostat Checks the temperature of the Hemolyzer
Temperature
Thermostat Heat Checks the percentage of maximum power applied
Tuning voltage Checks the peak voltage over the hemolyzer at Idrive
=20%
Tuning frequency Checks the frequency on the hemolyzer in resonance
7-38
Information
fields, Field Explanation
Hemolyzer Impedance shape Checks the overall impedance shape at 28 - 32.5 kHz.
(continued) Impedance
Frequency
Cavitation Checks the maximum absorbance level when the drive

absorbance current is scanned from 0 to 100%
mAbs
max
Idrive
0% 100%
Cavitation drive Checks the drive current needed to give 10 mabs.

current mAbs
10
I micro Idrive
bubbles
7-39
tHb Calibration Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to calibrate the hemolyzer in case of a replacement
and to calibrate the wavelength of the Spectrometer
Note A Service tHb calibration performs both a cuvette compensation and a wavelength
calibration. A User tHb calibration only performs a cuvette compensation.
Entry The program is called from the OXI System main screen.
Entry Screen
Layout
Touch-keys The table below explains the function of the Touch-keys.
Touch-key Function
Continue Stores the data code and goes to the measurement screen
7-40
tHb Calibration Service Program, Continued
Result Screen
Layout
Touch-key Function
Aspirate Starts the aspiration of the tHb calibrator.
7-41
tHb Calibration Service Program, Continued
Information The table below explains the information on the screen.

fields
Field Explanation
Fcuv The new cuvette factor calculated from the aspirated tHb
calibrator.
Status 0 Calibration accepted and stored.
1-9 Could not write to spectrometer EEPROM.
10-14 Spectrum mismatch. Could not recognize S7770.
15 cSulf < 0.15 g/kg. Too low cSulf for calculations.
20 Hardware error during intensity measurement.
21 Absorbance spectrum could not be calculated.
22 Fcuv outside limits
23 Wavelength adjustment too large.
30 Cal 1 or Cal 2 missing.
31 Neon position incorrect.
£255 Time-out on the CAN bus.
ctHb The tHb on the injected calibrator.
SO2 The saturation on the injected calibrator.
FO2Hb The O2Hb the injected calibrator.
FCOHb The COHb on the injected calibrator.
FMetHb The MetHb on the injected calibrator.
7-42
SAT100 Calibration service program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to wavelength calibrate the Spectrometer with
blood.
Screen Layout The SAT100 calibration screen layout is as follows:
Touch-key Function
Continue Accepts the SAT100 value and starts the SAT100
aspiration program.
7-43
SAT100 Calibration service program, Continued
Result Screen The SAT100 result screen layout is as follows:

fields
Field Explanation
Status 0 Calibration accepted and stored.
1-9 Could not write to spectrometer EEPROM.
10-14 Spectrum mismatch. Could not recognize blood.
15 ctHb < 1 mmol/L. Too low ctHb for calculations.
20 Hardware error during intensity measurement.
21 Absorbance spectrum could not be calculated.
22 ctHb outside limits.
23 Turbidity outside limits.
24 COHb outside limits.
25 MetHb outside limits.
26 Wavelength adjustment too large.
30 Cal 1 or Cal 2 missing.
31 Neon position incorrect.
£255 Time-out on the CAN bus.
7-44
SAT100 Calibration service program, Continued
Information
fields Field Explanation
(continued) ctHb The tHb of the injected sample.
s02 The saturation of the injected sample.
FCOHb The COHb of the injected sample
FMetHb The MetHb of the injected sample
Turbidity The turbidity of the injected sample.
7-45
Hemolyzer Status Check Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to show the status of the Hemolyzer module.
Screen Layout The Hemolyzer Status Check screen layout is as follows:

Status
Touch keys The following table describes the touch-keys that can be activated in the
Status Hemolyzer Check program.
Touch-key Function
Fill Fills the cuvette with solution (not overpressure).
Drain Empties the cuvette.
Hemolyzer On/Off Turns the Hemolyzer On/Off.

Print Provides a printout of the information on the screen.
Back Returns to the OXI Check Module screen.
7-46
Hemolyzer Status Check Service Program, Continued

fields Status
Field Explanation
Thermostat The actual Hemolyzer temperature.
Temperature
Thermostat Heat The percentage of the maximum applied power.
Hemolyzer Status ON or OFF.
Voltage The actual Hemolyzer voltage.
Current Drive The actual percentage of the maximum current.
Frequency The actual Hemolyzer frequency.
Phase The actual Hemolyzer phase.
7-47
Lamp Unit Status Check Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to show the status of the Lamp unit.
Screen layout
Status
Touch-keys, The table below describes the function of the touch-keys.

Status
Touch-key Function
Fill Fills the cuvette with rinse solution (not overpressured).
Drain Empties the cuvette.
Halogen Lamp Turns the Halogen Lamp On/Off. The Neon Lamp will be
On/off switched off if the Halogen Lamp is turned on.
Neon Lamp On/off Turns the Neon Lamp On/Off. The Halogen Lamp will be
switched off if the Neon Lamp is turned on.
The Hemolyzer is also switched on/off as the same driver
circuit is used for both devices.
7-48
Lamp Unit Status Check Service Program, Continued
Touch-keys,
Status Touch-key Function
(continued) Print Provides a print-out of the information on the screen.

fields Status
Field Explanation
Thermostat Shows the actual temperature of the photo diode which
Temperature controls the light output of the Halogen Lamp.
Thermostat Heat Shows the actual percentage of the maximum power
supplied to the heater at the photo diode.
Halogen Lamp The supposed status of the Halogen Lamp (ON or OFF).
Halogen Voltage Shows the actual voltage of the Halogen Lamp.
Halogen Intensity Shows the Halogen Lamp intensity at 3 mSec exposure
time.
Neon Lamp The supposed status of the Neon Lamp (ON or OFF).
Neon Voltage Shows the actual voltage on the Neon Lamp.
Neon Intensity Correlated to max. output = 4095 at an exposure time of
384 mSec = 100%
Neon Position Shows the position of the Neon wavelengths
(585.25nm) on the diode array. Correlated to pixel 70
and 71.
Fneon = pixel 70/pixel71
7-49
Lamp Adjustment Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable an adjustment of the Lamp unit.
Screen layout
Touch-keys The table below describes the function of the touch-keys.
Touch-key Function
Halogen Lamp Turns the Lamp On or Off.
On/Off
Fill Fills the OXI module.
Drain Empties the OXI module.
Back Returns to the Lamp Unit Check screen.
7-50
Lamp Adjustment Service Program, Continued
Information The table below explains the fields on the screen:

Fields
Field Explanation
Intensity The maximum value of the 128 intensities.
Limits The accept limits for the intensity counts.
Halogen Lamp Shows the status of the Lamp (on or off).
7-51
Spectrometer EEPROM Service program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to show the status written in the Spectrometer
EEPROM.
Screen Layout
EEPROM
Touch-keys The table below describes the function of the touch-keys:
Touch-key Function
Back Returns to the OXI module check screen.
7-52
Spectrometer EEPROM Service program, Continued

Fields
(EEPROM) Field Value1 Value2 Value3
Run Number: The serial number Production Date The Part number
for the for the
Spectrometer Spectrometer
Active A number The date the The type of
Wavelength Cal. # indicating the last Wavelength Cal. Wavelength Cal.
type of was performed performed (see list
Wavelength Cal. below)
performed.
Wavelength Cal. The offset The offset from
Offset (compared to a the Wavelength
mAbs reference Cal. performed at
Offset
spectrum) from the factory.
the last
Wavelength Cal.
performed.
Pixels
Wavelength Cal. The slope The slope from

Slope (compared to a the Wavelength
mAbs reference Cal. performed at
spectrum) from the factory.
the last
Wavelength Cal.
performed.
Pixels
Wavelength Cal. The temperature The temperature

Temp. of the of the
spectrometer spectrometer
when the last when the
Wavelength Cal. Wavelength Cal.
was performed. was performed at
the factory.
Factory Neon Cal. The position of The temperature The date the Neon
the Neon of the measurement was
wavelength spectrometer performed at the
(585.25nm) on the when the Neon factory.
diode array when measurement was
the Wavelength performed at the
Cal. was factory.
performed at the
factory.
7-53
Spectrometer EEPROM Service program, Continued
Information
Fields Field Value1 Value2 Value3
(EEPROM) Active Neon Cal. The position of The temperature The date the Neon
(continued) the Neon of the measurement was
wavelength spectrometer performed.
(585.25nm) on the when the Neon
diode array at the measurement was
last Wavelength performed.
Cal. performed
Bandwidth Cal. The effective band The 50% band
width of the width of the
Spectrometer. Spectrometer.
Optical A number A number A number
Components indicating the indicating the indicating the Slit
Grating version. Photo diode array version.
version.
Other A number A number
Components indicating the indicating
Amplifier version. Housing version.
Types of The following table shows the types of Calibrations which can be made on the OXI
Wavelength Module:
Calibrations
Cal number Description
1 Reference Calibration during production (exists only in the
factory)
2 Factory calibration with blood
3 Factory calibration with Sulfohordamine (S7770)
4 Field calibration with blood
5 Field calibration with Sulfohordamine (S7770)
7-54
Spectrometer Status Check Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to show the status of the Spectrometer unit
Screen Layout The Status screen layout for the Spectrometer is as follows:
Status
Touch-keys The following table describes the touch-keys that can be activated in the
Status Spectrometer check program.
Touch-key Function
Back Returns to the OXI Check Module screen.
7-55
Spectrometer Status Check Service Program, Continued

fields Status
Field Explanation
Spectrometer The actual temperature of the Spectrometer.
Temperature
Neon Voltage The actual voltage on the Neon Lamp.
Neon Intensity Output = 4095 at an exposure time of 384 mSec = 100%
Neon Position The position of the Neon wavelengths (585nm) on the
Fneon diode array. Correlated to pixel 70 and 71.
Fneon = R70/R71, where R(70) and R(71) are the
responses of channel 70 and 71.
Wavelength offset The wavelength by which the absorbance spectrum is
shifted if Slope=1.
7-56
Inlet Module Program
Overview
Introduction The purpose of the inlet module service program is to enable the service person to
check the various parts and functions of the module. Each of the parts and
functions may be checked separately.
The Temperature Service Program is used for checking the temperature regulation
of the pre-heater.

Inlet Service Program....................................................................................... 7-58
7-57
Inlet Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check of the performance of positioning
of the inlet probe.
Use the Status Service Program to check the detection of the two inlet handles.
Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
Calibrate Initiates a calibration of the inlet positioning system.
Extend Probe Extends the probe to the next pre-defined position.
Retract Probe Retracts the probe to the next pre-defined position.
7-58
Inlet Service Program, Continued
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information in the upper table on
Fields the screen (calibration results). Parameter names, results of the calibration, actual
(Calibration) values, and limits are given.
Field Explanation
Forward reference Mid-point between the two narrow points on each side of
point the capillary inlet as detected when moving the probe
forwards (“FR” on the figure overleaf).
Backward Mid-point between the two narrow points on each side of
reference point the capillary inlet as detected when moving the probe
backwards (“BR” on the figure overleaf).
Optical reference Indicates the exact location of the first fixed mechanical
point 1 reference point as detected by the photo detector (“OR1”
on the figure overleaf).
Optical reference Indicates the exact location of the second fixed mechanical
point 2 reference point as detected by the photo detector (“OR2”
on the figure overleaf).
Zero friction level Output from friction detector when idle (no friction).
Friction detector The sensitivity indicates how much the output changes
sensitivity (counts from A/D converter) when compressing/extracting
the springs in the friction detector when applying a force
of 1 N.
Syringe stop level Indicates at which force the inlet probe must stop its
forward movement when hitting the plunger of a syringe
(set to 1 N which corresponds to 100 grams).
Offset circuit The software adjusts the electrical offset of the system
adjustment such that the idle value of the amplifier is set to the
optimal position of the dynamic measuring range.
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information in the lower table on
Fields (Actual the screen (actual positions). Parameter names and actual values are given.
Positions)
Field Explanation
Actual step for the inlet probe.
position
Logical position for the inlet probe (interpretation of actual step position).
The positions are: Service, Wash, Lock, Side, Cone1,
Cone2, Cone3, Cone4, Cone5, QC; Piston.
7-59
Inlet Service Program, Continued
Information
Fields (Actual Field Explanation
Positions) Trip counter Indicates the total number of position changes the probe
(continued) has performed since the last power on.
Ref 1 error counter Indicates the number of times the physical and relative
positions have been synchronized at the optical reference
point 1 to eliminate lost steps since the last power on.
Ref 2 error counter Indicates the number of times the physical and relative
positions have been synchronized at the optical reference
point 2 to eliminate lost steps since the last power on.
Photo detector “Light” or “Darkness”
status
Calibration The figure below shows the calibration curves for the inlet as well as the various
Graphs references to the tables above.
900
800
700 Backwards
600
BR
FR
Friction
500
Forwards
400
300
OR1 OR2
200 Photo detector
100
Light Dark
0
105
113
121
129
1
9
17
25
33
41
49
57
65
73
81
89
97
Step
7-60
AutoCheck Module Programs
Overview
Introduction The purpose of the AutoCheck module service programs is to enable the service
person to check the various parts and functions in the module. Each of the parts
and functions may be checked separately.
The program includes a number of sub-programs, which may be called by touching
the specific box on the screen.

AutoCheck Status/Control ............................................................................... 7-62
Barcode Scanning ............................................................................................ 7-66
Align Carousel/Laser ....................................................................................... 7-68
Entry Screen
7-61
AutoCheck Status/Control
Purpose The purpose of this program is to show the status of the AutoCheck Module.
Entry The program is called from the AutoCheck main screen.
Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
Toggle House Alternately moves the carousel housing to the up and down
positions.
If the lid is closed when touching this key (to move the
carousel house to the up position), the lid will be opened
prior to moving the carousel house.
Toggle Lid Opens and closes the lid.
If the carousel house is in the up position when touching
this key (to close the lid), the carousel house will be
moved to the down position prior to closing the lid.
7-62
AutoCheck Status/Control, Continued
Touch-keys
Toggle Breaker Alternately moves the ampoule break tool to the break and
zero positions.
If the lid is closed when touching this key (to move the
break tool to the break position), the lid will be opened and
the house will be moved to the up position prior to moving
the break tool.
Carrousel Zero Moves the carousel to its zero position (pos. #2 in the
carousel towards the inlet).
Conditioning Performs an ampoule conditioning cycle.
Abort Interrupts any action in progress, returns the carousel
house to the down position, and closes the lid.
7-63

Fields
Field Explanation
Lid 0 sensor Darkness or Light
Lid 1 sensor Darkness or Light
House up sensor Darkness = carousel housing is in the up position
Light = carousel housing is not in the up position
House down sensor Darkness = carousel housing is in the down position
Light = carousel housing is not in the down position
Carousel zero The sensor detects a narrow slit in the carousel.
sensor
The zero position for the carousel is 10 steps away from
the slit, for which reason the sensor almost always
indicates "Darkness". Only in cases where the screen is
updated exactly at the time where the sensor is at the slit
"Light" is indicated for short period.
Breaker zero Darkness = breaker in zero position (deactivated)
sensor
Light = breaker in break position
AutoCheck Status Idle = ready for new activity
Scanning = scanning the bar codes on the ampoules
Conditioning = conditioning the ampoules
Preparing = preparing the system for measurement
Aborting = aborting the current activity
Prepared = ampoule is broken and positioned
Busy = not idle (e.g. because the lid is open)
Carousel Status Present = carousel detected
Missing = carousel not detected
Timeout = carousel did not reach zero position in time
Lid Status Closed: Lid0=Darkness and Lid1=Light
Opening: Lid0=Lid1=Darkness
Open: Lid0=Light and Lid1=Darkness
Closing: Lid0=Lid1=Darkness
Removed, lid is removed or pulled out of detectors
Timeout, lid did not reach desired position in time
7-64
Information
Fields Field Explanation
(continued) House Status Down
Opening = house is being tilted towards the up position
Up
Closing = house is being tilted towards the down position
Timeout = house did not reach desired position in time
Measurement_abort = aborting measurement because the
house is closed manually during measurement
Breaker Status Zero position = breaker in zero position
Activating = breaker in process of breaking ampoule
Break position = breaker is in break position
Deactivating = breaker is returning to zero position
Timeout = breaker did not reach zero position in time
Termistor voltage Indicates the voltage across the thermistor. The value is
used directly for calculating the ampoule temperature.
Ampoule Indicates the actual temperature of the ampoules.
Temperature
A system message is displayed in case the temperature:
· Is outside the range [12 ; 40] °C , or
· Changes by more than 1°C within one minute
During an error situation it is not possible to measure on
AutoCheck ampoules - this is also the case during the first
5 minutes after the error has disappeared (due to re-
conditioning).
7-65
Barcode Scanning
Purpose The purpose of this program is to check if the scanner is able to read the barcodes
on the ampoules in the carousel.
Screen Layout The AutoCheck Scanning screen layout is as follows:
Touch-keys The following table describes the touch-keys that can be activated in the Barcode
Scanning program.
Touch-key Function
Scan Initiates the scanning of the barcodes
Toggle Lid Open and closes alternately the lid
7-66
Barcode Scanning, Continued

Fields
Field Explanation
Ampoule No. Indicates the ampoule number (position) which are
numbered from 1 to 20.
Result Indicates the result of the scanning.
OK = ampoule with valid bar code is detected
Missing = ampoule not detected either because no ampoule
is present, ampoule is used, or because the scanning failed.
Value Indicates the interpretation of the data in the barcode.
First two digits indicate QC level
Last two digits indicate lot no.
7-67
Align Carousel/Laser
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable an alignment of the carousel and laser
positions.
Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
Align Carousel Enables an alignment of the carousel.
¬ Moves the top ampoule to the left during the alignment
(the new position is automatically saved)
® Moves the top ampoule to the right during the alignment
(the new position is automatically saved).
Align Laser Aligns and saves (automatically) the position of the laser
Position beam.
7-68
Align Carousel/Laser, Continued
Touch-keys

Fields
Field Explanation
Value Indicates the actual alignment value.
Range Indicates the acceptance ranges for the alignment values.
7-69
Miscellaneous Programs
Overview
Introduction The purpose of the Miscellaneous service programs is to enable the service person
to check various parts and functions.
Each of the parts and functions may be checked separately.

Barometer Service Program ............................................................................. 7-71
Gas Service Program........................................................................................ 7-73
Waste Service Program .................................................................................... 7-75
7-70
Barometer Service Program
barometer.
Screen Layout The Barometer screen layout is as follows:
Touch-key Function
7-71
Barometer Service Program, Continued
Fields
Field Explanation
Adjusted pressure Corrected barometric pressure.
Measured pressure Barometric pressure measured by the transducer.
Barometer Actual temperature of the pressure transducer
temperature
Temperature Indicates the target value for the temperature regulator.
setpoint
Duty cycle Indicates the duty cycle of the heating signal (100% equals
maximum power).
Production Determines together with “Production constant K1” the
constant K0 transfer function of the barometer based on a factory
calibration.
Production Determines together with “Production constant K0” the
constant K1 transfer function of the barometer based on a factory
calibration.
7-72
Gas Service Program
proportional valves and pressure transducer in the gas unit.
Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
Gas Type Toggle Selects alternately Gas1 and Gas2.
Increase Flow by Increases the gas flow for the selected gas by 10 mL/s.
10 mL/s
Decrease Flow by Decreases the gas flow for the selected gas by 10 mL/s.
10 mL/s
Open Valve Opens the selected valve 100%.
Volume Measures the volume left in the gas bottles. See also
Measurement information fields below.
Start/Stop Starts regulation for the selected gas or stops any activity.
7-73
Gas Service Program, Continued
Touch-keys
Fields
Field Explanation
Gas regulation ”Idle”,
state “Regulating” (supplying the selected gas),
“Rampdown” (decreasing gas flow after having touched
“Decrease….”,
“Volume_measurement”, and
“Valve_open”.
Selected gas Indicates the selected gas.
Flow setpoint Indicates the target gas flow.
Actual flow Indicates the actual gas flow.
If “Flow setpoint” is set using “Increase..” and
“Decrease..” the actual flow is close to the setpoint.
In case “Open valve” is touched the actual flow is
proportional to the pressure in the selected gas cylinder. A
typical flowrate for a full cylinder is 240 mL/sec.
Valve actual duty Actual duty cycle of the driver signal for the selected
cycle valve.
Transducer actual Actual output from the pressure transducer.
voltage
Transducer offset Offset voltage for the pressure transducer (output from the
voltage transducer when no overpressure is present).
Gas bottle volume Indicates the volume left in the cylinders. As long as the
output pressure of the pressure regulators is 1 bar (pressure
in the gas cylinder > 1.0 bar) the volume of the gas
cylinders is displayed as 100%.
The output pressure starts to decrease when approximately
6% of the volume is left, thus the indication will jump
from 100% to 6%.
5% corresponds to a pressure of 1.0 bar
0% corresponds to a pressure of < 0.5 bar.
7-74
Waste Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable a check of the performance of the waste
detector.
Screen Layout The Waste Detector screen layout is as follows:
Touch-key Function
Run Initiates a measuring cycle (only available if the detector is
ready).
Interrupt Interrupts an ongoing measuring cycle (it may take up to
120 seconds for the detector to become ready).
7-75
Waste Service Program, Continued
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen. If some
Fields values are missing a measuring cycle has not been performed or is in progress.
Field Explanation
Waste status Indicates the status of the waste bottle; “Not mounted”,
“Empty”, Full”, “Critically full”.
Detector state Indicates if the detector is ready or busy (when not ready,
the waste detector is in progress with a measurement). The
following states may be displayed:
Ready: Detector is idle
Initializing: Measures T_ambient
Heating: Heats the detector (NTC)
Measuring Measures T_high and T_low
(cools down)
Time to ready Indicates remaining time until the detector is ready.
Actual detector Actual output from waste detector [mV].
voltage
Detector Output from detector when at room (ambient) temperature.
T_ambient voltage
Detector T_high Output from detector at first measuring point where the
voltage temperature is high (low voltage).
Detector T_low Output from detector at second measuring point where the
voltage temperature is low (high voltage).
Detector threshold Used for interpretation of T_low - T_high.
The threshold value is calculated on basis of T_ambient
and is thus depending on the ambient temperature.
Detector Slope Expresses the difference (decrease) in temperature between
(T_low - T_high) the two measuring points (voltage increase).
7-76
Software
Overview
Introduction This section describes the service programs that enable the service person to see
the software versions and to perform an upgrade of the software.
It is also described how to call the Windows95 Explorer and the Windows95
Control Panel.

Module Upgrade .............................................................................................. 7-78
Software Versions ............................................................................................ 7-80
Start Windows 95 Explorer.............................................................................. 7-83
Start Windows 95 Control Panel...................................................................... 7-84
Screen Layout The Software program’s main screen layout is as follows:
7-77
Module Upgrade
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable an upgrade of the ABL700 software.
Entry The program is called from the Main Software menu by touching the touch key
Module Upgrade.
Note By touching the Module Upgrade touch-key, the Analyzer is automatically

shutdown with the following screen:
7-78
Screen Layout
Module The screen layout for the Module Upgrade is as follows:
Upgrade
Touch-key The following table describes the touch-keys that can be activated in the Software
Status Upgrade program.
Touch-key Function
Install All Starts a complete upgrade of the ABL700 software. This
does not include Windows95.
Install AU SW Starts an upgrade of the ABL700 AU software.
Install DMS SW Starts an upgrade of the ABL700 DMS PC software.
Restart ABL700 Restarts the ABL700. May be used to skip upgrades and
after the upgrade has been performed.
7-79
Software Versions
Purpose The purpose of this program is to show the actual software versions and to check
the consistency of the DMS PC files.
Entry The program may be called from the Main Service menu.
Screen Layout The Software version screen layout is as follows:
Touch-key Function
Version Check Calls a consistency check of software versions
7-80
Software Versions, Continued

Fields
Field Explanation
DMS Main The software version for the DMS PC
Software
AU Main software The version of the Main software on the Analyzer Control
PCB.
AU System Base The version of the Operating System on the Analyzer
Control PCB.
AU Bootcode The version for the Boot software on the Analyzer Control
PCB.
AU Fluid The software version for the Wet section Control programs
Transport Control on the Analyzer Control PCB.
AU Satellite boot The version of the Satellite Boot software on the Analyzer
software Control PCB.
AU Inlet Module The version of the Inlet Module software.
AU pH/BG The version of the pH/BG Module software.
Module
AU El/Met Module The version of the El/Met Module software.
AU OXI Module The version of the OXI Module software.
7-81
Software Versions, Continued
Consistency The Consistency Check screen layout is as follows:

Check screen
Layout
DMS Software files OK for Version: 0 Build 325
Touch-key Function
S/W Versions Returns to the software version screen

Fields
Field Explanation
Status Gives the actual DMS PC software version in case all
DMS PC files are correct OR a list of files not in
consistence with the DMS PC software.
7-82
Start Windows 95 Explorer
Purpose The purpose of this program is to Start the Windows 95 Explorer.
Note The Explorer must only be used in cases where Radiometer Medical A/S has
suggested a special action performed from this program.
Exit To exit the Explorer, hit the cross at the upper right corner or type “Alt” + “F4” on
the keyboard.
Screen Layout The Explorer screen layout is as follows:
7-83
Start Windows 95 Control Panel
Purpose The purpose of this program is to Start the Windows 95 Control Panel
Note The Control Panel must only be used in cases where Radiometer Medical A/S has
suggested a special action performed from this program, or if it is requested in the
Service Manual
Exit To exit the Control Panel, hit the cross at the upper right corner or type “Alt” +
“F4” on the keyboard.
Screen Layout The Control Panel screen layout is as follows:
7-84
Electrode Updatings
Overview
Introduction The purpose of this program is to provide either a printout or a file including the
electrode updatings (e.g. mV or pA values).

Electrode Updatings ......................................................................................... 7-86
7-85
Electrode Updatings
Purpose The purpose of this program is to provide either a printout or a file including the
electrode updatings (e.g. mV or pA values).
The data can be used for drawing the response curves for the individual electrodes.
Entry The program may be called from the Service Menu screen.
Screen Layout
Touch-keys The table below explains the function of the touch-key:
Touch-key Function
7-86
Electrode Updatings, Continued
Check Boxes The table below explains the function of the check boxes.
Check Box Explanation

Print electrode Includes a printout of the electrode updatings on the
updatings printout of the results.
The electrode updatings will only be printed in case the
analyzer has been setup for automatic printout of the
results for the activity in question, patient, QC, or
calibration.
Write electrode Creates a file with the electrode updatings and saves it on
updatings to file the hard disk under the following name:
C:\ABL700\ElecUpd.csv
In case a file already exists on the hard disk, the following
dialog box appears (when checking the box):
Overwrite: Replaces the existing file with a new

Append: Adds the new data to the existing file.
7-87
Options
Overview
Introduction The purpose of this program is to enable the service person to install option keys
and configure the analyzer. Installed option keys and the analyzer configuration
may also be viewed using the program. In addition, the program indicates the
status of demo keys.

Options Service Program ................................................................................. 7-89
7-88
Options Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to enable:

· Installation of option keys, either by scanning bar codes or from a disk
· Configuration of the analyzer by enabling or disabling options and parameters
· Change of the analyzer type in accordance with the configuration.
Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
New Option Changes to the screen where it is possible to install a new
option.
Please note that it may take up to eight minutes for the
analyzer to decrypt the bar codes and thus make the new
option available.
On/Off Enables or disables the selected option or parameter.
7-89
Options Service Program, Continued
Touch-keys
Update Type Causes the analyzing unit to reboot and change analyzer
type (ABL7XX) in accordance with the combination of
enabled options and parameters.
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen
Fields
Field Explanation
Option Name of the installed options.
Parameter Name of the possible parameters.
Enabled Indicates if the installed options or parameters are enabled
(available for the user).
NOTE:
In case the number of enabled electrolyte parameters
exceeds the number of parameters available (installed
option keys), the analyzer will indicate “Parameter not
installed” and “……” instead of measured values for all
electrolyte parameters.
Status Indicates whether the option is on “Demo” or “Installed”.
The latter indicates that the option has been purchased and
thus permanently installed.
Expire Only valid for options on demo.
Indicates how many days left of the demo period.
7-90
Options Service Program, Continued
New Option The layout of the New Option screen is as follows:

Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
Read from disk Causes the analyzer to read the new option from the disk
(used if the option has been e-mailed and then loaded onto
a disk).
Alternatively, the option may be scanned in (used if the
option has been sent as a piece of paper with bar codes)
Back Returns to the Options screen.
7-91
Service Test
Overview
Introduction The purpose of the Service Test program is to enable the service person to verify
that the analyzer recognizes all installed modules and features, to perform a
comprehensive self-test, to perform the service test, and to transfer test results to a
disk.
The service test program is also used as part of the module installation test
procedure.

Service Test Program ....................................................................................... 7-93
7-92
Service Test Program
Purpose The purpose of the Service Test program is to enable the service person to perform
the service test and to document the results if required.
Screen Layout
Touch-key Function
2 Point Calibration Calls a 2 point calibration. The calibrations may also be
called in the normal operating mode as is the case for the
tHb calibration and the quality control measurements.
Print Provides a print-out of the service test report.
From software version 3.60 the printout includes the 10
QC results from the reproducibility tests together with an
evaluation of the results.
7-93
Service Test Program, Continued
Touch-keys
Store Info. Changes to the store info. screen overleaf.
This function may be used in connection with all service
visits. For further information please refer to the paragraph
“Service Disk” and “Service Test” in Chapter 5.
Information The table below explains (where necessary) the information on the screen
Fields
Field Explanation
Listing on the left Provides a list of activities, which must be performed upon
side of the screen completion of the service before the analyzer can be taken
(Status) into use.
A “?” indicates that the activity either has not been
performed or the results have not been accepted.
An “OK” means that the results have been accepted.
The two lines with "5 QC..." were included in software
version 3.60.
Listing on the right Gives a short description of what needs to be done in
side of the screen connection with the service test.
7-94
Service Test Program, Continued
Store Info.
Screen Layout

(Data Entry
Screen) Touch-key Function
Store Info. Stores the service test results on a floppy disk.
For further information please refer to the paragraphs
“Service Disk” and “Service Test” in Chapter 5.
Data Entry The table below explains the function of the touch-keys.
Fields
Field Explanation
Service Reason. Check the main reason for the service visit.
Service Type your name.
Technician.
Customer Key in the information. The information in this field is
Identification stored on the hard disk and need only to be keyed in once
(in connection with the installation of the analyzer).
7-95
Parts
Overview
Introduction The purpose of this program is to provide a listing of the major modules and
components including part numbers, serial numbers, and installation dates.

Parts List Service Program............................................................................... 7-97
7-96
Parts List Service Program
Purpose The purpose of this program is to:

· provide a listing (parts list) of the major modules and components including part
numbers, serial numbers, and installation dates.
· enable the engineer to update the configuration list in case any of the modules
and components are replaced.
Screen Layout
Touch-keys The table below explains the function of the keys:
Touch-key Function
Arrows Used for viewing the hidden part of the list.
7-97
Parts List Service Program, Continued
Update of Parts In case a module or component is replaced the parts list must be updated by
List, Scanning scanning the bar code on the replacement part.
Please note that the analyzer will automatically update the list with part and serial
numbers for complete modules during startup.
Update of Parts The same information may instead be keyed-in via the internal or an external
List, Keyboard keyboard.
The syntax for entering/updating a part on the parts list is:
New Part Installed Update Parts List

902-454R0025N0002 Type: “90245400250002” and press “Enter”. The
Inlet Module PCB software automatically adds the name and date.
Parts in Parts The following parts may be entered into the list:
List
Code Name
902-442 Inlet Module
902-454 Inlet Module PCB
902-452 Fluidic Module
902-436 Fluidic Module PCB
902-451 Gas Module
902-444 Printer Unit
910-225 DMS-PC
910-227 Power Supply
902-441 Basic unit
902-434 Oximetry Module
908-534 Hemolyzer
902-458 Lamp Unit
908-533 Spectrometer
902-463 Oximetry Module PCB
902-443 AutoCheck Module
902-541 AutoCheck Module PCB
902-439 El/Met Module
902-502 Bottle Illumination L
902-456 El/Met Module PCB
7-98
Parts List Service Program, Continued
Parts in Parts 902-438 pH/BG Module

List (continued)
902-455 pH/BG Module PCB
902-450 Analyzer Control PCB
902-503 Bottle Illumination R
7-99
ABL700 Series Service Manual 8. Module Description
8. Module Description
Overview
Introduction This Chapter describes the modules of the analyzer both with respect to mechanics,
optics, and electronics.

Introduction...................................................................................................... 8-2
pH/BG, El/Met, and Thermostatted Blind Modules ........................................ 8-10
OXI Module ..................................................................................................... 8-17
Inlet Module..................................................................................................... 8-27
Fluidic Modules ............................................................................................... 8-37
Gas Module/Analyzer Control ......................................................................... 8-43
Printer Module ................................................................................................. 8-57
PC Module ....................................................................................................... 8-60
Power Supply ................................................................................................... 8-70
8-1
8. Module Description ABL700 Series Service Manual
Introduction
Overview
Introduction This section gives an overview of (introduction to) the build-up and function of the
mechanics, optics, electronics, and software

Wet Section ...................................................................................................... 8-3
Electronics and Communication ...................................................................... 8-5
Software ........................................................................................................... 8-8
8-2
Wet Section
Introduction This paragraph gives a simplified block diagram of the Wet Section including a
brief description of the major functions performed by the individual modules
Block Diagram The figure below is a simplified block diagram:

Gas Unit
pH/BG El/Met
Module Module OXI Module
Inlet Pre
Module heater
Fluidic Module left Fluidic Module right
Module This paragraph describes the major functions performed by each Module
Function
Description Part Main Function
Inlet Module Positions the inlet tube for aspiration of sample from a
syringe or capillary.
Preheats the sample.
Monitors the position of the two inlet flaps and the cover
for the wet section.
AutoCheck Equilibrate the QUALICHECK solution.
Module
Break the ampoules open.
Position the broken ampoule accross from the inlet prior to
aspiration.
8-3
Wet Section, Continued
Module
Function Part Main Function
Description Fluidic Module Transports solutions from the bottles to the measuring
(continued) modules.
Transports blood and aqueous solutions from the inlet and
measuring modules to the waste.
Gas Unit Reduces the gas pressure.
Adjusts the flow rate of the selected gas.
Checks for sufficient pressure in gas cylinders.
pH/BG Module Transports samples, calibration gasses, and solutions into
the measuring chamber.
Thermostats the sample to 37.0 °C.
Measures pH, blood gasses and Chloride.
El/Met Module Transports samples and solutions into the measuring
chamber.
Measures electrolytes and metabolites.
OXI Module Transports sample and solutions into the
Hemolyzer/cuvette.
Measures Oximetry parameters.
Preheater Maintain the temperature of the samples and solutions
(Thermostatted during the transportation through the module
Blind Module)
8-4
Electronics and Communication
Introduction This paragraph gives a simplified block diagram of the electronics including a brief
description of the major functions performed by the individual PCBs.
Electronics The figure below is a simplified block diagram where each box is one PCB.
Block Diagram
AutoCheck
Module
Bottle Illumination
and Waste Detector
PCB Function This paragraph describes the major functions performed by each individual PCB.
Description
PC Module
This module is in principle a standard PC including a main board, CD-ROM,
floppy, and hard drives, and an LCD screen with a touch panel. The overall
function is to provide an interface between the operator and the analyzer and to
utilize the data management. It interfaces with the analyzer via the Analyzer
Control PCB, the printer, a bar code reader and optional alpha-numerical keyboard
and mouse. The PC may operate independently of the analyzer (and vice versa)
and the operator controls the analyzer via the PC.
Analyzer Control PCB
The Analyzer Control PCB controls and monitors the entire analyzer via the
distributed CPUs on the various PCBs in the modules. It communicates to the PC
via an RS232 interface and to most electronics via a CAN Bus. The PCB functions
as a communication center and also distributes power from the power supply to all
other PCBs. It directly controls the pumps and valves on the Fluidic Module and
the Bottle Illumination PCBs and the waste detector via an I2C Bus. The PCB also
controls the fans for cooling the measuring modules and the Power Supply. In
addition the PCB includes the barometer and the basic key (and option keys, if
installed).
8-5
Electronics and Communication, Continued
PCB Function Gas Module

Description The overall function of the gas module is to reduce the pressure in the gas bottles
(continued) to 1 bar and to provide a constant flow of the selected gas used during the
calibration of the gas electrodes. The gas module is controlled directly by the
Analyzer Control PCB.
pH/BG and El/Met Modules
The overall function of the modules is to transport the sample, calibration gasses,
and solutions into the measuring chamber and to thermostat the sample to 37 °C.
The PCBs control the valves, pump, and preheater, and they monitor the liquid
sensors. In adition it amplifies and converts the signals from the electrodes. The
PCBs receive their instructions from the Analyzer Control PCB to which they also
transmit the measured results.
Thermostatted Blind Module
This module includes a small PCB including only a preheater for preheating the
solution from the bottles.
Inlet Module
The overall function of the Inlet Module is to position the inlet tube for aspiration
of sample, rinsing the inlet, and for servicing. In addition, it monitors the position
of the two inlet handles and the cover for the wet section, and it preheats the
sample. The PCB controls the motor and preheater and it monitors the position
detectors and the friction applied to the inlet tube.
AutoCheck Module
The overall function of the AutoCheck Module is to equilibrate the AutoCheck
solution, break the ampoule open, and position the broken ampoule accross from
the inlet prior to aspirating the solution. In addition, the module identifies each
ampoule by scanning its barcode and monitors the temperature of the ampoules.
OXI Module
The overall function of the OXI Module is to position the sample in the cuvette, to
thermostat it to 37 °C, to hemolyze it, and to measure its intensity spectrum. The
PCB controls the valve, the halogen lamp, the neon lamp, the hemolyzer, and the
preheater. The PCB monitors the liquid sensor and amplifies and converts the
signals from the photo-array in the spectrometer. The PCB receives its instructions
from the Analyzer Control PCB to which it also transmits the measured results.
Fluidic Module
The overall function of the Fluidic Module is to transport liquids from the bottles
to the measuring modules, and to transport samples and aqueous solutions from the
inlet and measuring modules to waste. The PCB controls the two pumps and eight
membrane valves.
8-6
Electronics and Communication, Continued
PCB Function Printer Module

Description The function of the printer module is to print out the information on the screen.
(continued) The PCB converts the data stream from the PC Module into control signal for the
paper advance motor and the termo heads of the printer unit.
Power Supply
The power supply is a primary switching converter. The input voltage range is
100-240V. The supply produces four supplies distributed throughout the analyzer.
Communication The figure below is a simplified block diagram showing the communication paths.
Block Diagram
AutoCheck
Module
Bottle Illumination
and Waste Detector
Communication As it appears from the above figure three internal communication channels exist.
Channels
TCP/IP
The communication between the PC Module and the Analyzer Control PCB is
carried out via a RS232 channel using the TCP/IP protocol.
CAN Bus
Communication between the Analyzer Control PCB and the distributed CPU based
PCBs is carried out via a CAN Bus interface.
I2C Bus
Communication between the Analyzer Control PCB and the PCBs without a CPU
is carried out via a I2C interface.
8-7
Software
Introduction This paragraph gives a simplified description of the Analyzer software including a
brief description of the major functions of the individual modules.
Illustration The illustration shows the relations between the Analyzer parts:
Modules Analyzing
CAN Bus Unit TCP/IP Measurement View
Wet section Analyzer Control DMS PC

Modules
The illustration shows which software is located on the Analyzer Control and the
modules.
Analyzer Control: Modules:
Boot sector Boot sector
(Is not changed in the lifetime of the module) (Is not changed in the lifetime of the module)
Basic software
(HW test, operating system, flash file system, loader)
Module Application software
Flash disk
Object files, setup files,
control program for transportation of liquids,
log files
Overview The wet section modules work as drivers for pump, valves, liquid sensors, inlet and
Module software data acquisition. Autonomous functions on separate modules include: temperature
regulation, hemolyzer control and lamp voltage.
The boot sector has a permanent content and is stored during production. This
cannot be changed in the field. The boot sector only performs a minimal self-test.
The boot code establishes the communication with the Analyzer Control before the
control passes on to a satellite module, i.e. a locked situation cannot emerge.
Module control is a shared code for all modules, i.e. all functions are implemented
in the same code; the module will know its type and only support relevant
functions. Self-test is performed by the module control.
8-8
Software, Continued
Overview The analyzer control handles the overall transportation of liquids, calculates the
Analyzer raw data, handles the calibration results. Also the barometer and the gas valve are
Control controlled.
software
The boot code gives the control to a binary code that performs a self test, starts the
operating system and the flash file system. The code for the control of the module
is loaded as object files from the flash disk. All code excecution is done from
RAM.
Setup data, calibration and error information and control programs for
transportation of liquids are all files on the flash disk. Possible error logs will also
be on the flash disk.
Communication with the DMS PC takes place through an internet protocol
(TCP/IP) - this enables transfer of files for software update to and from the
Analyzer Control module.
Software updates/installation is transferred via CD to the DMS PC, which
separates the files. Updating of the Analyzer Controller is performed from the
DMS PC whereas updating of the wet section modules takes place from the
analyzer control.
Certain mechanisms exist that ensure consistency so that all of the files belong to
the same main version.
A software version for the Analyzer Control includes the following:
· Software for the wet section modules (hex file).
· Boot strap code for transfer and change of the satellite module software (binary
file).
· Binary area in the Analyzer Control (binary file).
· Object files, control program for transportation of liquids, etc. (binary file).
· Boot strap code for transfer and change of the analyzer control software (binary
file).
DMS PC
The DMS PC software is Windows95 based. This software takes care of the user
interface and is not described in further details here.
8-9
pH/BG, El/Met, and Thermostatted Blind Modules
Overview
Introduction This section describes the pH/BG and El/Met modules both with respect to the
mechanics (wet section) and electronics. As it will appear from the detailed
description the two modules are almost identical and for this reason both modules
are described in this section.
The thermostatted Blind Module which is just a preheater is also described.

pH/BG and El/Met Mechanics ......................................................................... 8-11
pH/BG and El/Met PCBs ................................................................................. 8-12
Thermostatted Blind Module ........................................................................... 8-16
8-10
pH/BG and El/Met Mechanics
Two Module The pH/BG and El/Met modules are almost identical so they are both described in
this paragraph.
Overall The function of the Modules is to:

Function
· Transport the sample, calibration gasses, and solutions into the measuring
chamber.
· Thermostat the sample to 37.0 ±0.15°C (pH/BG Module) and 37.0 ±0.25°C
(El/Met Module) .
Flow Path Please refer to the block diagram on page 8-3.
Function of The table below explains the function of the various components in the mechanical
Parts part (wet section) of the modules.
Part Function
P1 Aspirates sample from the inlet module or other solutions from the
fluidic modules into the measuring chamber when turning counter
clock-wise.
Aspirates gas from the gas unit (pH/BG module only), air (El/Met
module only), rinse solution, or pushes sample and solutions
towards waste (via the inlet) when turning clockwise.
V1_Air Activated to enable aspiration of gas from the gas unit (pH/BG
only), air (El/Met only), or to enable air to escape.
V2_Rinse Activated to enable aspiration of rinse solution.
Lower pH/BG module: Monitors if the sample is homogeneous, if
liquid sufficient sample is introduced, and controls the liquid flow.
sensor
El/Met module: Controls the liquid flow.
Upper Detects when the sample is in position in the measuring chamber.
liquid
sensor
PH1 Passive preheater for preheating the rinse solution obtained via V2.
PH2 Not shown in the wet section block diagram.
Active preheater which thermostats the sample or calibrating
solution in the measuring chamber to 37 ±0.15°C (pH/BG Module)
and 37 ±0.25°C (El/Met Module).
8-11
pH/BG and El/Met PCBs
Two PCBs The pH/BG and El/Met PCBs are identical except for the preamplifiers for the
electrodes. For this reason both PCBs are described in this paragraph.
Details for the two PCBs are given in the table below.
PCB Part No.

pH/BG Module PCB 902-455
El/Met Module PCB 902-456
Circuit/Function
Overview The PCBs are controlled by the Analyzer Control PCB via a digital interface (CAN
bus) and include the following circuits/functions:
· CPU and memory (serial communication, data collection, A/D conversion, etc.)
· Switch mode power supply
· Five galvanically isolated electrode channels
(the reference channel is connected to the pH channel on the pH/BG Module and
to the electrolyte channels on the El/Met Module)
· A/D converter (electrode and temperature regulation signals)
· Valve and motor driver
· Liquid sensor interface
· Temperature regulation
Block Diagram The figure below is a block diagram of the PCB.
Power Supply CAN /

5 x 18 V power
bus
5V
Cl / Lac A/D CPU / Pump

Electrode channel Converter Memory Driver Pump
pCO /Glu
2
Electrode channe
Valve
Driver Valves
pO / Na
2
Electrode channe
Ref / K Lamp
Electrode channe Driver Lamp
PH / Ca Temp. Liquid
Electrode channel Regulation Sensor
Interface
Heat
Sensors
Liquid
NTC
8-12
pH/BG and El/Met PCBs, Continued
Circuit The following is a description of the circuit on the PCB.

Description
CPU and Memory
This part is built up around a 8031 based CPU which includes a number of ports,
timers, internal RAM, and A/D converters. The memory consists of 32 Kb RAM
and 1Mb PROM.
Power Supply
The PCB receives four voltages from the external power supply as follows:
Supply Used for

+24V Valves and pump.
+12V A/D converter.
On basis of the +12V supply the switch mode supply
generates five galvanically isolated supplies, +16V, for the
electrode channels, and a ±5V/A for the analog circuits.
-12V Not used
+5V Digital circuit
Electrode Channels
Each of the five channels (except the reference channel) include the following
circuit:
· Preamplifier, which for the pH, pCO2, Cl, Ca, K, and Na channels, is a voltage
amplifier (gain=10). For the pO2, Glu, and Lac channels the preamplifier
functions as a current to voltage converter.
The polarization voltage for the pO2 channel is -630mV whereas for the Glu and
Lac channels it is +675mV.
· 2.5V reference.
· Multiplexer (selects electrode, 2.5V, or 0V for conversion).
· Analog opto-couplers for transferring the signal to the A/D converter galvanicly
isolated.
The channels are galvanicly isolated from each other and the remaining electronics
of the analyzer.
8-13
Circuit A/D Converter

Description
This circuit consists of:
(continued)
· A multiplexer for selecting the signal to be converted, one of the signals from the
five (four) electrode channels, the NTC and the reference resistor, 0V, and the
2.5V reference.
· A buffer (impedance converter), and
· A 24 bit A/D converter including a serial interface for the CPU.
By having separate reference voltages in the electrode channel and the A/D
converter, the transfer function of the analog opto-coupler may be determined and
compensated for.
Valve and Motor Driver
The valves are pulled by the +24V supply for 25mS and are held by the +5V
supply. The valves include a hard-magnetic material which must be de-magnetized
upon release - the figure below shows both the pulling and release cycle.
Pull Release
Pull signal
Hold signal
The driver for the stepping motor for the pump is controlled by the CPU via an
EPLD. The supply voltage for the motor is +24V.
Liquid Sensor Interface
A LED and a photo-transistor are placed in a black plastic housing situated above
the liquid channel. The devices point at an angle of 45° to the tangent of the
channel. When the channel is empty most of the light is reflected to the photo-
transistor, when full a portion is transmitted into the channel. The light intensity of
the LED (current) may be set to one of 254 levels depending on the efficiency of
the light path. During a calibration of the liquid sensor (channel empty) the light
intensity is increased until the output of the detector circuit (with the photo-
transistor) reaches approximately 2V which corresponds to an output level of
approximately 100 (calibration value). A threshold value is set as close to 60% of
the calibration value as possible. Following the calibration the liquid sensor is
regarded as empty if the output of the detector is above threshold value and as full
if equal to or below.
8-14
Circuit Temperature Regulation

Description
(continued) The temperature in the measuring chambers is regulated to 37 ±0.15°C pH/BG
Module) and 37 ±0.25°C (El/Met Module). The heating device consists of two
power resistors driven via a transistor by a square wave signal where the duty cycle
is regulated. The sensor element is a NTC resistor. The temperature regulation is
based on the ohmic value of the NTC resistor which is compared to a reference
resistor and the time constants of the system.
Connectors The table below gives an overview of the connectors on the PCBs together with the
Overview external devices connected.
Connector pH/BG Module El/Met Module

J1 Power supply and serial communication, CAN bus
J2 Lower liquid sensor
J3 Upper liquid sensor
J4 Temperature regulation and measuring chamber light
J5 Not used
J6 Valve, V1, Rinse
J7 Valve, V2, Air
J8 Pump motor
J9 Chassis
J101 pH electrode Ca electrode
J201 Reference electrode K+ electrode
J301 pO2 electrode Na+ electrode
J401 pCO2 electrode Glu electrode
J501 Cl- electrode Lac electrode
8-15
Thermostatted Blind Module
Function This module consists of a plastic tube which interconnects the flow path of the two
Overview modules to its left and right.
Referring to “Module Installation and Up/Downgrade Procedures” (Chapter 4) the
Thermostatted Blind Module may be installed instead of the El/Met Module and is
always installed at the position between the El/Met and OXI Modules.
The plastic tube goes through a preheater which is thermostatted to 37.0 ±0.5°C.
Circuit The circuit is built-up as an independent PI-regulator. The heating element is a

transistor and the temperature sensor is a NTC resistor which is part of a measuring
bridge.
The circuit is powered but not controlled from the Analyzer Control PCB.
8-16
OXI Module
Overview
Introduction This section describes the OXI Module both with respect to mechanics and
electronics.

OXI Module Mechanics................................................................................... 8-18
OXI Module PCBs ........................................................................................... 8-22
OXI Thermostatted Blind Module ................................................................... 8-26
8-17
OXI Module Mechanics
Function The overall function of the OXI module is to:

· Position the sample in the cuvette
· Thermostat the sample to 37.0 ±0.15°C.
· Hemolyze the sample
· Measure the Intensity spectrum of the sample
· Transmit the measured data to the Analyzer Control Board, where the
calculation of the absorption spectrum will be done.
Warning The OXI module sub-units must not be taken apart. Only the parts listed in the
spare part section may be replaced.
OXI module The illustration shows the OXI module mechanics and principle:
Block Diagram
Spectrometer
Lamp Unit
Spectrometer
OXI Controller PCB
Liquid Sensor Optical Fiber
Lens Neon Lamp
LS
Hemolyzer
Halogen
Lamp
Heater
Valve
Beam splitter
Hemolyzer Unit
Lamp Unit parts The illustration shows the Lamp Unit in an exploded view and a principle diagram:
Halogen lamp adjustment
Halogen Lamp
Beam splitter
Halogen Lamp
Neon
Neon lamp holder
Lamp
Beam splitter (BG 18) acts also as heat filter
8-18
OXI Module Mechanics, Continued
Halogen Lamp This illustration shows the present parts for the halogen lamp.
Parts
Function of The table below explains the function of the Lamp unit.
Lamp Unit
parts Part Function
Halogen Lamp Light source for the optical system is a 4V/4 W halogen
lamp.
Neon Lamp A Neon Lamp is used as a wavelength reference when
calibrating the module with the tHb calibrator or SAT100
blood from the service menu. The Neon Lamp has a very
precise wavelength of 585.25 nm. This is used to detect
and correct any drift on the OXI parts.
Photo diode, heater It is very important that the intensity of the light emitted
and thermistor from the Halogen Lamp is constant regardless of variations
in e.g. the mains voltage and temperature. A photo diode
controls via a circuit on the OXI module PCB the voltage
applied to the lamp. In order to increase the stability of the
light, the temperature of the photo diode is controlled to 45
±0.3°C.
Beam “splitter” As the two lamps are 90o staggered, a beam splitter is
mounted in front of the two lamps in order to transmit light
from both the Halogen and the Neon Lamp through the
cuvette. Light is also transferred to the photodiode. The
beam splitter (BG18) also acts as a heat filter.
Lens Focuses the light on the cuvette
8-19
Hemolyzer Parts The illustration shows the Hemolyzer Unit mechanics.
Nipple for Liquid sensor
Hemolyzer
Piezo elements
Heater Passive Temperature Active Resonator

Resonator Sensor
Function of The table below explains the function of the Hemolyzer unit.
Hemolyzer parts
Part Function
Heater element Thermostatting of the blood sample is carried out by a heat
transistor mounted on the preheater and controlled from
the OXI Module PCB.
Thermistor Measures the temperature at the cuvette. Placed in the
hemolyzer metal block.
Liquid sensor Detects the flow in the cuvette.
Hemolyzer The Hemolyzer Unit includes the glass cuvette which
contains the blood sample and its function is to hemolyze
and to heat the blood sample to 37 ±0.15°C prior to
measurement.
During hemolyzation the walls of the glass cuvette vibrate
at a frequency of approximately 30 kHz generated by two
piezoelectric crystals with resonators. This vibration
ruptures the walls of the red blood cells whereby
hemoglobin is liberated and mixed with intracellular and
extra-cellular liquids, so the sample in the cuvette becomes
optically clear. Only the part of the sample located in the
cuvette (approximately 1 µl) is hemolyzed. The rest of the
sample is not hemolyzed and protects the blood in the
cuvette from mixing with air during hemolyzation. By
means of the valve on the OXI module and the reagent
pump the sample is over-pressured during hemolyzation.
The light output from the hemolyzer is transferred through
an Optical Fibre Cable to the Spectrometer.
8-20
Spectrometer The illustration shows the Spectrometer Unit mechanics and principle:
Parts Spectrometer PCB
Photo Diode Array
Optical slit
Optical Slit
Concave
Holographic
Grating
Concave Grating/mirror
128 Diode Array
Function of The table below explains the function of the Spectrometer unit.
Spectrometer
parts Part Function
Spectrometer The Spectrometer Unit converts the light transferred
through the sample into a continuous spectrum as follows:
Due to the behaviour of light, the beam transferred through
the entrance slit of the Spectrometer is cone-shaped. The
beam is directed to the concave holographic grating/mirror
converting the beam into a continuous spectrum and
focuses it on the photo diode array.
Due to low light intensity it is necessary to measure the
photo diode current immediately before the photo lamp is
turned on (dark current) during each measurement and
calibration, and then when the photo lamp is turned on and
is stable. The dark current is subtracted from the current
measured with the photo lamp on. The resulting current is
then converted into absorption for each of the 128
wavelengths.
Optical Fibre Transfers the light from the Hemolyzer to the
Spectrometer.
8-21
OXI Module PCBs
Function The OXI Module includes the following PCBs

Overview
· OXI Controller PCB
· Lamp Unit PCB
· Amplifier for photo diode array PCB (not replaceable)
· Driver for photo diode array PCB (not replaceable)
Warning The Amplifier PCB and the Driver for array PCB are located in the Spectrometer
Unit and must not be separated from this.
OXI Module The following shows the Block diagram and internal connections in the OXI
block diagram Module:
LS Interface
Diode
Heat interface
Block
Heat interface
CPU / Memory
Hemolyzer/
Neon Driver
Halogen
Lamp Driver
Amplifier
PCB Valve Driver
A/D
Converter
PLD
Timing
Driver
PCB
CAN /
Power Bus
Circuit/Function The OXI Controller PCB is controlled by the Analyzer Control PCB via a digital
overview OXI interface (CAN bus) and includes the following circuits/functions:
controller
· CPU and Memory (serial communication, A/D conversion and data collection)
· A/D converter (Spectrometer signals)
· Halogen Lamp Driver
8-22
OXI Module PCBs, Continued
Circuit/Function · Hemolyzer/Neon Lamp driver

overview OXI
controller · Valve driver
(continued) · Liquid sensor interface
· Temperature regulation

Description
CPU and Memory
This part is built up around a 8031 based CPU which includes a number of ports,
timers, internal RAM, and A/D converters. The memory consists of 32 Kb RAM
and 1Mb PROM. The circuit also includes three LEDs indicating a possible HW
error on the board. These are described in the troubleshooting section.
A/D converter
The A/D converter converts the analog signal from the Spectrometer. The circuit
consists of a buffer which limits the voltage swing from the spectrometer and adds
a positive offset to the voltage. The voltage is converted in a 12 bit A/D converter
which also includes a serial interface. The serial data is shifted to the data bus
through a shift register.
Halogen Lamp Driver
The Halogen Lamp is driven from a linear regulator supplied from +5 volt. The
Lamp voltage is measured via the CPU A/D converter. Through a DAC the Lamp
output voltage from the regulator is adjusted to 4.00 volt. The intensity from the
lamp is measured by a thermostatted (45 °C) photo diode and the output current
from the diode is part of the regulation circuit for the lamp voltage in order to keep
a constant light output.
Hemolyzer/Neon Lamp driver
This circuit drives both the Hemolyzer and the Neon lamp. This is done from two
different outputs on the transformer in the driver circuit. The frequency of the
driver circuit is controlled via a phase locked loop. When the Neon lamp needs
power the frequency of the driver circuit is tuned to the parallel resonance of the
hemolyzer in which case the current in this is almost zero. During hemolyzation
the Neon Lamp is turned off by an electrical switch and the frequency is adjusted
to the serial resonance of the hemolyzer. The applied power to the hemolyzer can
also be controlled. While the first part of the sample is passing the cuvette, low
power is applied to the hemolyzer to remove any air bubbles stucked in the
cuvette.
During an OXI Complete test it is checked if the hemolyzer can actually hemolyze.
This is done by applying an increasing power (which is checked to be within
specified limits) to the unit, until micro bubbles are created. This is checked by
looking at the absorbances in the spectrometer.
8-23
Circuit Valve driver

Description
The valve driver circuit consists of a one-shot which gives a pull pulse of 24 volt in
(continued)
50 mSec. A voltage of nominal 4.3 volt is applied to hold the valve
Liquid Sensor Interface
A LED and a photo-transistor are placed in a black plastic housing situated above
the liquid channel. The devices point at an angle of 45° to the tangent of the
channel. When the channel is empty most of the light is reflected to the photo-
transistor; when full, a portion is transmitted into the channel. The light intensity of
the LED may be set to one of 256 levels depending on the efficiency of the light
path. During a calibration of the liquid sensor (channel empty), the light intensity
is increased until the output of the detector circuit (with the photo transistor)
reaches a level in the range from 1.1 to 2.5V (calibration value). If the value cannot
exceed 1.0 V an error message is sent. A threshold value is set to 40% of the
calibration value. Following the calibration the liquid sensor is regarded as empty
if the output of the detector is above threshold value and as full if below.
Temperature Regulation
The temperature in the Hemolyzer is regulated to 37 ±0.15°C. The heating device
consists of a power transistor. The sensor element is a NTC resistor. The
temperature regulation is based on the ohmic value of the NTC resistor which is
compared to a reference resistor and the time constants of the system.
The temperature of the Spectrometer is not regulated, only measured by a
thermistor placed in the Spectrometer.
Power Supply
Supply Used for

+24V Valve, Hemolyzer, Neon Lamp and for thermostatting the
photodiode.
+12V and -12V A/D converter.
On the basis of the ±12V supply the switch mode supply
generates a +5V/A, +10V and a -8V for the analog circuits.
+5V Digital circuit and Halogen Lamp
8-24
Connectors The table below gives an overview of the connectors on the Controller PCB
Overview together with the external devices connected.
Connector Used for

J2 Lamp Unit
J3 Neon Lamp
J6 Hemolyzer
J7 Hemolyzer Heater
J8 Hemolyzer Temperature Sensor
J10 Spectrometer
J11 Liquid Sensor
J12 Valve
Lamp Unit PCB The Lamp Unit PCB is located on the Hemolyzer
The PCB includes the Photo diode for controlling the light intensity of the Halogen
Lamp. The photo diode is heated by four resistors and the temperature is measured
with a thermistor.
Driver for array This PCB is located in the spectrometer and must not be replaced.
PCB
The PCB includes circuit for clocking the Photo Diode Array and buffer circuit.
It also includes the EEPROM for storage of the Spectrometer wavelength
calibration data and cuvette factor.
Amplifier for This PCB is located in the spectrometer and must not be replaced.
Photo diode
The PCB includes the Photo diode array and an integrator for the diode charges.
Array PCB
Each of the 128 diodes is enabled sequentially. The charge built up over the diode
is shifted out through a shift register. A START pulse starts the shifting of the
diodes. The time between two START pulses gives the exposure time of the
diodes.
To get a good signal/noise ratio the diodes are exposed in steps from 3 mSec up to
384 mSec (double up per step). The reading used for each diode is the one just
before the reading is over the dynamic range. All readings are nominated to the
same exposure time.
8-25
OXI Thermostatted Blind Module
Functional This module consists of a steel tube which interconnects the flow path of the
Overview Thermostatted Blind Module to its left and the Fluidic Module.
The steel tube goes through a preheater which is thermostatted to 37.0 ±0.5°C.
Circuit The circuit is built-up as an independent PI-regulator. The heating element is a

transistor and the temperature sensor is a NTC resistor which is part of a measuring
bridge.
The circuit is powered but not controlled from the Analyzer Control PCB.
8-26
Inlet Module
Overview
Introduction This section describes the Inlet Module both with respect to the mechanics (wet
section) and electronics.

Inlet Module..................................................................................................... 8-28
Inlet Module PCB ............................................................................................ 8-34
8-27
Inlet Module
Overall The function of the inlet module is to:

Function
· Position the inlet probe for aspiration of sample from a syringe or capillary, for
rinsing either of the two inlets, and for servicing.
· Preheat the sample.
· Monitor the position of the two inlet handles.
· Monitor the position of the cover for the wet section.
Flow Path Please refer to the block diagram in the description of the wet section in the
Introduction section.
Inlet Washer The figure below is a cross-section of the inlet washer:
Waste tube
Capillary Inlet
Waste tube
Syringe Inlet
8-28
Inlet Probe The inlet probe has the following positions:

Positions
No. Physical Position Function
1 Service position (inlet probe is outside
the washer).
For removing the inlet probe and/or
inlet washer.
The probe withdraws to this position
when both flaps are removed.
2 For rinsing the inner part of the inlet

washer.
3 READY position.
For aspirating sample from a capillary
tube and for rinsing the capillary inlet.
For equalizing the pressure in the flow
path with that of the surroundings.
4 For rinsing the syringe inlet.
5+ Probe further out For aspirating sample from a syringe.
8-29
Positioning of The system for positioning the inlet probe is shown in the block diagram below.
Inlet Probe
End stop Springs Hall
element
Stationary part
Motor Magnet
Photo
Detector
Narrow point Inlet
in washer Probe Ruler
The inlet probe is driven by a stepping motor and a toothed bar. This enables
manual movement of the system when power is switched off. The probe is moved
in steps of 0.125 mm.
The positioning mechanism has two detectors:
· A photo detector mounted at the rear end of the moving part detects fixed
mechanical reference points on the ruler which is attached to the stationary part.
· A friction detector (Hall element) detects the friction when moving the inlet
probe. The front end of the inlet probe is ball shaped and has a larger diameter.
The inlet washer has three narrow points (diameter is smaller than that of the
ball). Thus when the ball moves through the washer an increased friction is
measured at these points.
Calibration of The calibration of the inlet is carried out whenever the analyzer is switched on or
Positioning both flaps have been removed and put into place again.
System
During the calibration the following characteristics are determined:
· The sensitivity of the Hall element (how much does the output change when
applying a certain friction (force) to the system). The spring constant is known.
· The exact location of the reference points on the ruler (photo detector)
· The exact location of the narrow points in the inlet washer.
Sensitivity of the Hall element

When determining the sensitivity of the Hall element the motor retracts the moving
system until the end stop of the inlet probe reaches the stationary part. The motor
will then retract the moving system a little further causing the springs to deform
(this will move the magnet away from the Hall element and thus the output from
the Hall element to change).
8-30
Calibration of At a certain point the counter-force from the springs will exceed the torque of the
Positioning motor, which will then lose steps. This is further repeated two times.
System
The figure below shows a typical calibration curve for determining the sensitivity
(continued)
of the Hall element (only two of the three retractions are shown).
1200
Backwards
1000
800
Friction
600
400
200
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
Step
Location of reference point and narrow points in inlet washer

After having calibrated the Hall element (friction detector) the detector may now
be used for determining the location of the narrow points in the inlet washer. This
is done by moving the inlet probe out through the inlet washer and then back again.
The figure below shows typical calibration curves for the inlet system.
900
800
700 Backwards
600
BR
FR
Friction
500
Forwards
400
300
OR1 OR2
200 Photo detector
100
Light Dark
0
105
113
121
129
1
9
17
25
33
41
49
57
65
73
81
89
97
Step
8-31
Calibration of The two upper curves are the friction curves obtained during a calibration when
Positioning moving the inlet forward (lower graph) and backward (upper graph). The three
System tops are caused by the narrow points in the inlet washer. The offset of the two
(continued) curves is caused by mechanical slack in the system and is compensated for in the
software.
The lower graph is generated by the photo detector.
The purpose of the calibration is to determine the exact location of the hole for the
capillary inlet in the particular inlet washer in relation to the fixed reference points
on the ruler. The hole for the capillary inlet is located exactly halfway between two
narrow points in the inlet washer (denoted by “BR” and “FR”).
The inlet moves relatively to the reference points (“OR1” and “OR2”) and
whenever the reference points are passed the physical and relative positions are
synchronized to eliminate lost steps, if any.
Inlet Handles The inlet has two handles, one for the capillary inlet and one for the syringe inlet.
The two handles are interlocked so that only one handle at the time may be opened
to select aspiration from one of the sampler inlets. Both inlet handles may be
removed for cleaning or replacement - a removed inlet handle is interpreted as an
open inlet handle.
The detection of the position of the inlet handles, closed or open (or removed), is
carried out by Hall effect sensors in the stationary part - the Hall effect sensors are
manipulated by magnets situated in the inlet handles.
The inlet handles do not seal the inlets (this is taken care of by the inlet probe).
Temperature The inlet module includes an active preheater which the sample passes through
before it is transported into the measuring modules. The temperature of the
preheater is regulated to 37 ±0.2°C.
8-32
Inlet Module This figure shows the inlet module.
Rubber tube
Inlet washer
Stepping
Syringe Motor
handle
Capillary Preheater
handle
Inlet
Probe
8-33
Inlet Module PCB
Circuit/Function The PCB is controlled by the Analyzer Control PCB via a digital interface (CAN
Overview bus) and includes the following circuits/functions:
· CPU/Memory (communication, control, and A/D conversion)
· Motor Driver
· Temperature Regulation
· Cover Off Detector
· Power Supply
· Pickup Amplifier for position and friction detector
(the detectors are mounted on the Inlet Pickup PCB)
· Flap Detector, on separate PCB
Block Diagram The figure below is a block diagram of the Inlet Module PCB.

Description
CPU and Memory
This part is built up around a 8031 based CPU. The memory consists of 32 Kb
RAM and 256Kb PROM (of which only 64 Kb may be addressed at a time).
A/D Converter (CPU)
The A/D conversion of the various signals from the temperature regulation and
inlet pickup is carried out directly by the CPU.
Motor Driver
The driver for the stepping motor for moving the inlet tube is controlled by the
CPU via an EPLD.
8-34
Inlet Module PCB, Continued
Circuit Temperature Regulation

Description
The temperature of the inlet preheater is regulated to 37 ±0.2°C. The heating
(continued)
device is a power resistor driven via a transistor by a 50 kHz square wave signal
where the duty cycle is regulated. The sensor element is a NTC resistor (6.1 kW at
37°C). The temperature regulation is based on the ohmic value of the NTC resistor
(compared to a reference resistor) and the time constant of the system.
Cover Off Detector
The switch (reed contact) which detects if the cover above the wet section is
opened or removed is connected directly to the CPU. The cover must be closed to
ensure the temperature regulation.
Power Supply
Designation Voltage Used for

+24V +24 ±1.2 V Supply for motor and heating element
+12V +12 ±0.6 V Generation of:
+5V/A +5 ±0.030 V Supply for
analog circuit
+5VREF +5 ±0.010 V Reference for
temperature
regulation
+2.5VREF +2.5 ±0.020 Virtual
V ground for the
Inlet Pickup
amplifier
-12V -12 ±0.6 V Not used
+5V 5.2 ±0.050 V Supply for digital circuit
GND 0V Ground
Pickup Amplifier
The pickup amplifier circuit has a variable gain and offset, and amplifies the signal
from the Hall effect sensor. The output of the amplifier is a measure of the friction
encountered when moving the inlet tube (through the inlet washer and when
reaching the plunger of a syringe). The gain and offset of the amplifier is set during
the calibration of the inlet system (once every 24 hour, when power is switched on,
and upon replacement of the inlet washer).
8-35
Inlet Module PCB, Continued
Connectors The table below gives an overview of the connectors on the PCB together with the
Connector For
J1 Analyzer Control PCB, Power and CAN bus
J2 Inlet Pickup PCB (Hall element)
J3 Flap position switches
J4 Motor
J5 Cover off switch
J6 Pre-heater
J6(1,2): NTC resistor
J6(5,6): Power resistor (140W)
8-36
Fluidic Modules
Overview
Introduction This section describes the Fluidic Modules both with respect to the mechanics (wet
section) and electronics.

Fluidic Module, Left ........................................................................................ 8-38
Fluidic Module, Right ...................................................................................... 8-39
Fluidic Module PCB ........................................................................................ 8-41
8-37
Fluidic Module, Left
Function The function of the left fluidic module is to transport aqueous solutions from the
bottles to the measuring modules and to transport blood and aqueous solutions
from the inlet and measuring modules to the waste.
Build-up The left fluidic module consists of a plastic case where the flow path is built-up by
bottle connectors (two for solution bottles and one for the waste container) and
tubing.
The drawing below gives an exploded view of the module without tubing.
8-38
Fluidic Module, Right
Overall The function of the right fluidic module is to transport solutions from the bottles to
Function the measuring modules, and to transport blood and aqueous solutions from the inlet
and measuring modules to the waste.
Mechanical The figures below show the mechanical layout of the module and the location of
Layout the various parts. Please not that two versions exist - the upper drawing shows the
original version plastic part including the integrated clear plastic tube connectors
whereas the lower drawing shows the new version including black tube connectors.
V8 V7
P1 V5 V6 P2
V4
V3 V2 V1
Bottle connectors
8-39
Fluidic Module, Right, Continued
Function of The right fluidic module consists of a transparent fluid unit including all flow lines
Parts and four bottle connectors. To select the flow path and control the flow it includes,
in addition, eight membrane valves and two tubing pumps.
The left-most tubing pump has two pump tubes with a larger inner diameter than
the other pump tubes.
Part Function
V1 Pulled to enable supply of cleaning solution to the wet section.
V2 Pulled to enable supply of Cal2 solution to the wet section.
V3 Pulled to enable supply of Cal1 solution to the wet section.
V4 Not used.
V5 Not used.
V6 Pulled to enable supply of rinse solution the wet section.
V7 Pulled to enable supply of air to the wet section.
V8 Pulled to enable flow to the waste (used when the sample is transported
into the measuring modules).
Please note that the membrane in V8 is different from the other valves.
P1 Waste pump. Includes two tubes. It aspirates from the inlet and
transports solutions and sample to the waste container.
Pump direction is always counter clockwise.
P2 Solution supply pump. Includes one tube. Transports solutions from the
bottles to the measuring modules and solutions from the measuring
modules to the waste container (when the sample is transported into the
measuring modules).
Pumps in both directions.
8-40
Fluidic Module PCB
Circuit/Function The PCB is controlled directly by the CPU circuit on the Analyzer Control PCB
Overview via a I2C bus and includes the following circuits/functions:
· Valve drivers
· Motor drivers
· Connection to Bottle Illumination PCBs and Waste Detector
Two Versions Two versions of the PCB exists. The difference concerns the layout of the PCB
and location of connectors for the valves.
Please refer to Chapters 8 and 10 for details.
Block diagram The figure below is a block diagram of the PCB.
(waste Detector)
Bottle Ilumination PCB`s
Control PCB
Analyzer
Valve Driver Pump

Driver
V8
V7
V6
V5
V4
V3
V2
V1
P1
P2
Circuit Valve Driver

Description
The valves are pulled by the +24V supply for 25mS and are held by the +5V
supply. The valves include a hard-magnetic material which must be de-magnetized
upon release - the figure below shows both the pulling and release cycle.
Pull Release
Pull signal
Hold signal
Motor Driver
The drivers for the stepping motors for the pumps are controlled via EPLDs. The
supply voltage for the motors is +24V.
8-41
Fluidic Module PCB, Continued
Circuit Power Supply

Description
The PCB receives three voltages from the Analyzer Control PCB as follows:
(continued)
Supply Used for
+24V Valves and pumps.
+12V Waste Detector
+5V Digital circuit
Connectors The table below gives an overview of the connectors on the PCBs together with the
Connector For
J1 Valve V1, Cleaning solution
J2 Valve V2, Cal2 solution
J3 Valve V3, Cal1 solution
J4 Valve V4, Not used
J5 Valve V5, Not used
J6 Valve V6, Rinse solution
J7 Valve V7, Air
J8 Valve V8, Waste
J10 Pump P2, Solution Pump
J11 Pump P1, Waste Pump
J30 Bottle Illumination PCBs and Waste Detector
J100 Analyzer Control PCB
8-42
Gas Module/Analyzer Control
Overview
Introduction This section describes the Gas Module and Analyzer Control PCB both with
respect to mechanics and electronics.

Gas Module ...................................................................................................... 8-44
Analyzer Control PCB ..................................................................................... 8-45
8-43
Gas Module
Overall The function of the gas module is to:

Function · Reduce the gas pressure
· Adjust the flow rate of the selected gas
· Check for sufficient pressure in gas cylinders
Block Diagram The figure below is a block diagram of the gas module.
Pressure Transducer
Flow resistor
pH/BG Gas
Rinse
1 2
Pressure
Regulators (1 bar out)
Proportional
Valves
Functional The gas module consists of two gas cylinders with pre-mixed gasses used for
Description calibration of the gas electrodes. Each gas cylinder is mounted directly on a
pressure regulator, which reduces the output pressure to approximately one bar.
The proportional valves are valves for which the aperture, and thereby the output
flow, may be adjusted by changing the duty cycle of the driver signal. The output
flow is regulated so that the gas module always delivers a certain amount of gas in
excess of what is consumed by the wet section. The excess gas is passed through a
flow resistor and creates a certain overpressure at the pressure transducer. The
aperture of the valve is regulated until the overpressure is correct. Only one valve
may be opened at the time.
When checking for sufficient pressure in the gas cylinders the valve for the
cylinder to be checked is opened 100% for a short period of time to measure the
overpressure generated when the gas passes through the flow resistor (gas is not
passed to the wet section). If the overpressure corresponds to an output pressure
below 1 bar a message is given to the user.
8-44
Analyzer Control PCB
Circuit/Function The Analyzer Control PCB performs the overall control of the analyzer. It receives
Overview (via an RS232 interface) a command from the PC Module instructing it to e.g.
perform a calibration. The Analyzer Control PCB will then translate the command
into a series of commands to the PCBs in the various peripheral modules. It
communicates with most of the other PCBs via the CAN bus (this concerns the
PCBs which include a CPU themselves). The remaining PCBs and devices are
controlled directly by the CPU on the Analyzer Control PCB.
The PCB includes the following circuits/functions:
· CPU/Memory
· Communication via the CAN bus with the intelligent PCBs
· Communication via RS232 interfaces with the PC Module
· Connection to the Power Supply and power distribution to other PCBs
· Valve and Pump Control
· Fan Control
· Barometer and temperature regulation
· Waste Detector
· A/D converter
· Bottle Illumination
· Basic key interface
· Isolation check circuit
Two Versions The Analyzer Control PCB (with surrounding hardware such as cables, shielding
box, ground clip, and back cover) exists in two versions, 902-450 and 902-625.
From a functional point of view the two versions of the Analyzer Control PCB are
identical. The difference lies in the complexity of the EMC precautions which have
been simplified considerably with the new hardware as follows:
Analyzer Control EMC precautions

902-450 Analyzer Control PCB is placed in a metal shielding box
which is grounded by a clip at the bottom edge.
CAN bus cables for measuring modules include ferrite
coils.
Comm. Cable for printer is shielded.
902-625 Back cover for Gas/Analyzer Control is metalized on the
inner surface.
The new hardware is introduced in Basic Units (902-441) of RUN0168 onwards.
8-45
Analyzer Control PCB, Continued
Block Diagram pH/BG Module

El/Met Module
DMS PC Communi- Future Module
TCP/IP cation and Inlet Module
Reset OXI Module
ID Key AutoCheck Module
CAN Bus
Barometer
Temp. Reg. Valve/ Gas valves
A/D CPU/ Pump
Conver- Memory
Waste Control Fan
ter
Detector Waste
Gas
pressure
Isolation Pumps
Check Valves Fluidic
Module
I2C bus

Description
CPU and Memory
This part is built up around a 80386 based CPU. The memory consists of 4 Mb
DRAM, 4Mb Flash File Array (8bit), and 512 Kb boot FPROM (16 bit) with a 16
Kb protected boot array. The circuit includes an interface used in the production
for testing only.
The PCB includes a master reset function which may reset all the other PCBs.
CAN Bus Interface
The Analyzer Control PCB communicates with the other intelligent PCBs via a
CAN bus. The CAN bus communication is described in chapter 6. The PCBs
concerned are; pH/BG, El/Met, OXI, and Inlet Module PCBs.
RS232 Interface
The Analyzer Control PCB communicates with the PC Module via a RS232
interface. The RS232 communication is described in chapter 6.
Valve and Pump Control
The Analyzer Control PCB controls the valves and pumps on the Fluidic Module
via an I2C-bus. The actual driver circuit is located on the Fluidic Module PCB.
The two valves in the gas module are proportional valves where the output flow is
determined by the duty cycle of the driver signal. These valves are supplied from
the 24V.
Fan Control
The fan in the rear right corner of the analyzer may be set to run at two different
speeds. The fan activity is determined by the power required for heating the
pH/BG and El/Met modules and barometer. If the power required decreases
towards a minimum level it indicates that the temperature inside the analyzer is
increasing towards the maximum temperature and thus the fan starts to run.
8-46
Circuit Barometer
Description
The barometer is factory calibrated at approximately 450 and 750 mmHg whereby
(continued)
the transfer function is determined. These values (production constants K0 and K1)
are stored in the flash memory.
The temperature of the barometer is regulated to enhance its stability - the
temperature is 37°C which is just above the barometers worst case ambient
temperature. The heating device consists of five resistors driven via a transistor by
a square wave signal where the duty cycle is regulated. The regulation is
maintained by a PI regulator.
Waste Detector
The waste detector is connected to the Analyzer Control PCB via the Left Bottle
Illumination and Fluidic Module PCBs. A NTC resistor is thermally coupled to the
upper part of the waste container. A measuring cycle is carried out in connection
with every tenth Rinse and replacement of the waste container as follows:
First the value of the NTC resistor is read (ambient temperature), then the NTC is
heated for 60 seconds after which the heating is turned off. At two specific points
during the cooling down period the temperature is read (high and low). The
difference between the two readings (in mV) indicates how fast the cooling down
takes place (fast = full; slow = empty). The cycle and interpretation is illustrated in
the figure below which shows the temperature of the NTC resistor. As the output
of the detector decreases with increasing temperature the figure would be laterally
reversed if it showed the detector output.
Tamb Thigh Tlow
Full
Empty
Ready Heating Measurement Idle
A/D converter
This circuit consists of:
· A multiplexer for selecting the signal to be converted; gas pressure transducer,
output from the isolation check circuit, barometer, waste detector, NTC from the
barometer, and the 2.5V reference.
· A buffer (impedance converter), and
· A 16 bit A/D converter including a serial interface for the CPU
8-47
Circuit Key interface

Description
The Analyzer Control PCB has an onboard key which identifies the analyzer. It is
(continued)
denoted Basic Key and includes an ID for the key itself, the analyzer ID, and a
watch. The analyzer cannot operate without the basic key.
Some applications (parameters and software features) require an option “key” to
enable the use of the application. The contents of the option key (which is either a
bar code or a file on a disk) is read into the flash file system on the Analyzer
Control PCB. The option keys are from the factory associated to a specific basic
key and can thus only be used with that specific analyzer.
Isolation Check Circuit
This circuit measures the current flowing between the galvanic isolated ground and
the analyzer ground terminals. That is, it measures the leak current which is
present only in case the galvanic isolation is jeopardized. The circuit constantly
monitors the isolation.
Bottle Illumination
This circuit is found on two separate PCBs (Bottle Illumination, left and right).
The circuit is controlled by the CPU on the Analyzer Control and is accessed via
the I2C bus via the Fluidic Module PCB. For each bottle there is:
· A photo detector (IR-LED and photo transistor) which detects if the respective
bottle is in place, and
· Two LEDs for illumination. The LEDs are on when the bottle is in place and off
when the bottle is removed.
Power Supply
The PCB receives four supply voltages which are distributed to the remaining
PCBs along with the CAN bus. The supplies are:
Supply Used for

+24V Valves, pumps, lamps, and heat
+12V Analog circuit (A/D converters etc.) and fans
-12V A/D converter on OXI Module PCB
+5V Digital circuit
8-48
Connectors The table below gives an overview of the connectors on the PCB together with the
Connector For
J1 Power Supply
J2 PC Module, RS232 interface
J3 Not used outside the factory
J10 pH/BG Module PCB, Power and CAN bus
J20 El/Met Module PCB, Power and CAN bus
J30 Future Module PCB, Power and CAN bus
J40 OXI Module PCB, Power and CAN bus
J50 Fluidic Module PCB, I2C bus
Bottle Illumination PCBs (left aft right), I2C bus, and
Waste Detector
J60 Inlet Module and AutoCheck Module PCBs, Power and
CAN bus
J70 Analyzer fan
J71 Power supply fan
J80 Gas Pressure Transducer
J85 Gas Valves
J90 Not used outside the factory
Fuses Overview The table below gives an overview of the fuses on the PCB together with the
supply voltages they protect.
Fuse Value Part No. Supply Voltage

F1 5A 450-142 +5V for digital circuit
F2 1.5A 450-141 +12V for fans and local analog supplies
F3 0.25A 450-140 -12V for A/D converter in OXI Module
F4 5A 450-142 +24V for valves, pumps, heat, and lamps
8-49
AutoCheck Module
Overview
Introduction This section describes the AutoCheck Module both with respect to mechanics and
electronics.

AutoCheck Module PCB.................................................................................. 8-54
8-50
AutoCheck Module
Overall The AutoCheck Module facilitates a fully automated quality control system which
Function will perform quality control measurements according to the set-up without any
operator assistance. The carousel for the quality control ampoules may be loaded
with up to 20 ampoules.
The function of the AutoCheck module is to:
· Scan the bar codes on the ampoules to identify each individual ampoule (level
and lot number)
· Equilibrate (shake) the quality control solution
· Open and close the lid when requested by analyzer or operator
· Lift and lower the housing with carousel prior to and after a quality control
measurement
· Break the selected ampoule
· Position the broken ampoule in front of the inlet probe to enable the aspiration
Functional The table below describes in short the function of the module.
Overview
Stage Description
Filling carousel The operator fills the carousel with ampoules of
different levels in accordance with QC setup.
The carousel is placed in the carousel housing.
Monitoring of When touching Restart the lid closes and monitoring
temperature of the temperature of the ampoules starts.
Reading bar codes The carousel will also start rotating slowly to enable
the bar code reader to read the bar codes of each
individual ampoule. The QC level and lot number is
identified.
Equilibration of QC Equilibration of the QC solution is carried out by
solution repeatedly turning the carousel at a high speed and
then stopped short - this will “shake” the ampoules.
8-51
Functional
Overview Stage Description
(continued) Breaking the The lid slides open and the carousel housing is tilted to
Ampoule its up position. The ampoule to be measured is now
placed at the bottom of the carousel across from the
ampoule actuator which then breaks the ampoule open.
At the same time a cap will be pushed down along the
ampoule to partly cover the bar code making it
impossible to read - such an ampoule will be identified
as unavailable (missing).
Sample Introduction When the ampoule is opened the actuator is released
and the carousel is turned 180 degrees to move the
open ampoule in front of the inlet probe which will
enter the ampoule to aspirate the solution.
Idle After the sample introduction the carousel housing will
be tilted to its down position and the lid will be closed.
Parts The following is a short description of the hardware components in the module.
Description
Motors
The module includes four stepping motors for moving various parts. For each of
the motors the module includes at least one photo detector for verifying the
position of the item moved.
Part Function
Lid Slide This motor slides the lid of the module open prior to the
quality control measurement and closes it again after the
introduction of the solution.
Two photo detectors are used for detecting the position of
the lid and thus for controlling the lid slide motor. The
detectors indicate lid CLOSED, OPEN, “IN BETWEEN”,
or “REMOVED”.
It is possible to manually open or close the lid. When
sliding the lid a little in the desired direction it will be
detected by the photo detectors which will start the motor
to open or close the lid.
The lid will automatically be closed after 15 seconds.
8-52
Parts
Description Part Function
(continued) Carousel Tilt This motor tilts the carousel housing up prior to breaking
an ampoule open and down again after the introduction of
the solution.
Two photo detectors are used for detecting the position of
the carousel housing and thus for controlling the lid slide
motor. The detectors signal housing in the UP or DOWN
positions.
Carousel Spin This motor spins the carousel at a high speed and stops
short repeatedly for equilibration of the quality control
solution. In addition it positions a selected ampoule for
breaking it open and thereafter for aspiration.
One photo detector detects the zero (reference) point of the
carousel - movement of the carousel is made relative to the
zero point.
Ampoule Actuator This motor moves the ampoule actuator for breaking an
ampoule open.
One photo detector detects the zero point for the ampoule
actuator. The zero point is the position where the actuator
is released.
An O-ring at the tip of the breaking tool serves two
purposes; one is to align the ampoule with the tip; the other
is to reduce noise.
Fan The fan draws ambient air through the carousel housing to
“thermostat” the ampoules. In addition it draws air from
the area where the carousel spin motor is located to ensure
that the heat dissipated from this motor does not heat up
the ampoules.
The fan runs continuously.
Laser Scanner
The laser scanner points its beam through a slot in the carousel house to read the
barcodes on the ampoules to identify the level and lot numbers for each ampoule.
For AutoCheck Modules of R0045 onwards the direction of the beam may be
adjusted by tilting the laser scanner. During the adjustment the laser beam is
centered in the slot.
8-53
AutoCheck Module PCB
Circuit/Function The PCB is controlled by the Analyzer Control PCB via a digital interface (CAN
Overview bus) and includes the following circuits/functions:
· CPU/Memory (communication, control, and A/D conversion)
· Motor Drivers
· Temperature Monitor
· Power Supply
· Various position detectors on separate boards, AutoCheck Interface PCB
Block Diagram The figure below is a block diagram of the AutoCheck Module PCB.
Power
CAN /
Supply
power
bus
Lid Move
Temperature CPU / Motor Carousel Tilt
signal Memory Drivers Carousel Spin
Ampoule Actuator
Barcode
Reader
12 V Fan
Lid0 and Lid1

Tilt Up and Tilt Down
Ampoule Zero
Carousel Zero

Description
CPU and Memory
This part is built up around a 8031 based CPU. The memory consists of 32 Kb
RAM and 256Kb PROM (of which only 64 Kb may be addressed at a time).
A/D Converter (CPU)
The A/D conversion of the various signals from the temperature is carried out
directly by the CPU.
Motor Drivers
The drivers for the stepping motors for opening/closing the lid, tilting the carousel
housing, spinning the carousel, and breaking the ampoules are controlled by the
CPU via a PLD.
8-54
AutoCheck Module PCB, Continued
Temperature Monitoring
The absolute temperature of the carousel, and its stability, is monitored by the
CPU. The temperature is measured at the upper centre part of the carousel housing,
which is close to the ampoules. A fan continuously draws ambient air into the
carousel housing.
Barcode Reader
The barcode reader is used for reading the barcode on the ampoules placed in the
carousel. The barcode contains information about the QC level and the Lot
number.
The LED “BC” is connected to the barcode reader - the LED will be lit shortly
when a barcode has been read successfully.
Power Supply

+24 V +24 ±1.2 V Supply for motors and heating element
+12 V +12 ±0.6 V Generation of:
+5VREF +5 ±0.010 V Reference for
temperature
measurement
-12 V -12 ±0.6 V Not used
+5 V 5.2 ±0.050 V Supply for digital circuit
GND 0V Ground
Connectors The table below gives an overview of the connectors on the AutoCheck Module
Overview PCB together with the external devices connected.
Connector Used for

J10 Carousel Interface PCB
Connector Used for
J10 AutoCheck Module PCB
J11 Carousel spin motor
J12 Carousel temp. and zero detector
PCB
8-55
AutoCheck Module PCB, Continued
Connectors
Overview Connector Used for
(continued) J20 Lid Slide motor
J21 Carousel Tilt-up and Lid0/Lid1 Detector PCBs
J30 Carousel Tilt motor
J40 Ampoule Actuator
J41 Carousel Tilt-down, Ampoule-zero, and Fan Interface PCB
Connector Used for
J41 AutoCheck Module PCB
J43 Fan
J50 Barcode Reader
Fuses Overview The table below lists the fuse on the PCB together with the supply voltage it
protects.
Fuse Value Part No. Supply Voltage

F50 0.25 A 450-140 +5V for the laser scanner
8-56
Printer Module
Overview
Introduction This section describes the Printer Module both with respect to mechanics and
electronics.
Contents Printer Unit....................................................................................................... 8-58

Printer Control PCB ......................................................................................... 8-59
8-57
Printer Unit
Function The function of the Printer Unit is to convert the print data from the LPT1 port to
the Thermal printer paper.
Build-up The Printer Unit includes a Thermal Printer and the Printer interface PCB.
The PCB and the Thermal printer are mounted in a detachable plastic case.
Item Function/Type
Thermal printer Seiko LTP 2442
Printable dots per 832
line
Resolution 8 dots/mm
Speed 75 mm/sec
Paper size 112 mm
Sensors Paper out detector, optoswitch
Head-up detector, mechanical switch
Thermo head temperature, thermistor
Illustration The Printer Unit mechanics are shown below:
Paper guide
Thermo Printer
Printer Lid
Printer Console
Printer Control PCB
8-58
Printer Control PCB
Circuit/Function The PCB is controlled directly by the LPT1 port on the main CPU PCB and
Overview includes the following circuits/functions:
· Centronic interface
· Motor driver
· CPU circuit
· Thermal head driver
· Circuit for sensors for Head-Up, Paper-Out and Head temperature
Block diagram The following shows the Block diagram of the printer Unit
Thermo Printer Unit
a a
Motor Thermo Heads Sensors
Printer Control PCB

Centronic Power
Connectors The table below gives an overview of the connectors on the PCBs
Overview
Connector For
J2/CN8 Motor
J4/CN5 Power
J5/CN6 Sensors
J16/CN1 Thermal Head
J19/CN12 Centronic Interface
8-59
PC Module
Overview
Introduction This section describes the PC Module with respect to the electronics.

PC Module Electronics .................................................................................... 8-61
8-60
PC Module Electronics
Function The PC module is the overall control of the ABL700 analyzer and includes the
Overview following circuits/functions:
Floppy disk drive 1.4 MB
CD-ROM drive, 20x or 24x speed
Harddisk 1.4, 2.1, 4.3, 4.8, or 8.1 GB
10.4” Backlit LCD display
Inverter for the backlight.
Touch Panel
Pentium motherboard 133 MHz with 32 or 64 MB RAM
Block Diagram The following shows the Block diagram of the PC Module:
8-61
PC Module Electronics, Continued
Main CPU PCB, The Main CPU PCB exists in two versions as follows:
Two Versions
Part # and type Mounted in PC Modules Mounted in Basic Unit
(910-225) of (902-441) of
902-589, PCM-5890 R0001 - R0081 and R0001 - R0167
R0083 - R0088
902-643, PCM-5896 R0082 and R0168 onwards
R0089 onwards
In addition, the battery and the CPU fan on the two Main CPU PCBs are different.
The sets of cables connecting all devices to the Main CPU PCBs and the Power
Distribution PCBs are also different.
For compatibility of spare parts please refer to the spare parts section.
Overview, Main The PCM-5890 and PCM5896 Main CPU PCBs are all-in-one single board
CPU PCB Pentium computers (equipped with an 133 MHz CPU). They include an on-board
PCI SVGA controller, a PCI Ethernet interface and a PCI expansion slot. As they
are equipped with 64 bits and local bus architecture, the Main CPU PCBs utilize
the Pentium’s full potential and provide unprecedented performance.
On-board features include four serial ports (three RS-232 and one RS-
232/422/485), one parallel port, a floppy drive controller and a keyboard/PS/2
mouse interface. The built-in high speed PCI IDE controller supports both PIO and
bus master modes. Up to two IDE devices can be connected, including large hard
disks, CD-ROM drives, tape backup drives and other IDE devices.
The PCM-5890 includes:
· one slot for Cache RAM (a 256 kb module is connected)
· two 72 pin SIMM sockets for memory (two 16 Mb DRAM modules are used).
The PCM-5896 includes:
· 512 kb Cache RAM onboard
· one 168 pin DIMM socket for memory (a 64 Mb SDRAM module is used).
8-62
Overview, The Display is a 10.4” Backlit TFT (Thin Film Transistor) LCD Display. The
LCD Display backlight consists of two fluorescent lamps placed at the top and bottom.
The LCD display is a color VGA type with 640*480 dots. Communication with the
Main CPU PCB takes place via a serial connection.
Overview, The Touch Panel contains infrared beams that are arranged like an X- and Y-
Touch Panel matrix around a frame-shaped printed-circuit board (refer to the illustration below).
This beam matrix is constantly scanned by the micro-controller. By touching the
screen, for example with a fingertip, a pair of beams is interrupted and that way the
exact position of this touch can be detected. Beams used to detect the X-
coordinates are called “X-beams”, those for the Y-coordinates are called “Y-
beams”. The area within the beam matrix is called “Touch Zone”.
X- beams consist of 41 light emitter diodes and 41 receivers. Y-beams consist of
30 emitter diodes and 30 receivers.
The diodes are placed with a distance of 5 mm, which gives a detection resolution
of 2.5 mm.
Illustration The following picture illustrates the build-up of the touch-screen.

X-Light barriers ---->
<----Y-Light barriers
8-63
Connectors The following tables give an overview of the connectors for the PCM-5890 Main
Overview for CPU PCB.
PCM-5890
On PCM-5890 Main CPU PCB (CPU):
Connector Connected to
CN1 NC (Not Connected)
CN2 NC
CN3 VGA (external VGA monitor, NC)
CN4 TFT display
CN5 CPU fan
CN6 NC
CN7 NC
CN8 Keyboard2 (con)
CN9 NC
CN10 Ethernet (con)
CN11 Pin 1 - 20 COM1 / COM2 (Pow)
Pin 21 - 40 COM3 / COM4 (Con)
CN12 Printer
CN13 Hard disk and CD-ROM drives
CN14 Floppy drive
CN15 Power1 (Pow)
On Connector Board (Con):
Connector Connected to:

Ethernet CN10 (CPU)
Power Power2 (Pow)
RJ45 External network
USB NC
COM3 / COM4 CN11 (CPU)
COM3 Barcode reader
COM4 Serial output
8-64
Connectors
Overview for Connector Connected to:
PCM-5890 Keyboard1 External keyboard
(continued)
Keyboard2 CN8 (CPU)
Mouse External mouse
FDD power Floppy drive
On Power Board:
Power1 If 2.5" hard disk: CN15 (CPU)
If 3.5" hard disk: CN15 (CPU), short end, and
Hard disk power input, long end
(middle connector to "Power1")
Power2 Power (Con)
Powersupply Power supply
Touchpanel COM2 Touch panel
COM1 Analyzer Control PCB
Inverter Inverter Board
Jumper Setting The following table gives the jumper setting for the PCM-5890 Main CPU PCB.
on PCM-5890
Jumper Default Setting Function
J1 Pin 1 and 2 shorted CPU frequency ratio
J2 Open CPU frequency ratio
J3 Pin 1 and 2 shorted CPU voltage
J4 Open CPU voltage
J5 Open Ethernet LED (CRSL)
J6 Open Ethernet LED (BNCL)
J7 Pin 1 and 2 shorted CMOS setup
J8 Pin 1 and 2 shorted Cache type selection
J9 Pin 1 and 2 shorted COM2 RS-232/422/485 selection
J10 Pin 1 and 3 shorted System clock setting
8-65
Jumper Setting
on PCM-5890 Jumper Default Setting Function
(continued) J11 Pin 1 and 3 shorted System clock setting
J12 Pin 1 and 2 shorted System clock setting
J13 Pin 1 and 2 shorted ECP/EPP DMA channel
J14 Pin 1 and 2 shorted ECP/EPP DMA channel
J15 Pin 1 and 3 shorted IRQ selection
J16 Pin 1 and 2 shorted IRQ selection
J17 Pin 1 and 3 shorted Parallel port IRQ selection
J18 Pin 1 and 2 shorted Buzzer enable
J19 Pin 1 and 2 shorted COM2 RS-232/485 selection
J23 Pin 1 and 2 shorted System reset
J24 Pin 1 and 2 shorted Watchdog timer invoke
J25 Pin 1 and 2 shorted Watchdog enable/disable
8-66
Connectors The following tables give an overview of the connectors for the PCM-5896 Main
Overview for CPU PCB.
PCM-5896
On PCM-5896 Main CPU PCB (CPU):
CN1 CPU fan
CN2 NC
CN3 USB
CN4 NC
CN5 Hard disk and CD-ROM drives
CN6 NC
CN7 NC
CN8 Power3 (Pow)
CN9 TFT display
CN10 NC
CN11 Keyboard2 (con)
CN12 VGA (external VGA monitor, NC)
CN13 NC
CN14 Printer
CN15 Ethernet (Con)
CN16 Pin 1 - 20 COM1 / COM2 (Pow)
Pin 21 - 40 COM3 / COM4 (Con)
CN17 Floppy Drive
On Connector Board (Con):
Connector Connected to:

Ethernet CN15 (CPU)
Power Power2 (Pow)
RJ45 External network
USB CN3 (CPU)
COM3 Barcode reader
8-67
Connectors
Overview for Connector Connected to:
PCM-5896 COM4 Serial output
(continued)
Keyboard1 External keyboard
Keyboard2 CN11 (CPU)
Mouse External mouse
FDD power Floppy drive
On Power Board:
Power1 If 2.5" hard disk: NC
If 3.5" hard disk: Hard disk power input, long end
(middle connector to "Power!" and
short end connector loose)
Power2 Power (Con)
Power3 CN8 (CPU)
Powersupply Powersupply
Touchpanel COM2 Touchpanel
COM1 Analyzer Control PCB
Inverter Inverter Board
Jumper Setting The following table gives the jumper setting for the PCM-5896 Main CPU PCB.
on PCM-5896
Jumper Default Setting Function
J2 Open Clear CMOS
J3 Pins 1 and 2 shorted DOC address selection
Pins 3 and 4 shorted
J4 Not used ATX soft-power switch connector
J5 Pins 5 and 6 shorted COM3/COM4 RI pin voltage
selection
8-68
Jumper Setting
on PCM-5896 Jumper Default Setting Function
(continued) J6 Pins 1 and 2 shorted COM2 RS-232/422/485 selection
J7 Pins 2 and 3 shorted LCD clock signal selection
J8 Pins 1 and 2 shorted LCD driving voltage selection
J10 Pins 5 and 6 shorted COM3/COM4 RI pin voltage
selection
J11 Pins 1 and 2 shorted COM2 RS-232/422/485 selection
J12 Not mounted
J13 Pins 1 and 2 shorted CPU Vio selection
J14 Open
J15 Open ATX switch select
Switch Setting The following table gives the switch setting for the PCM-5896 Main CPU PCB.
on PCM-5896
Switch Default Setting Function
S1 1, 3, 4, and 6 on CPU Vcore selection (3.3V)
S3 2, 3, and 6 on CPU frequency ratio
(2x66.8MHz)
8-69
Power Supply
Overview
Introduction This section describes the Power Supply.

Power Supply ................................................................................................... 8-71
8-70
Power Supply
Function The Power Supply supplies voltages for the various modules in the analyzer.
Note No repair is allowed in the power supply, except for replacing the fuses and the
fan.
Build-up The Power Supply is a primary switching converter.

The required input voltage range is 90-264 VAC at 47-63 Hz.
The power supply supplies the following voltages: +24V, +12V, -12V, +5V and a
power good signal.
Block Diagram The following shows the Block diagram of the power supply
Supervisory Power
Circuit Good
INPUT
100-240VAC
Power Factor Isolation 24V

RFI Filter
Correction Transformer Main Output 24V/7A
Step down
Regulator 5.2V/10A
Step down
Regulator 12V/3A
DC/DC
Converter -12V/1A
Specifications The following table gives the specifications for the voltage supplies:
Voltage Specifications
+24 V +24 ±1.2 V, 7 A
+5.2 V 5.2 ±0.050 V, 10 A
+12 V +12 ±0.6 V, 3 A
-12 V -12 ±0.6 V, 1 A
Power good High (TTL) when the above supplies are within ranges
Low if one or more supply is outside range
The voltage range given is independent of the load.
8-71
Power Supply, Continued
External The following diagram shows the external connectors and the table shows which
Connectors voltages are supplied to which receiver.
Connector Function
P1 Connected to Analyzer Control PCB.
Includes all supplies and the power good signal.
P2 Connected to the DMS PC.
Includes the +5.2 V and +12 V supplies.
P3 Connected to the Printer Unit.
Includes the +5.2 V and +24 V supplies.
P4 Connected to the Analyzer Control PCB.
Supplies +12/24 V to the fan in the Power Supply.
8-72
ABL700 Series Service Manual 9. Spare Parts
9. Spare Parts
Overview
Introduction All spare parts available for the ABL700 are listed in this chapter, which also
includes exploded views of the modules to ease the identification of the parts.
The spare parts list specifies to which extend the analyzer may be serviced, as only
the parts listed may be replaced.
When ordering spare parts always include the part number and the description.
Trade-in Parts The parts marked with an asterisk (*) must be returned to RADIOMETER for
replacement. This is to ensure the highest possible reliability of the repaired part.
They will be replaced in accordance with the Trade-in Arrangement for Modules,
with the exception of modules, which have been damaged during attempted repair.
Important The complete modules, Basic Unit (or any of its sub-modules such as the Inlet and
the PC), pH/BG, El/Met, OXI, and AutoCheck Modules are not considered to be
spare parts and cannot be returned to RADIOMETER for credit, repair or
replacement. In case of a malfunction in these modules, troubleshoot the module
and then replace the defective sub-part as listed in the spare parts chapter.
When installing a complete module (in case of an upgrade of the analyzer or a
temporary fix of a problem) and when exchanging any of the parts which are
recognized by the Parts List service program the part number and serial number for
the new part should be entered into the Parts List service program. Please refer
Chapter 7 for information about which parts are recognized.

Basic Unit......................................................................................................... 9-2
pH/BG and El/Met Modules ............................................................................ 9-6
OXI Module ..................................................................................................... 9-10
Fluidic Module, Left ........................................................................................ 9-13
Fluidic Module, Right ...................................................................................... 9-14
Inlet Module..................................................................................................... 9-17
PC Module ....................................................................................................... 9-22
Tubing Diagram ............................................................................................... 9-24
9-1
9. Spare Parts ABL700 Series Service Manual
Basic Unit
Introduction This paragraph lists the spare parts available for servicing the Basic Unit.
In Basic Units of Run 168 onwards a change of hardware was introduced. The
change concerns the PC Module (see separate paragraph) and the Analyzer Control
PCB with surrounding hardware. New and earlier parts cannot be interchanged for
which reason a compatibility table has been added at the end of the listing of
available spare parts.
Spare Parts The "Ref. No." refers to the exploded views on the following sheets.
Available
Ref. No. Part No. Quantity Description
011-010 3 Allen Screw M3x15 mm, lens head
367-673 1 Basic Key
367-681 * Service Key (used as a temporary fix in
case the Basic Key becomes defective)
450-035 1 Fuse for 636-389, 4A time lag
450-040 2 Primary Fuse, 4A fast acting
450-140 1 Fuse with holder, 0.25A
450-142 2 Fuse with holder, 5A
580-180 1 Fan for 910-227
580-171 1 Fan, right side
924-073 1 Fan Filter
617-940 Cable for 910-223
636-449 1 Printer head cable, 16 wires
636-364 1 Power/Communication Cable, Inlet and
AutoCheck Modules
636-377 1 Power/Communication Cable, Fluidic
Module
636-378 1 Cable for Bottle Illumination PCBs
636-381 1 Cable for DMS PC
636-386 1 Cable for Pressure Transducer
636-387 1 Cable for Gas valves
636-389 1 Power Cable with Fuse, Printer
9-2
Spare Parts Ref. No. Part No. Quantity Description

Available
835-305 1 (0) O-ring ø5.3x2.4 for 910-237 (see note)
(continued)
835-449 1 O-ring ø10x3 for 910-237
835-473 7 O-ring for Bottle Detector Windows
837-045 0 Replaced by 835-449 and 835-305
855-149 2 Front foot (R1-236)

855-151 2 Rear foot (R1-236)
855-156 4 Foot, front and rear (R237 onwards)
886-430 1 Display Frame
886-431 1 Left Side Gable
886-432 1 Mounting Base
886-436 1 Blind panel for AutoCheck compartment
886-438 1 Wet Section Cover
886-439 1 Door for Wet Section Cover
886-441 1 Back Cover for PC and Power Modules
886-480 1 Divided Front Covers (two short covers;
used with the AutoCheck Module)
886-483 1 Front Cover (one long cover)
888-511 1 Grounding strap, three-fingered
888-560 Ground Strap, 0.5 m, self-adhessive
902-496 1 Waste Detector
834-224 1 Rubber cap for 902-496
878-103 1 Securing device for 902-496
902-502 1 Bottle Illumination, left
902-503 1 Bottle Illumination, right
902-505 1 Flow Regulator GAS2 w. valve
902-516 1 Flow Regulator GAS1 w. valve
902-535 1 Printer Control PCB
902-605 1 Press. Transducer Unit w. Chassis
(includes 910-237)
902-620 1 Printer Housing (case and lid)
910-223 1 Bar Code Reader
924-260 Holder for 910-223
9-3

Available
910-227 1 * Power Supply
(continued)
978-802 1 Back Panel for 910-227
910-237 1 Pressure Transducer
910-239 1 Printer Unit
Compatibility Table:
Part No. Description R1 - 167 R168 -

902-450 * Analyzer Control PCB ü
902-625 * Analyzer Control PCB ü
636-363 Power/Communication Cable, pH/BG 1) ü
636-363 Power/Communication Cable, El/Met 1) ü
636-363 Power/Communication Cable, Blind 1) ü
636-423 Power/Communication Cable, OXI 1) ü
2)
636-415 Power/Communication Cable, pH/BG ü
2)
636-415 Power/Communication Cable, El/Met ü
636-415 Power/Communication Cable, Blind 2) ü
636-415 Power/Communication Cable, OXI 2) ü
636-390 Communication Cable, Printer, shielded ü
636-414 Communication Cable, Printer ü
886-440 Back Cover for Gas Module ü
886-440 Back Cover for Gas Module, metalized ü
924-140 Shielding box for 902-450 ü N/A
Various Isolation foil, threaded stand-offs, and ground ü N/A
strap for 902-450 and 924-140
1) With ferrite coil

2) Without ferrite coil
* Included in Trade-in Arrangement
9-4
Exploded View This figure shows the Basic Unit in an exploded view for identification of panels.
886-430
886-439
886-438
886-431
886-441
886-440
886-437
Note Regarding The aluminium housing for the pressure transducer has been changed to reduce the
835-305 dead space around the pressure transducer. This renders the O-ring, 835-305,
superfluous in the new housing.
The new housing is introduced in 901-441 of Run 187 onwards.
The old and new housings are illustrated below.
9-5
pH/BG and El/Met Modules
Introduction This paragraph lists the spare parts available for servicing the pH/BG, El/Met, and
Thermostatted Blind Modules.
The production method for the chassis plates (Ref. No. 1) for the modules has
changed from grinding to moulding from the RUNs indicated below. The change
has no influence on the list of available spare parts, but they look slightly different.
pH/BG (902-438): R0187
El/Met (902-439): R0180
Thermostatted Blind (902-532): R0151
Available
1 905-764 1 Electrode Module chassis
1 902-765 1 Electrode Blind chassis
2 902-508 1 Measuring Light/Heat PCB
(2 to 14) 636-384 1 Cable, 902-508 to Module PCB
3 921-483 1 Lens and Prism Unit
4 580-064 1 Stepping Motor
5 816-334 1 Silicone Isolation Plate for 902-465
6 816-336 1 Heat Conductor
7 816-337 1 Heat Conductor
8 834-647 1 Sealing Gasket ø5.5-6.5
9 834-648 5 Sealing ring for Measuring Chamber
10 879-124 Discontinued, replaced by:
924-176 1 Securing Piece for valves
11 902-445 2 Liquid Sensor
12 902-446 1 Measuring Chamber
(12) 008-310 2 Pozidrive Screw M3x10
13 902-448 1 Pump Rotor, Type A
14 902-455 1 * pH/BG Module PCB
14 902-456 1 * El/MET Module PCB
15 902-465 1 Rinse Solution Heater
16 902-474 5 Electrode Connector
(16) 981-624 0.2 Self-adhesive labels (pH/BG parameters)
9-6
pH/BG and El/Met Modules, Continued

Available
(16) 981-625 0.2 Self-adhesive labels (El/Met parameters)
(continued)
17 902-484 1 Membrane Valve, replaced by 902-700
17 902-700 1 Membrane Valve for rinse solution (left)

17 902-546 1 Flat Membrane Valve, replaced by 902-701
17 902-701 1 Flat Membrane Valve for gas/air (right)

(17) 834-221 1 Membrane for membrane valve
(17) 834-222 1 Membrane for flat membrane valve
(17) 876-851 2 Spring for membrane valves
(17) 924-202 1 Distance piece, blue, for flat membrane
valve
The new membrane valves, 902-700 and 902-701, have a reduced noise level
and are introduced as follows:
pH/BG (902-438): R0391
El/Met (902-439): R0320
As spare parts: January 2002
18 923-905 1 Dual Valve Housing (As of February 2001 the

tubing connectors have become black)
(18) 842-255 1 Rubber stopper for rinse out nipple

842-328 1 Pump Tube
19 923-906 1 Electrode Chamber Housing
20 924-022 1 Self-adhesive pad for Dual Valve Housing
21 924-039 2 Isolation Bushing ø6/4x1
22 924-046 1 Lining for 923-906
23 924-047 8 Damping Bushing
902-478 1 Thermistor with cable
24 924-049 1 Sealing Disk for Pump
26 924-053 1 Gasket for rear nipple of Measuring
Chamber
9-7

Available
27 924-054 1 Frosted window
(continued)
28 924-071 5 Light Guide
(previously one unit with five guides)
008-410 2 Pozidrive Screw M4x10
834-654 Lower Sealing Ring (tip) for E777 (pH)
834-618 Lower Sealing Ring (tip) for E788 (pCO2),
E799 (pO2), E7066 (glu), E7077 (lac)
834-653 Upper Sealing Gasket for E788 (pCO2),
E799 (pO2), E7066 (glu), E7077 (lac)
834-652 Upper Sealing Gasket (twin) for E722 (K),
E733 (Ca), E744 (Cl), E755 (Na)
841-775 1 Tube (pH/BG to El/Met and El/Met to
Thermostatted Blind)
841-774 1 Tube (rinse preheater to Meas. Chamber)
844-399 1 Connection Pipe for 902-532
886-443 1 Plastic Cover Plate for 902-532
902-532 1 Thermostatted Blind Module
9-8
Exploded View This figure shows the pH/BG Module in an exploded view for identification of
spare parts.
22
16 27
19
21
7
15
9
5
26
11
18
12
13
6
20
1
28 10
17
2
8
3
24
23
14
4
25
9-9
OXI Module
Introduction This paragraph lists the spare parts available for servicing the OXI Module.
Available
902-434 1 OXI Module, complete (not a spare part)
1 923-950 1 Passive Preheater
2 923-946 1 Cover
3 902-626 1 Preheater complete with PCB, for 902-547
4 840-209 1 Silicone Tubing, 3.7 cm
5 924-194 1 Preheater Connection Pipe
6 841-775 2 Tube, Intermediate
7 924-016 1 Isolation disk, 28x46 mm 2)
8 924-013 1 Stand-off for cover
9 923-945 1 OXI Module chassis, metal
9 924-171 1 OXI Module Chassis, plastic
636-367 1 Cable for Spectrometer
842-329 1 Tube for Heater with clamps
842-330 1 Valve Tube with ring and bushing
855-506 4 Vibration Damper 2)
655-002 1 Optical Fibre
902-415 1 Spectrometer
902-463 1 * OXI Controller PCB
902-527 1 Tube Valve
902-547 1 Thermostatted Blind Module
(not a spare part)
N/A 924-098 2 Tube Clamp (2 pcs. included in 842-329)
(See 924-146)
924-127 4 Isolation Washer 2)
924-137 1 Securing Ring (included in 842-330)
924-139 1 Isolation Bushing (included in 842-330) 2)
924-146 Box with 10 pcs. of 924-098
N/A Not available
9-10

Available
(continued) 902-435 1 Hemolyzer Unit
636-371 1 Thermistor with cable for Hemolyzer
835-351 1 O-ring for 923-954
636-370 1 Heating Transistor w. cable for Hemolyzer
902-445 1 Liquid Sensor
923-954 1 Plastic Tubing Nipple
902-458 1 Lamp Unit, complete

636-369 1 Cable for Lamp Unit PCB
636-373 1 Neon Lamp with cable for Lamp Unit
636-417 1 Halogen lamp, 4V/4W, with cable 1)
876-673 1 Spring for lamp 1)
902-468 1 Lamp Unit PCB
924-206 1 Stabilizing Bushing for lamp 1)
924-205 1 Lamp holder, smooth 1)
Compatibility The OXI Module has been modified a couple of times resulting in a few notes
Notes concerning compatibility:
Note Details
1) Introduced in OXI Modules of RUN 157 onwards (and Lamp of RUN
94 onwards) and replace 400-011 (lamp), 636-413 (cable), and 924-165
(stabilizing bushing).
In OXI Modules below RUN 157 all new parts should be installed in
case the original lamp or cable needs to be replaced (the original parts
have been discontinued). New and earlier parts cannot be combined.
2) Used in OXI Modules below RUN 211 only.
The chassis in OXI Modules below RUN 211 is made of metal requiring
various isolation parts.
The chassis in modules of RUN 211 onwards is made of plastic making
these items superfluous.
9-11
Exploded View, This figure shows the OXI Module and subassemblies in an exploded view for
OXI Module identification of spare parts.
Tube Valve Lamp Unit PCB
Vibration Lamp Unit with Halogen

Dampers and Neon Lamp
Hemolyzer Unit with

Thermistor (inside),
Preheater and
Liquid sensor
Spectrometer
Optical fiber
OXI Module
PCB
Exploded View, This figure shows the OXI Blind Module in an exploded view for identification of
OXI Blind spare parts.
Module
9
2
8
5 3
4
6
1
9-12
Fluidic Module, Left
Introduction This paragraph lists the spare parts available for servicing the Fluidic Module,
Left.
Spare Parts The "Ref. No." refers to the exploded view below.
Available
1 844-418 1 Waste Connector
(replaces 844-403)
2 924-003 2 Bottle Connector
3 031-800 3 Nut M8, stainless steel
4 886-442 1 Chassis for Fluidic Module, Left
834-650 1 Sealing for Fluidic Module
840-043 Viton tube, black ø0.9/2.7
840-227 Silicone tube, ø0.85/2.6
Exploded View This figure shows the left Fluidic Module in an exploded view for identification of
spare parts.
9-13
Fluidic Module, Right
Introduction This paragraph lists the spare parts available for servicing the Fluidic Module
Right.
Spare Parts The "Ref. No." refers to the exploded view overleaf.
Available
1 902-515 1 Pump rotor, type B (left)
(1) 842-326 2 Pump tube, waste (left)
2 902-448 1 Pump rotor, type A (right)
(2) 842-327 1 Pump tube with clamp, OXI (right)
(2) 924-146 1 Securing clamp for 842-327 (OXI end)
(10 pcs.)
3 834-647 2 Sealing Gasket ø5,5-6,5
4 924-003 4 Bottle connector
5 835-426 4 O-ring ø2x1.5
7 902-484 7 Membrane Valve, replaced by 902-700
7 902-700 7 Membrane Valves (valves #1-7)

7 902-546 1 Flat Membrane Valve, replaced by 902-701
7 902-701 1 Flat Membrane Valve (valve #8)
(7) 876-851 8 Spring for membrane valves
(7) 834-221 7 Membrane for membrane valve
(7) 834-222 1 Membrane for flat membrane valve
(7) 924-202 1 Distance piece, blue, for flat membrane
valve
The new membrane valves, 902-700 and 902-701, have a reduced noise level
and are introduced as follows:
Basic Unit (902-441): R0389
As spare parts: January 2002
8 580-064 2 Stepping motor

9 902-436 1 Fluidic Module PCB
10 008-406 2 Screw M4x6
11 008-410 4 Screw M4x10
9-14

Available
12 834-649 1 Sealing Pad for Fluidic Module
(continued)
13 924-002 1 Fluid channel unit
924-238 1 Y-piece for waste pump tubes
855-507 4 Vibration damper
844-411 1 Tube Organizer
011-010 3 Allen screw, M3x16, lens head
011-016 1 Allen screw, M3x8, lens head
9-15
Exploded View This figure shows the Fluidic Module, Right in an exploded view for identification
of spare parts.
2
3
4
1
5
13
12
9
8 10
11
9-16
Inlet Module
Introduction This paragraph lists the spare parts available for servicing the Inlet Module. The
"Ref. No." refers to the exploded view on the next page.

Available 1 902-488 1 Inlet Gasket, original design*)
1 902-668 1 Inlet Gasket, new design*)

2 570-093 1 Cover Switch (reed contact)
3 902-489 1 Inlet Pickup PCB with flex cable
(3) 008-306 2 Screw M3x6
4 924-040 1 Isolation Plate for preheater
5 902-464 1 Preheater
6 924-039 2 Isolation Bushing ø6/4x1
7 008-316 2 Screw M3x16
8 902-466 1 Syringe Handle, original design*)
8 902-669 1 Syringe Handle, new design*)

9 902-467 1 Capillary Handle, original design*)
9 902-670 1 Capillary Handle, new design*)

10 580-065 1 Stepping Motor with cable
11 N/A 1 Flywheel
12 902-454 1 Inlet Module PCB
13 841-768 1 Rubber tube (Inlet Probe to preheater)
14 050-980 1 Securing Pin ø1x5 for 923-920
15 902-490 1 Handle Detector PCB
16 923-926 1 Lock for Inlet Probe
17 923-920 1 Holder for Inlet Probe
18 923-932 1 Inlet Probe, original design*)
18 902-677 1 Inlet Probe, new design*)

19 902-588 1 Inlet Chassis
20 923-916 1 Sensor housing
(20) 012-813 1 Pointed screw, Hex M4x5
21 872-602 1 Toothed bar
9-17

Available
22 876-879 2 Spring for magnet
(continued)
23 902-599 1 Probe sensor magnet
24 923-914 1 Mounting block
25 923-930 1 Threaded pin
009-416 1 Screw, M4x16
009-425 1 Screw, M4x25
841-776 1 Tube (Inlet to pH/BG)
*) Please note that the original and new parts cannot be interchanged freely.
When upgrading from original to new parts, all four items must be replaced at
the same time. The original parts will be discontinued.
The original parts can only be used on analyzers below 902-441R0323.
9-18
Exploded View This figure shows the Inlet Module in an exploded view for identification of spare
parts.
19
23
22 20
4
21
5
24 6
7
13
14
10 8
25
11
18 17
16
15
12
9-19
AutoCheck Module
Introduction This paragraph lists the spare parts available for servicing the AutoCheck Module.
Available
1, (4), 8, 13 902-607 1 Autocheck Interface PCBs (five PCBs)
2 580-073 1 Stepping Motor w. Gearbox 1:8.33,
Lid Slide
3 580-072 1 Stepping Motor w. Gearbox 1:45,
Carrousel Tilt
5 580-074 1 Stepping Motor, Carrousel Spin
6 580-175 1 Fan with Cable, discontinued and replaced by 905-780
6 905-780 1 Fan kit (fan, screws, threaded plate)

7 835-472 1 O-ring, 1.78x1.78 for ampoule actuator
9 580-066 1 Stepping Motor, Ampoule Actuator, AutoCheck Modules
below R0128, discontinued and replaced by 580-075
9 580-075 1 Stepping Motor, Ampoule Actuator

10 008-306 2 Screw
10 042-307 2 Washer
10 735-451 2 O-ring
11 910-255 1 Laser Scan Engine (includes 636-425)
12 902-541 1 * AutoCheck Module PCB
14 924-157 1 Lid
636-425 1 FPC Cable, 12 pole, 53 mm (laser scanner)
636-427 2 FPC Cable, 6 pole, 65 mm
636-428 1 FPC Cable, 14 pole, 190 mm (Carousel
Interface PCB to AutoCheck PCB)
636-451 1 FPC Cable, 6 pole, 75 mm (lid position
detector)
816-345 1 Foam plate
888-561 1 Air guide for 816-345
9-20
Exploded View This figure shows the AutoCheck Module in an exploded view for identification of
spare parts.
13
2 4
14 7
10
12
11
9-21
PC Module
Introduction This paragraph lists the spare parts available for servicing the PC Module.
Basically two versions of the DMS PC exist depending on the Main CPU PCB.
The original type PCM-5890 Main CPU PCB was installed from the factory in
Basic Units (902-441) below R168, whereas the new type PCM-5896 is installed
in Basic Units of R168 onwards.
Spare Parts The parts listed in the table below are the ones, which are different (and not
Available directly compatible) in the two versions of the PC Module.
Part No. Description R1 - 167 R168 -

902-589 Main CPU PCB with CPU, PCM-5890 ü
902-643 Main CPU PCB with CPU, PCM-5896 ü
430-132 Battery ü
430-134 Battery ü
580-173 Fan for CPU ü
580-178 Fan for CPU ü
365-414 Cache RAM, 256Kb ü
365-413 DRAM, 16Mb, 72pin SIMM, 2 pcs. needed ü
(as delivered from the factory)
365-435 DRAM, 32Mb, 72pin SIMM, 2 pcs. needed (ü)
(if upgraded in the field)
365-434 SDRAM, 64Mb, 168pin DIMM ü
636-391 Set of Cables (12 cables) ü
636-429 Set of Cables (13 cables) ü
636-471 IDE and power cables for 3.5” HD ü ü
(used for upgrading old sets of cables)
902-538 Power Distribution PCB ü
(Discontinued and replaced by 902-644)
902-644 Power Distribution PCB (ü) ü
The CPU and battery are included on the Main CPU PCBs whereas the DRAM
or SDRAM, Cache RAM (PCM-5890 only), and fan are to be ordered separately.
It is possible to install the new PCM-5896 Main CPU PCB in earlier PC Modules.
Use the Main Board Upgrade Kit, 905-779.
However, then the original Cache RAM, DRAM modules (2x16Mb), Power
Distribution PCB, and cables become superfluous
9-22
Spare Parts The parts listed below are identical in all PC Modules.
Available
Part No. Quantity Description
(continued)
011-012 4 Lens head screw M4x5 (for 888-501)
311-042 1 Display (10.4”), see note below
311-043 1 Display Back-light Inverter
311-044 1 Display Back-light Fluorescent Lamps
552-035 1 Touch Panel (10.4”)
888-501 2 PC Module hinge clamp
902-537 1 Connector PCB
902-538 1 Power Distribution PCB
(902-441 below R168 only)
Discontinued and replaced by 902-644
902-644 1 Power Distribution PCB

905-779 Main Board Upgrade Kit
910-225 1 PC Module, complete (with PCM-5896)
910-241 1 Floppy Drive (1.44Mb)
910-242 1 CD-ROM Drive with Cable Interface PCB
910-256 1 3.5" Hard Disk Upgrade Kit
including bracket, screws, and cables
910-267 1 3.5" Hard Disk only
913-635 1 WIN95 licence certificate
Hard Disk and Please note that the speed of the CD-ROM drive and the size of the hard disk
CD-ROM drive, used in the production of new analyzers and when delivered as spare parts,
will continuously increase over time. As long as the new parts are 100%
compatible the part numbers will remain unchanged.
Display 311-042, A pixel is a dot on the display, which consists of 640*480 pixels. A pixel error is
Pixel Errors, identified as a pixel, which is permanently illuminated or extinguished.
Warranty
A number of pixel errors on TFT displays may appear and is accepted by the
Replacement
manufacturer.
In case the display is under warranty, the following criteria for determining if the
display is eligible for a warranty replacement due to pixel errors apply:
· The total number of pixel errors on the display is >15 or
· The number of pixel errors within a 10 mm diameter circle is >4
9-23
Tubing Diagram
Tubing Location of tubing in a wet section equipped with both an El/Met Module and an
Diagram, A OXI Module. See also Tubing Diagram C.
The reference numbers and letters refer to the tubing tables on the following pages.
For connection at the dual valves, see also Tubing Diagram AB.
D
6
E
C
OXI Module
14
B
A
Blind Module
18
5
17
H
20B
12+13
4
16
10
*
27
15
8
11
26
21
3
24+25
F
9
**
7
*
2
23
18
20A
17
** Bottom connectors
* Top connector
Bottom
16
19
1
15
Top
9-24
Tubing Diagram, Continued
Tubing Location of tubing in the wet section equipped with Blind Modules instead of the
Diagram, B El/Met and OXI Modules. See also Tubing Diagram D.
30
29
Blind Module
14
28
Blind Module
18
17
H
20B
12+13
4
16
Blind Module
15
G
21
3
24+25
F
9
**
7
11
2
23
18
20A
17
* Top connector
Bottom
16
19
1
15
Top
9-25
Tubing This diagram shows the tubing connection at the dual valve housings where the
Diagram, AB tubing nipples are made of clear plastics and are integrated in the housing (original
version).
pH/BG Module El/Met Module
Rear side
Front side
9-26
Tubing Location of tubing in a wet section equipped with both an El/Met Module and an
Diagram, C OXI Module. See also Tubing Diagram A.
For connection at the dual valves, see also Tubing Diagram CD.
D
6
E
C
OXI Module
14
B
A
Blind Module
18
5
17
H
20B
12+13
4
16
10
*
27
15
8
11
J
26
21
3
24+25
F
9
**
7
*
2
23
18
20A
17
* Top connector
Bottom
16
19
1
15
Top
9-27
Tubing Location of tubing in the wet section equipped with Blind Modules instead of the
Diagram, D El/Met and OXI Modules. See also Tubing Diagram D.
30
29
Blind Module
14
28
Blind Module
18
17
H
20B
12+13
4
16
Blind Module
15
G
J
21
3
24+25
F
9
**
7
11
2
23
18
20A
17
* Top connector
Bottom
16
19
1
15
Top
9-28
Tubing This diagram shows the tubing connection at the dual valve housings where the
Diagram, CD tubing nipples are made of black plastic (new version).
pH/BG Module El/Met Module
Rear side
Front side
9-29
Introduction The tables below give a survey of the tubing in the wet section. The table includes
the part numbers and lengths for the individual tubes with references to the
diagram on the previous page.
Tubes with Tubes with individual part numbers and which are ready to use.
Individual Part
Numbers Reference Part Number Notes
1 841-768
2 841-776
3 841-775
4 841-775
5 842-330 Includes “A” and “B”
6 842-329 Includes “C” and “D”
7 841-774
8 841-774
9 842-328
10 842-328
11 842-255
12 842-326
13 842-326
14 842-327 Includes “E”
28 841-775
30 841-775
9-30
Cutting Table These tubes are delivered by the meter and must be cut to the lengths given in the
table below.
Please note that three different tubes are used (as indicated in the “Part Number”
column)
Reference Part Number Length (mm) Notes

15 840-227 450 Top nipple on waste connector
16 840-227 490 Bottom nipple on waste connector
17 840-043 400
18 840-043 395
19 840-227 150
20A 840-043 320
20B 840-043 90
21 840-227 140
23 840-043 30
24 840-043 28±2
25 840-043 28±2
26 840-043 92±2
27 840-043 30
29 840-209 37
9-31
Tube Holders Tube holders which either secure the tubes on the nipples or organize the tubing.
etc.
Reference Part Number Function
A 924-139 Isolates tube from chassis (bushing)
Only on OXI Modules with grey metal chassis plate.
B 924-137 Secures tube (ring)
C 924-098 *) Secures tube (clamp)
D 924-098 *) Secures tube (clamp)
*)
E 924-098 Secures tube (clamp)
F 844-411 Organizes and connects tubing
G 844-399 Connection Pipe
H 844-399 Connection Pipe
I 924-194 Connection Pipe
J 924-238 Y-piece for waste pump tubes (tubing diagram C)
The Y-piece may replace three tube connections on
the Fluidic Module)
*) Available separately only in boxes with 10 pcs. (under 924-146).
9-32
ABL700 Series Service Manual 10. Drawings and Test Sheets
10. Drawings
Overview
Introduction This Chapter includes various drawings which may be used during the servicing.

PCB Layouts .................................................................................................... 10-2
Module Installation Test Report....................................................................... 10-17
Electrical Safety Test Report ........................................................................... 10-21
10-1
10. Drawings and Test Sheets ABL700 Series Service Manual
PCB Layouts
Introduction This paragraph provides the layouts of the various PCBs in the analyzer. The
drawings indicate the location of connectors and important components.
Inlet Module Layout of Inlet Module PCB, 902-454 (971-533U3S).

PCB
Inlet Pickup
Pre-heater
Stepping
Motor
Reset
SW1
PCB
J6
J2
J4
Analyzer Control
Power/CAN Bus
J1
Cover off switch
J5
Chassis
J9
J3
Flap
Switches
10-2
PCB Layouts, Continued
pH/BG and Layout of pH/BG and El/Met Module PCBs, 902-455 and 902-456 (971-534U6S).
El/Met Module
J101 J201 J301 J401 J501
PCBs pH Ref. O2 CO2 Cl
Ca K Na Glu Lac
J4 J8 J7 J6
Temp. Pump V2 V1
Light Motor Air Rinse
LEDs
J9 J3 J2 J1
Chassis Lower Upper Power/CAN Bus
Liquid Liquid Analyzer Control
Sensor Sensor
10-3
OXI Controller Layout of OXI Controller PCB, 902-463 (971-539U3S).

PCB
Neon Lamp
Hemolyzer
Heater
J7
J3
Chassis
Temp. Sensor Hemolyzer
Hemolyzer J6
J8
Valve
J12
Liquid
Sensor
J11
Lamp Unit
J2
Analyzer Control
Power/CAN Bus
J1
Spectrometer
J10
LEDs
10-4
Fluidic Module Layout of Fluidic Module PCB, 902-436 RUNs 0001 - 0039 (971-543U4S) which
PCB, R1-40 is installed in Basic Units, 902-441, of RUNs 0001 - R0183.
Analyzer Control
I C Bus
J100
2
Solution
J10
P2
Waste
V8
J8
Air
V7
J7
Rinse
V6
J6
Cleaning CAL1 Not used
V5
J5
CAL2 Not used

V4
J4
V3
J3
V2
J2
V1
J1
Waste
J11
P1
Illumination
Bottle
J30
10-5
Fluidic Module Layout of Fluidic Module PCB, 902-436 RUN 0040 onwards (971-543U6S) which
PCB, R40 is installed in Basic Units, 902-441, of RUN 0184 onwards.
onwards
Analyzer Control
I2C Bus
J100
Solution
J10
P2
Cleaning
V1
J1
CAL2
V2
J2
CAL1
V3
J3
Not used
V4
J4
Not used
V5
J5
Rinse
V6
J6
Air
V7
J7
Waste
V8
J8
Waste
J11
P1
Illumination
Bottle
J30
10-6
Bottle Layout of Bottle Illumination PCB, Left 902-502 (971-552U4S) and Bottle
Illumination Illumination PCB, Right 902-503 (971-553U4S).
PCBs
Fluidic Module
I2C Bus
J30
Detector
Waste
J10
Fluidic Module
I2C Bus
J30
Bottle Illumination, Left Bottle Illumination, Right
10-7
10-8
902-450
Analyzer
Control PCB
J30
J40 J60
10. Drawings and Test Sheets
Power/CAN Bus J20 J10 J71

Power/CAN Bus Thermostatted Power/CAN Bus Power/CAN Bus J90 SW1 Power/CAN Bus Power
OXI Module Blind Module El/Met Module LEDs pH/BG Module Not used Reset Inlet Module Supply Fan
F4
F3
J1
Power
Supply
F2
F1
Layout of Analyzer Control PCB, 902-450 (971-542U4S).
J70 Barometer J50 J130 J85 Basic Key J3 J2

Analyzer Fan I2C Bus Flash File Array Gas Valves Not used DMS PC
Fluidic Module
ABL700 Series Service Manual

902-625
Analyzer
Control PCB
J30
J40 Power/CAN Bus J20 J10 J60 J71
ABL700 Series Service Manual
Power/CAN Bus Thermostatted Power/CAN Bus Power/CAN Bus J90 Power/CAN Bus Power
OXI Module Blind Module El/Met Module LEDs pH/BG Module Not used Inlet Module Supply Fan
SW1
Reset
F4
F3
J1
Power
Supply
F2
F1
Layout of Analyzer Control PCB, 902-625 (971-567U2S).
J70 Barometer J50 J85 Basic Key J130 J3 J2

Analyzer Fan I2C Bus Gas Valves Flash File Array Not used DMS PC
Fluidic Module
10-9
10. Drawings and Test Sheets

Lamp Unit PCB Layout of Lamp Unit PCB, 902-468 and 902-456 (971-540U4S).
J1
OXI Module
PCB
J2
Halogen
Lamp
Measuring Layout of Measuring Light/Heat PCB, 902-508 (971-555U2S).

Light/Heat PCB
J2
J1 pH/BG or
NTC El/Met PCB
Thermostatted Layout of Thermostatted Blind Module PCB, 902-532 (971-558U1S).

Blind Module
PCB J1
Power/CAN Bus
Analyzer Control
10-10
AutoCheck Layout of AutoCheck Module PCB, 902-541 (971-559U4S).

Module PCB
J21 J40 J30 J20 J10

Tilt Up Ampoule Carousel Lid Slide Carousel
PCB Actuator Tilt Motor Motor Interface PCB
J50
Barcode
Reader
J41
Tilt Down
PCB J1
CAN bus
10-11
AutoCheck Layout of AutoCheck Distribution PCBs, 902-607 (971-564U?S).

Distribution
Carousel Interface PCB
PCBs
J12
J10 Carousel J11
AutoCheck Temp./Zero Detect. Carousel
Module PCB PCB Spin Motor
Tilt Down/Ampoule-Zero and Fan Interface PCB

J41
AutoCheck J43
Module PCB Fan
Carousel Temp. and Zero Detector PCB

J13
Carousel
Interface PCB
10-12
AutoCheck Tilt Up and LID0/LID1 Detector PCBs

Distribution
J21
PCBs
AutoCheck
(continued)
Module PCB
10-13
PC Module Layout of PC Module PCBs. The Main CPU PCB is the PCM-5890, 902-589,
PCM-5890 which was installed in Basic Units (902-441) of Runs 0001 through 0167 from the
factory.
Power Distribution PCB, 902-538

COM2
COM1 / COM2
Touch Panel Inverter
Power COM1
Supply
Power2
Power1
CN10 CN11 CN14
CN9 CN12 CN13 Ethernet
CN15
J23
J24
J25
RJ45
J22
J21
J20
J19
Power
CN8
USB
CN2
J9
J17
J16
J15
CN7
J14
CN1
J13 J18
COM4
J7
Battery
COM3 / COM4
CN5 CN6
J6
J5
J10
J11
J12
PCI Slot
COM3
J4
J3
CN4
Keyboard 2
J2
J1
board
Key
1
Connector PCB, 902-537

Mouse
CACHE MEMORY Socket

CN3
SIMM Socket
Power
J8
FDD
SIMM Socket
Main CPU PCB, PCM-5890, 902-589
10-14
PC Module Layout of PC Module PCBs. The Main CPU PCB is the PCM-5896, 902-643,
PCM-5896 which is installed in Basic Units (902-441) of Runs 0168 onwards.
Power Distribution PCB, 902-644

COM1 / COM2
COM2
Touch Panel Inverter
Power COM1
Relay
Power2
Supply
Power3
Power1
CN15 CN16 CN17
CN12 CN13 CN14 CN11 Ethernet

CN10
J11
J15
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10 J12
RJ45
J5 CN10
J4
Power
CN5
USB
CN4
CN8
CN7
CN2
CN9
CN6
COM4
COM3 / COM4
CN3
J3
Battery
J2
S3
J14
COM3
Keyboard 2
board
Key
1
S1
Connector PCB, 902-537

J13
Mouse
CN1
DIMM Socket
Power
FDD
PCI slot
Main CPU PCB, PCM-5896, 902-643
10-15
Module Installation Test Report
Introduction This report is to be used for documenting the test results obtained during the
Module Installation Test.
The block labels in the left margin refer to the blocks in the test procedure.
The test report is to be stored in your local analyzer file.
Analyzer and
Engineer
Analyzer ID: ABL7___ I902-441R_____N_____
Performed by:
Name Date Signature
Starting the Note all lot numbers on the installed equipment in the table below:
Analyzer
Product Lot no. Product Lot no.
pCO2 electrode pCO2 membrane
pO2 electrode pO2 membrane
2+
Ca electrode Ca2+ membrane
K+ electrode K+ membrane
Na+ electrode Na+ membrane
Cl- electrode Cl- membrane
Glu electrode Glu membrane
Lac electrode Lac membrane
pH electrode
Ref. electrode Ref. membrane
Rinse S4970 Cleaning S7370

CAL1 S1720 CAL2 S1730
GAS1 GAS2
S7730 or S7735 S7750 or S7755

S7740 or S7745 S7760 or S7765
10-17
Module Installation Test Report, Continued
Initial Test and Note if the following tests have passed:

Calibration
Zero calibration for: Passed yes/no?
pO2
Glucose
Lactate
OXI complete test: Passed yes/no?
Spectrometer
Lamp unit
Hemolyzer
2-point calibration: Passed yes/no?
Service tHb: Lot no:________ Passed yes/no?

ctHb
sO2
FO2Hb
FCOHb
FMetHb
AutoCheck…. Passed yes/no?
Service Test Document the following:
yes/no?
Installation test passed
Contents of Service Disk returned to RMED
10-18
Reproducibility Note the values of the 5 measurements on S7730 or S7735 in the following table:
Test No. 1
QC ampoule no.: pCO2 K+ ctHb
1
2
3
4
5
Insert range LOW
Insert range
HIGH
X
S0
S0 max 2.25 mmHg 0.015 mmol/L 0.065 mmol/L
Passed yes/no?
Reproducibility Note the values of the 5 measurements on S7740 or S7745 in the following table:
Test No. 2
QC capillary no.: pO2 cGlu
1
2
3
4
5
Insert range LOW
Insert range
HIGH
X
S0
S0 max 2.55 mmHg 0.105 mmol/L
Passed yes/no?
10-19
Software Note the software versions from the Service program “Software versions”:
Versions
Software Module Version
DMS MAIN Software
AU Main Software
AU System base
AU Bootcode
AU Fluid Transport Control
AU Satellite bootstrap software
AU Inlet module
AU pH/BG module
AU El/Met module
AU OXI module
AU AutoCheck module
10-20
Electrical Safety Test Report
Introduction This report is to be used for documenting the test results obtained during the
Electrical Safety Test.
The block labels in the left margin refer to the blocks in the test procedure.
The test report is to be stored in your local analyzer file.
Analyzer and
Engineer
Analyzer ID: ABL7___ I902-441R_____N_____
Performed by:
Name Date Signature
Test Results Fill in the results of the tests (evaluation) in the table below:
Test Approved (Yes, No)

Protective Bonding (without line cord)
Protective Bonding (with line cord)
Dielectrical Strength
10-21
ABL700 Series Service Manual Service Notes
Service Notes
Introduction In the event of important changes to procedures or spare parts, the service manual
will be updated by means of service notes, which will be forwarded to all
Radiometer distributors. The cover sheets of such service notes must be inserted in
this section in chronological order whereas the attached updated sheets must be
inserted into the appropriate chapters.
Revisions to the The table below lists the revisions performed. The “SN” column lists the part
Service Manual numbers of the service notes issued, the “Issue” column lists the issue of the
service note (equal to the new issue of the service manual), and the “Revisions”
column lists the most important revisions.
SN Issue Revision
917-355 199901-1 General update of the manual.
917-357 199906-1 General update of the manual.
917-358 199908-1 Inclusion of missing sheets from SN 917-357 (part of
Section 3)
917-359 199910-1 Inclusion of information regarding downgraded versions,
sale of modules, and AutoCheck Module. This service
note replaces all existing pages of the service manual.
917-360 199911-1 Updated photos of AutoCheck and minor corrections.
917-361 200003-1 New Analyzer Control and Main CPU PCB introduced
917-362 200009-1 New parts included (e.g. hard disk) and general update.
917-363 200103-1 V3.61 software and various additions.
917-366 200110-1 V3.7 software and various additions.
917-370 200203-1 Update of Spare Parts Chapter.
917-372 200206-1 Discontinuation of module sales and requirement for
sending the service disk to RMED.
- 1
Service Notes for ABL700 Series Service Manual
Introduction This Service Note is a general update of the ABL700 Series Service Manual.
As detailed below, a number of procedures have been added, changed, and
improved.
Contents of the The service manual has been updated in the following respects (major changes):
Update
Front: An overall table of contents has been added.
Chapter 1: Note regarding Installation Test and Service Disk is added to
Service Policy.
New part numbers for software.
Chapter 2: Updated to latest software version.
Error codes have been added to the tables.
New paragraph relating to the Power Supply has been included.
Chapter 3: Most procedures for the OXI module have been improved.
Where an external keyboard is required this is indicated in the text.
Procedures for software installation have been modified.
New paragraph concerning check of Power Supply has been
included.
Chapter 4: Additions and improvements throughout the chapter.
New procedures for replacing the pH/BG and El/Met Module PCBs,
installing option keys, and updating the Parts List have been
included.
Chapter 5: New part numbers for tubes and minor corrections.
Chapter 7: Additions, improvements, and corrections throughout the chapter.
Chapter 8: Minor corrections and additions.
Chapter 9: Changes and additions to the parts lists and drawings.
Correction of tube diagram.
Issue 917-355, 199901-1
-
Service Notes for ABL700 Series Service Manual, Continued
Documentation Please replace the following existing sheets with the ones supplied with this
Service Note.
Front: Insert overall table of contents behind the title sheet.
Chapter 1: Remove entire existing chapter and insert the new sheets.
Chapter 3: Remove existing “Isolation Check”, pages 5/6, and insert the new
sheet.
Remove existing “OXI Module” chapter, pages 11-28, and insert the
new sheets.
Remove existing “Waste Check”, pages 33/34, and insert the new
sheet.
Remove existing “PC Module”, pages 35-42, chapter and insert the
new sheets.
Chapter 7: Remove existing pages 1-6 and insert new sheets.
Remove existing pages 27-86 and insert new sheets, pages 27-84.
Chapter 8: Remove existing pages 3/4 and insert new sheet.
Remove existing pages 53/54 and insert new sheets, pages 53-55.
Back: Remove existing “Service Notes” and insert new sheet.
Remove existing “Date of Issue” and insert new sheet.
-
A number of procedures have been added, changed, and improved.
Contents of the The Service Manual has been updated in the following respects (major changes):
Update
Chapter 3: The procedure for adjusting the lamp unit in the OXI Module has
been improved.
included (was missing in Service Note 917-355).
Chapter 4: Zero current calibration for pO2 and Met channels added to the
procedure for replacing the Module PCBs.
Procedure for replacing plastic nipple at hemolyzer added.
Procedure for replacing the lamp unit clarified.
Washer replaced by two O-rings in Gas Module.
Chapter 7: Minor corrections.
Chapter 9: Additions to the parts lists.
Correction of tube diagram.
Service Note.
Front: Remove existing overall table of contents and insert new sheets.
Chapter 3: Remove existing pages: 1/2, 11/12, and 17/18 and insert the new
sheets.
Chapter 7: Remove existing pages: 1/2, 7/8, and pages 29-38 and insert new
sheets.
Chapter 8: Remove existing pages: 3/4 and insert new sheet.
Remove existing pages: 53/54 and insert new sheets, pages 53-55.
Back: Remove existing “Service Notes” and insert new sheet.
Remove existing “Date of Issue” and insert new sheet.
Issue 917-357, 199906-1
-
Introduction Some pages were missing in the 917-357 Service Note. This Service Note is issued
to complete the update of the Service Manual.
update
Chapter 3: The procedure for adjusting the lamp unit in the OXI Module has
been improved.
included.
Service Note.
Front: Remove the existing overall table of contents and insert the new
sheets.
Chapter 3: Remove the existing pages from page 23 and through to the end of
the chapter. Insert the new sheets.
Back: Remove the existing “Service Notes” and insert the new sheet.
Remove the existing “Date of Issue” and insert the new sheet.
Issue 917-358, 199908-1
-
The majority of the changes refer to the introduction of the “downgraded” versions
of the analyzer, the change-over to sales of modules instead of complete analyzers,
and the AutoCheck Module.
Update
Chapter 2: Messages now sorted by name instead of by number. Paragraph
regarding status codes included. Paragraph regarding hardware
errors has been updated with AutoCheck.
Chapter 3: Procedures for checkout of the AutoCheck module and for carrying
out an electrical safety test have been included.
Chapter 4: Chapter divided into three sections. AutoCheck module has been
included. Paragraphs regarding module installation, upgrade and
downgrade have been included. New paragraph regarding module
installation test has been included. The paragraph installation test
has changed name to service test.
Chapter 5: AutoCheck has been included.
Chapter 7: Changes to service setup, options, parts and service test (previously
installation test) programs. AutoCheck program has been included.
Chapter 8: Description of the AutoCheck module has been included.
Chapter 9: Paragraph with spare parts for the AutoCheck module has been
included. New parts added for most modules. New tube diagram
(downgraded version) has been added.
Chapter 10: Layout for AutoCheck PCB has been included. Test reports for
module installation test and electrical safety test have been included.
Documentation As the revision influences more than 80% of the manual, we have decided to
distribute all the pages for the entire manual.
Issue 917-359, 199910-1
-
The majority of the changes are due to a re-arrangement of Chapter 4.
Updated photos of the AutoCheck Module have been included together with
changes to the AutoCheck module service programs (software version 3.1).
Update
Chapter 1: New CD-ROM for analyzer software.
Chapter 3: Minor modification of the checkout of the AutoCheck module.
Chapter 4: The paragraph “Option Keys, Parameter Configuration, Analyzer
Type” is moved to the Section “Test and Documentation
Procedures”. Updated photos of the AutoCheck Module have been
included.
Chapter 7: New password for service programs. The service program “Align
Carousel/Laser” has been modified.
Chapter 8: A couple of minor modifications to the text.
Chapter 9: New parts for the lamp unit in the OXI Module have been added.
Service Note.
Front: Remove the existing overall table of contents and insert the new
sheets.
Chapter 1: Remove the existing “Test Equipment and Tools” and insert the new
sheet.
Chapter 3: Remove the existing pages 33/34 and insert the new sheet.
Chapter 4: Remove existing pages 1 through 4, 13/14, 35 through 40, and 49
through 82. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 7: Remove existing pages 1/2 and 67 through 70. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 8: Remove existing pages 41 through 46. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 9: Remove existing pages 7 through 10. Insert the new sheets.
Issue 917-360, 199911-1
-
The majority of the changes are due to:
· Introduction of new Analyzer Control and Main CPU PCBs
· Modification of the AutoCheck Module
· Split-up of Chapter 4 (into Chapters 4 and 5)
· Release of WIN95 release 8 and Analyzer Software version 3.2.
Further, a number of additional spare parts have been included into the Spare Parts
chapter.
Service Note:
Front: Remove the Index sheet and insert the new sheet.
Remove the existing Table of Contents and insert the new sheets.
Chapter 1: Remove the existing pages 5 through 8. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 3: Remove the entire existing chapter. Insert the new sheet.
Chapter 4: Remove existing pages 1 through 8 and 23 through 82. Insert the
new sheets.
Chapter 5: Remove the entire existing chapter. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 7: Remove existing pages 49/50 and 57/58. Insert the new sheets.
Insert this sheet in the rear of the Service Notes part.
Issue 917-361, 200003-1
-
Update
Chapter 1: New CD-ROMs for WIN95 and analyzer software.
Chapter 3: Valve check: ohmic value for tube valve included.
THb Calibration: “Service” included in heading.
SAT100 Calibration: lower limit corrected to 10 mmol/L.
Lamp Adjustment: types of hardware updated.
AutoCheck: mechanical adjustment of laser included.
BIOS Setup: BIOS setup for WIN95 release 8 included.
Chapter 4: Chapter 4 has been split into two chapters (4 and 5). Chapter 4 is
now Replacements.
Fluidic Module: new layout of PCB introduced.
Gas/Analyzer Control: new Analyzer Control PCB included.
AutoCheck: assembly revised due to adjustment of laser.
PC Module: new Main CPU PCB introduced.
Chapter 5: Now Installation, Configuration, and Test Procedures
Option Keys: the table Analyzer Type has been clarified.
Module Installation Test: QC mode is to be used for test via syringe
inlet; sO2 not measured.
Chapter 6: Now Periodic Service Procedures.
Chapter 7: New screen dumps for Lamp Adjustment and Inlet Service programs
included.
Chapter 8: Description of software moved from chapter 6 to chapter 8.
Temperature regulation: description clearified for all modules.
Thermostatted Blind Module: more detailed description.
OXI Blind Module: description added.
Analyzer Control: description of new PCB included.
PC: description of new PCB included.
AutoCheck: adjustment of laser included.
Chapter 9: New parts for most modules have been added.
Chapter 10: Layouts for new Fluidic Module, Analyzer Control, and Main CPU
PCBs included.
Module Installation Test Report: various modifications.
-
The majority of the changes are due to:
· Introduction of new 3.5” hard disk for the PC Module
· Release of new software, V3.51
· Update of the Troubleshooting chapter.
Further, a number of additional spare parts have been included into the Spare Parts
chapter.
Service Note:
Chapter 1: Remove the existing pages 3/4 and 5/6. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 3: Remove the pages 17/18, 25 through 28, and 49 through 52. Insert
the new sheets.
Chapter 4: Remove existing pages 1/2, 7/8, 11 through 14, and 47 through 54.
Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 7: Remove existing pages 25 through 54 and 85 through 92. Insert the
new sheets.
Chapter 9: Remove the existing pages 1 through 4 and 13 through 20. Insert the
new sheets.
Chapter 10: Remove the existing pages 3/4 and 15 through 18. Insert the new
sheets.
Insert this sheet at the end of the Service Notes part.
Issue 917-362, 200009-1
-
Update
Chapter 1: Information about type of laser in AutoCheck module. New CD-
ROM and Boot Disk.
Chapter 2: General update of the text in the troubleshooting tables.
Chapter 4: Inclusion of procedure for replacing a 2.5” hard disk by a 3.5” type.
Chapter 7: Minor changes (V3.51).
Chapter 9: New parts have been added.
-
The majority of the changes are due to the release of new software, V3.61. In
addition, a number of spare parts have been added to the Spare Parts chapter.
Service Note:
Front Remove the entire Table of Contents. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 3: Remove the existing pages 3/4. Insert the new sheet
Chapter 4: Remove existing pages 11 through 14, 35/36, and 57/58. Insert the
new sheets.
Chapter 5: Remove the existing pages 3/4 and 19 through 34. Insert the new
sheets.
Chapter 7: Remove existing pages 1 through 6, 29/30, and 85 through 96. Insert
the new sheets.
Chapter 8: Remove the existing pages 15/16, 39/40, and 61 through 70. Insert
the new sheets.
Chapter 9: Remove the entire existing Chapter. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 10: Remove the existing pages 3/4. Insert the new sheets.
Update Chapter 1: New software (V3.61).
Chapter 3: Minor correction.
Chapter 4: Minor corrections and additions (Power Supply).
Chapter 5: Changes to Service and Module Installation Tests (V3.61) and
distribution of option keys.
Chapter 7: Minor changes and addition of Electrode Updatings (V3.61).
Chapter 8: Minor corrections and additions (primarily to PC Module).
Chapter 10: Minor correction.
Issue 917-363, 200103-1
-
Service Note:
Front Remove the entire Table of Contents. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 1: Remove pages 5/6. Insert the new sheet.
Chapter 2: Remove the entire Chapter. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 3: Remove pages 35/36 and 49 through 56. Insert the new sheets
Chapter 4: Remove pages 1/2, 15 through 18, 37 through 46, and 55 through
58. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 7: Remove pages 29 through 40 and 63/64. Insert the new sheets.
Back: Remove “Service Notes” and insert the new sheet.
Remove “Date of Issue” and insert the new sheet.
Update
Chapter 1: New software (V3.7).
Chapter 2: Messages now sorted numerically.
Chapter 3: “Important” regarding saving setup before initiating a software
upgrade added on pages 50 and 53.
Chapter 4: “Important” regarding cables added on page 1. Minor corrections to
the AutoCheck paragraph. Missing sheets from previous Service
Note attached (pages 55 through 58).
Chapter 5: “Important” regarding cables added on page 1.
Chapter 6: Contents of Yearly Service Kit changed to include all tubes.
Chapter 7: Minor changes and addition of Service Setup (V3.7) and
AutoCheck.
Chapter 9: Parts now sorted by reference number. New parts have been added.
Issue 917-366, 200110-1
-
Service Note:
Chapter 4: Remove pages 45 through 58. Insert the new sheets (45-59).
Chapter 7: Remove pages 21/22, 25/26, and 79/80. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 9: Remove the entire section. Insert the new sheets.
Update
Chapter 2: Introduction has been re-phrased and an “Important” has been
added.
Chapter 4: Procedure for adding the possibility for adjusting the Laser scanner
(earlier AutoCheck modules) is included. For the PC Module a Main
Board upgrade kit has been included and the procedure for replacing
drives has been updated.
Chapter 7: New screen dumps.
Issue 917-370, 200203-1
-
The majority of the changes are due to the changeover from selling modules to
selling assembled analyzers.
Service Note:
Front: Remove the entire Table of Contents. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 1: Remove pages 3 through 6. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 4: Remove pages 1/2, 37 through 40, and 53 through 60. Insert the new
sheets.
Chapter 5: Remove entire chapter. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 7: Remove pages 17/18 and 93/94. Insert the new sheets.
Chapter 9: Remove pages 1/2 and 19/20. Insert the new sheets.
Update
Chapter 1: Analyzer sales instead of module sales.
Chapter 2: Error message #752, which is not used, has been deleted.
Chapter 4: Procedures for replacing the fans on the Main Board (PCM-5890)
and in the AutoCheck Module have been revised due to the
introduction of new types of fans.
Chapter 5: The paragraph “Module Installation, New Analyzer” has been
removed. The paragraphs “Module installation Test”, “Service
Test”, and “Service Disk” have been revised, as the analyser is able
to print a module installation test report and as it is no longer
required to send a service disk to RMED upon the completion of
service work.
Chapter 7: New screen dump “Liquid Sensor Test”.
Description of “Service Test” has been revised.
Chapter 9: New part number has been added (AutoCheck fan).
Issue 917-372, 200206-1
- 1
ABL700 Series Service Manual Date of Issue
Date of Issue
Manufacturer
Publication August 1998
Edition 200206-1
Ordering 989-422
Number
ã Radiometer Medical A/S, Copenhagen, Denmark, 1998. All rights reserved.
- 1

ABL700 Series Service Manual 989 422 Issue 200206 1 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ABL700 Series Service Manual 989 422 Issue 200206 1 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Service Manual

for ABL™700 series

3. Checkout and Adjustment

ABL700 Series 4. Replacement Procedures

6. Periodic Service Procedures

10. Drawings and Test Reports

Contents This chapter contains the following topics:

Warranty Radiometer Medical A/S cannot guarantee the instrument's performance

Non-Original Spare Parts and Accessories in General

Continued on next page

Service Policy, Continued

Continued on next page

Service Policy, Continued

Test Equipment and Tools

Continued on next page

Test Equipment and Tools, Continued

Windows 95 To be used with

Introduction This paragraph explains the term “Installation ID”.

Analyzers An analyzer may consist of the following modules:

Installation ID A complete working analyzer is denoted an “installation”. An installation is in

Introduction This paragraph explains the key concept.

Continued on next page

Key Concept, Continued

Replacement of In case the basic key becomes defective it must be replaced.

Contents Procedures, Service Error Codes...................................................................... 2-2

Procedures, Service Error Codes

# Message Interpretation Service Actions

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

85 Measured value Parameter value is Perform a complete QC and

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

94 Measured value Parameter Check the electrode channel for

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

141 LIS/HIS: Low The configuration Reconfigure the connection.

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

205 Westgard Rule Parameter No action required.

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

210 Calibration An error occurred on Check the Calibration Status for

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

234 Oxi Sample Sample spectrum Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

238 Spectrometer Electronic adjustment Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

248 Spectrometer A/D converter trigger Perform an 'OXI Complete Test'

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued

Continued on next page

Procedures, Service Error Codes, Continued